Home

3 - Motion Control Engineering, Inc.

1. 19 Seismic 0 Off Off 1 Stop at next floor Stop next flr Seismic switch on amp displacement switch off 2 Halt Halt 3 Bring at next Bring next flr floor 4 Done Done 5 Seismic Seismic Run at reduced speed on seismic operation 20 Relays 0 Init 1 Stopped Stopped Relays are de energized 2 Up Up Relays are energized for up run 3 Down Down Relays are energized for down run 4 Stopping up Stopping up Relays are energized for up slowdown 5 Stopping down Stopping dn Relays are energized for down slowdown 6 Wait Wait Delay prior to energizing relays 7 Pick error PICK ERROR The relays did not pick the relays proving circuit did not open when the drive went into run 8 Drop error DROP ERROR The relays did not drop The relays proving circuit did not close when all relays where dropped 9 State 9 State 9 21 Brake 0 I nit 1 Off Off Brake relay is dropped 2 Lift wait Wait for Lift Delay on brake energization 3 Lifting Lifting Brake lifting 4 Lifted Lifted Brake is considered lifted after time out of lifting state 5 Drop delay Drop delay Delay after stop on dropping brake 6 Relevel lift delay RelevLiftDel Delay on picking brake after start during relevels 7 Relevel lifted Lifted Relev Brake is considered lifted after time out of lifting state 8 Relevel drop RelevDropDel Delay in dropping brake during releveling delay 9 Dropp
2. U3 Unit Unit for parameters ENGLISH ENGLISH English Metric U4 Overspeed Test Allows overspeed test during inspec No No tion Yes No U5 Restore Defaults Reset all parameters to default val ues U6 Drive I nfo Drive information Drive Version BootVersion Boot Version and Cube ID Drive CubelD U7 HEX Monitor Hex Monitor U8 Language Sel Selects Language for operator text English English English deutsch U9 BASICS Operation Selects Open Loop or Closed Loop Open Loop Open Loop drive Operation Closed Loop A Danger Do not change drive parameters while elevator is running Incorrect values can cause erratic elevator operation 3 14 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index__ _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 HPV 600 Drive Faults Open Loop If a drive fault occurs the Fault LED on the front panel will light To access drive faults using the hand held programmer go to the FAULTS FO menu This menu has two sub menus ACTIVE FAULTS F1and FAULT HISTORY F2 Use the arrow keys to access the desired menu Ifthe drive is faulted ACTIVE FAULTS will display the present fault FAULT HIS TORY will display faults that occurred previously Followingis a list of detected drive faults Listed after each fault is a description of what the fault is and suggested corrective action Table 3 2 HPV 600 Drive Faults Open Loop
3. _ oO tn NI a EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ From Relay Board 4 12 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Limit Board Adjustment Parameter Entry In parameter entry mode you can change settings for Parameter 1 Car speed in FPM Determines the speed which the board will use as high speed during the Normal Learn operation Please refer to Normal Learn on page 4 15 Parameter 2 Limit section overspeed in FPM Sets the speed at which the board will open the safety circuit bringing the car to an emergency stop Parameter 3 Rope Gripper overspeed in FPM Sets the speed at which the board will set the rope gripper Please refer to Limit Functionality on page 4 16 Parameter 4 Flags Displays and allows you to change three settings Rope gripper enabled If LED DS17 is on the rope gripper is enabled Rope gripper overspeed from overspeed parameter If LED DS18 is on the Parameter 2 Limit section overspeed in FPM value will be used to trip the rope gripper Rope gripper overspeed from governor input If LED DS19 is on the governor input will be used to trip the rope gripper The limit overspeed DS18 on and the governor input DS19 on can both be enabled Either condition would then trigger the rope gripper Parameter entry mode and active parameter displayed are indicated by Parameter Indication Parameter D525 DS24 DS23 0 Blinking Off Off 1 Car s
4. Car Controller Board Outputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AF 25 AF26 A3 1 to A3 2 Run up UP AF 17 AF 18 A2 1 to A2 2 Run down DN AF 27 AF 28 A3 3 to A3 4 Brake BK AF 19 AF20 A2 3 to A2 4 High speed HS AF 29 AF30 A3 5 to A3 6 Medium speed MS AF 21 AF 22 A2 5 to A2 6 Door bypass DBYP AF 31 AF 32 A3 7 to A3 8 Access top lock bypass ATLB AF 23 AF 24 A2 7 to A2 8 Access bottom lock bypass ABLB BF 25 BF 26 B3 1 to B3 2 Door open DO BF 17 BF 18 B2 1 to B2 2 Rear door open RDO BF27 BF 28 B3 3 to B3 4 Door close DC BF 19 BF 20 B2 3 to B2 4 Rear door close RDC BF 29 BF 30 B3 5 to B3 6 Door Nudging Freight doors NUDG Fire command BF 21 BF 22 B2 5 to B2 6 Rear door nudging Freight RNUG doors fire car command BF 31 BF 32 B3 7 to B3 8 Door cam CAM BF 23 BF 24 B2 7 to B2 8 Drive reset DRES CF 25 CF26 C3 1 to C3 2 Pump or MG start STRT CF 17 CF 18 C2 1to C2 2 Pump or MG run RUN CF 27 CF 28 C3 3 to C3 4 Brake lift BL CF 19 CF20 C2 3 to C2 4 Brake relevel BRL CF 29 CF30 C3 5 to C3 6 Full field FF CF 21 CF 22 C2 5 to C2 6 Drive pattern enable PE CF 31 CF 32 C3 7 to C3 8 Approach speed AS CF 23 CF 24 C2 7 to C2 8 Leveling speed LS Contents Index _MCE Web 5 25 Tricon Configuration MeE Car Top Board The car top board may be mounted in either the controller cabinet the cartop box or in the car station Its inputs and outputs are connected to equipment normally located on the top of the car or in the
5. Upper rail bracket Upper tape hanger lamp Steel tape w Bolt the upper tape hanger assembly to the bracket at the chosen location 4 Referring to the figure above push the end of the steel tape through the bottom of the tape hanger clamp 5 Loop the tape as shown and again insert the end through the tape hanger clamp allow ing about 1 inch to protrude above the clamp 6 Tighten the clamp bolts 7 Run the car down the hoistway on Inspection Slowly play out the steel tape as you go Contents Index _MCE Web 2 25 Installation Nes Bottom Bracket and Tensioner Installation The tape should be attached in the pit low enough so that when the car is on the fully compressed buffer the stick and any car devices do not come in contact with the tape hold down assembly 1 Using the clips provided attach the bottom bracket to the back of the guide rail as shown below The bracket should be about 6 inches below the lowest floor level and must be square to the guide rail Figure 2 12 Bottom Tape Bracket Installation Lower tape hanger Double nut Tension spring Lower bracket 2 Loosen the nuts on the spring tension bolt until only two threads are showing 3 Removethe tape hanger clamp 4 Slowly run the car down until the buffer is fully compressed Check that there is suffi cient clearance between the car and the lower rail bracket 5 Position the steel tape against the lower tape hanger and
6. Fault Description Corrective Action AtoD Fault Control board ADC con Cycle power to controller and see if fault clears If not replace verter not responding Control board Brake Alarm Dynamic brake resistor Confirm motor data correctly entered into drive braking resis overcurrent tance connected and sized correctly car balanced correctly NOTE After drive stops this becomes a Brake IGBT Fault Brk Hold Fault Brake hold state does not match commanded state Disabled Brk IGBT Fault Brake IGBT overcurrent Overcurrent of braking IGBT has occurred Fault latches but does not shut car down until it stops to allow passengers to exit Confirm motor data correctly entered braking resistance connected and sized correctly car balanced correctly Brk Pick Fault Brake pick state does not match commanded state Disabled Bridge Fault Charge Fault Power module detecting overcurrent or over temperature condition DC Bus has not charged Overcurrent Check proper sizing and connection of dynamic braking resistor Check for short in motor wiring or windings Over temperature Check drive cooling fan and heatsink Replace drive if fault cannot be corrected with above measures DC Bus did not reach desired stabilized voltage level within 2 seconds Check incoming AC power If OK replace drive Comm Fault Invalid Checksum The programmer received four consecu tive invalid messages
7. lo Floor Run Down Magnet Normal Limit EE Floor level 1 5 inches E Floor Level Magnet Final Limit P Floor level 6 inches Q Q Q LED D2 Board power indicator m oooooooo0o0o00Q 110VAC LANDING SYSTEM SENSOR INTERFACE BOARD Contents dex _MCE Web uouuluo5 5 nis ais uouluo5 z I nstallation PA eg Seismic Equipment A ringon a string circuit detects excessive counterweight motion caused by a seismic distur bance When motion is detected the car will make an emergency stop After stopping the car will move to and level at the next available floor in the direction away from the counterweight After leveling the car will open its doors and allow passengers to exit Modes of operation other than Automatic for example Fire Phase II or attendant mode allow different operating options Please refer to Seismic Operation on page 1 21 The following illus tration is an example of wiring connections for seismic equipment Your system may be differ ent so always follow the print in the wiring diagrams specific to your job Figure 2 16 Seismic Device Connections Seismic Switches RB GND RB TB5 P24 AO 2 P24 GND RSD 1N4004 150 ohm 10 W RS will be energized normally RS 1 9 JH O ws 5 Counter Weight 1 EXT1 Displacement CF 2 OO 5 SAS Seismic Switch EXT1 C
8. Contents Index _MCE Web 5 61 Tricon Configuration Mem To move between the sub menus use 4orleft arrow key to move left 6orright arrow key to move right To move into the sub menu use 8 or key to move into sub menu making it the current menu To retum to the previous menu use the key Floor Setup This Floor Setup screen has fields to enter values for position indicator out puts and to indicate whether or not there are hall lanterns associated with an opening To move into the Floor Setup screen use the 8 or key To retum to the previous menu use the key Figure 5 10 PI Board Setup Floor Setup Menu Position Indicator Board Entry here determines which relays on associated Terminal board will close to drive Potential Lantern Locations LU LD RLU RLD position indicators at this floor Y N Y N Floor Y indicates lantern is present at this location N indicates no lantern at this position LU Front opening Up lantern LD Front opening Down lantern RLU Rear opening Up lantern RLD Rear opening Down lantern 5 62 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Main Menus favalueis entered in a PI entry field the associated board is used to drive position indi cator outputs at this floor The value entered determines which relay or relays in the group will be enabled O type Terminal Board 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 If the value associated with an outp
9. Figure 4 3 Limit Board Fault LED Meanings r m iw A Valud 64 32 16 EBD 9101 LEE stan 0 z an N Gig oan Zpoan r m Ed o 8 NN 5 Overspeed at HDSL Table 4 2 Limit Board Fault I ndications LED Sum Fault No LEDs lighted No fault Overspeed up fault Overspeed down fault Overspeed at HUSL high speed up slowdown switch Overspeed at USL up slowdown switch Overspeed at HDSL high speed down slowdown switch Overspeed at DSL down slowdown switch Direction Failure Inspection Failure Up o NI 0 Uj A WW N MI O Inspection Failure Down m o Stall Failure Up m m Stall Failure Down m N No demand failure up m UJ No demand failure down m B Bypass locks failure Momentarily pressing switch S3 displays a counter showing the number of times the fault has occurred Holding switch S3 for seven seconds clears the fault counter Momentarily pressing switch S1 resets the Limit board 4 6 Manual 42 02 2100 Contents Index MCEWeb Limit Board Adjustment Operation I nspection Setup Before High Speed Before the car can be moved on inspection a Learn operation must be performed using the Limit board The Inspection Speed Learn operation allows the Limit board to learn the elevator inspection speed Once learned the Limit board can prevent the car from exceeding 150
10. Safety Installation Considerations Equipment Grounding AC Power Connections Motor and Brake Connections Construction Operation Completing Installation Car to Group Wiring e Running on Inspection Mode If you have installed Tricon controls before you might want to use the Tricon Quick Start Up guide that came with the job prints 2 1 Installation A ek Install Sequence This is the installation sequence for installing and setting up Tricon controls Install and ground major system components this section Connect AC power this section Connect motor brake tach or encoder velocity encoder if used this section Set up for Construction operation if needed this section Complete installation of peripheral equipment hoistway equipment etc this section Complete field wiring this section Controller parameter adjustments Section 5 nspection start up this section and drive information in Section 3 nitial drive adjustments Section 3 nspection speed learn operation Section 4 nspection operation Final tuning and drive adjustments Section 3 Normal speed learn operation Section 4 Final Testing Section 4 Release to operation Supporting I nformation The drawing package accompanying your controller provides information to make all connec tions and install all controller related components and is the primary guide to system installation Section 5 of this ma
11. Car 1 lobby floor number Enter the lobby floor for this car Modem initialization string 1 Enter the initialization string for the modem used for the primary dial out line See modem docu mentation 29 Modem initialization string 2 Enter the initialization string for the modem used for the second ary dial out line See modem documentation 5 67 ow Tricon Configuration Nem Car Lockout Setup Car lockouts prevent a car from being sent to a particular floor using front and or rear car panel buttons unless a key switch authorizing that access is also enabled Car lockouts are imple mented in hardware through a CCL Car call lockout I O 24 board typically mounted in the car panel enclosure On any operating mode other than Automatic the key switches are bypassed and full access is allowed When setting up car call lockouts you start with Car lockouts screen 1 which corresponds to the first floor served by the car and progress up through the building In the example below we programmed Front and Rear lockouts on Floor 3 Front lockout only on Floor 5 and Rear lock out only on Floor 7 Figure 5 12 Car Lockouts Example L TYPE TERMINAL BOARD FRONT REAR When wiring the key switch inputs though note that each lockout switch is wired to the next available terminal board input Only Yes responses cause an input to be reserved No re
12. Figure 2 4 Speed Sensor Mounting top view If the motor bolt is 1 2 inch a spacer large locknut washer is used in the mounting hole to keep the mounting bracket centered spacer included Various size spacers are provided SO you can center the sensor over NTI the magnet 2 14 Manual 42 02 2T00 Construction Operation Construction Operation If required it is possible to run the car during construction without all hoistway limits door and gate switches in place In this mode the car runs at inspection speed 45 fpm If they arein place cartop controls may be used or the car may be run from the controller If desired a tempo rary run box may be installed Minimal Requirements Minimal equipment requirements are The governor must be wired into the Safety string f needed a temporary controller box may be connected Please refer to Temporary Run Box Hookup on page 2 17 Motor brake and drive connected and set up Velocity encoder or tach if used Normal and Final Limit Switches installed and connected Jumper Requirements Temporary jumpers as necessary may be placed across the following connections in order to 2 run the car on construction inspection PMT designates a panel mounted terminal connector like those typically used for brake connections Table 2 1 Construction Mode Jumper Requirements Bypassed Functions Jumper Connections Governor 11096 Overspeed GOV
13. None None None to recognition delay timer 4 mspd1 mspd15 C2 Logic I nputs Log In 1 TB1 16 Logic input 1 DRIVE DRIVE ENABLE ENABLE Log In 2 TB1 17 Logic input 2 RUN CONTACT CONFIRM Log In 3 TB1 18 Logic input 3 FAULT FAULT RESET RESET Log In 4 TB1 19 Logic input 4 UP DN STEP REF BO Log In 5 TB1 20 Logic input 5 S Curve STEP REF B1 Sel 0 Log In 6 TB1 21 Logic input 6 STEP REF STEP REF B2 BO Log In 7 TB1 22 Logic input 7 STEP REF STEP REF B3 Bl Log In 8 TB1 23 Logic input 8 STEP REF RUN DoWN B2 Log In 9 TB1 24 Logic input 9 External RUN UP Fault 1 C3 Logic Outputs Log Out 1 tb1 9 Logic Output 1 Ready To SPEED REG Run RLS Log Out 2 tb1 10 Logic Output 2 Run Com NO FUNCTION mand Log Out 3 tb1 11 Logic Output 3 MTR NO FUNCTION OVER LOAD Log Out 4 tb1 12 Logic Output 4 READY TO NO FUNCTION RUN Relay Coil 1 Relay 1 Function Selection FAULT READY TO RUN Relay Coil 2 Relay 2 Function Selection SPEED SPEED REG REG RLS RLS C4 Analog Outputs Analog Out 1 Analog Output 1 TORQUE TORQUE REF REF Analog Out 2 Analog Output 2 SPEED SPEED FEEDBK FEEDBK Utility UO U1 Password Password 000000 000000 U2 Hidden I tems Enable or disable hidden parameters ENABLE ENABLE Enable Disable Contents Index _MCE Web 3 13 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 1 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open Loop MeE
14. each Sets the maximum number of cars in the dispatcher group ETA Brake to brake run time 0 25 5 8 0 sec Enter approximate one floor run time Used by the dispatcher in determining assignments ETA High speed floor run time 1 25 5 2 0 sec speed run time Used by the dis patcher in determining assign ments Enter approximate one floor high ETA Door open or close time 1 25 5 2 5 sec or close door Used by the dis patcher in determining assign ments Enter approximate time to open ETA Door transition time 0 25 5 4 0 sec open time Used by the dis patcher in determining assign ments Enter approximate average door ETA Reassignment pen alty 0 25 5 5 0 sec When the dispatcher analyzes signing a hall call already assigned to a particular car the period of time set here is added to the ETA of the car under con sideration This penalty com pensates for the additional time the dispatcher will consume in reassigning the call ETA times and considers reas Reset fire status Yes 1 No 0 yes no Setting this parameter to 1 yes resets all internal memorized fire conditions If no fire input is active the group will return to normal operation DO NOT use this technique if in an actual fire situation The parameter will automatically return a No state after resetting Parameter 8 10 Parameter
15. 0 0 2 5 1 0 1 0 C3 02 Slip Comp Time Primary Time Delay N A to Flux Vector ms 0 10000 1200 200 C3 04 Slip Comp Regen Slip Compensation During Regen 0 1 1 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled N A to Flux Vector Torque Compensation C4 01 Torque Comp Gain Torque Compensation Gain N A to Flux Vector 0 00 2 50 1 00 1 00 C4 02 Torque Comp Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time ms 0 10000 2200 200 Time N A to Flux Vector ASR Tuning Flux Vector only C5 01 ASR P Gain 1 ASR Proportional Gain 1 Flux Vector only 0 00 300 00 20 00 20 00 C5 02 ASR I Time 1 ASR Integral Time 1 Flux Vector only sec 0 0 10 000 0 200 0 200 C5 03 ASR P Gain 2 ASR Proportional Gain 2 Flux Vector only 0 00 300 00 20 00 20 00 C5 04 ASR Time 2 ASR Integral Time 2 Flux Vector only sec 0 0 10 000 0 500 0 500 Carrier Frequency C6 03 Carrier Freq Max Carrier frequency Upper Limit kHz 2 0 15 0 KVA 8 0 dependent Preset Reference Field Adjustable Parameters are shaded The upper limit is the max FPM value set by O1 03 Set this parameter before setting D1 01 thru D1 17 D1 01 Reference 1 Preset Reference 1 Not used FPM 0 0 0 0 0 0 D1 02 High High Speed must be gt D1 07 FPM 0 0 50 0 m D1 03 High Level High Level must be gt D1 05 and lt D1 07 FPM 0 0 30 0 13 0 D1 04 Reference 4 Preset Reference 4 Not used FPM 0 0 0 0 0 0 D1 05 Level Level Speed must be lt D1 03 FPM 0 0 15 0 2 5 D1 06 Reference 6 Preset Reference
16. Installation A eE Limit and Slowdown Switches The limit and slowdown switch arrangement for your particular job is described in the job prints Generally for car speeds under 200 feet per minute CTRL No 1 software Normal Limit The normal directional limits should be set open when the car is 1 5 before floor level at the terminal floors Final Limit The final limits should be set to open no sooner than 6 beyond the floor Top Terminal Slowdown The slowdown switch should be set to open immediately AFTER the US sensor comes on the top floor slowdown magnet This can be seen by monitoring the US relay on the SET9000 sensor interface board LED D3 lights This slowdown switch opens U1S1 to U1S2 Bottom The slowdown switch should be set to open immediately AFTER the DS sensor comes on the bottom floor slowdown magnet This can be seen by monitoring the DS relay on the SET9000 sensor interface board LED D4 lights This slowdown switch opens D1S1 to D182 Generally for car speeds over 200 feet per minute CTRL No 2 software Top Switch 1 The terminal slowdown switch that is furthest from the floor should be set to open immediately AFTER the US sensor comes on the top floor high speed slowdown magnet This can be seen by monitoring the HU relay on the SET9000 sensor interface board LED D3 lights This slowdown switch opens U2S1 to U2S2 Top Switch 2 The terminal slowdown switch that is closest to the floor should b
17. Measure and record car speed on inspection and high speed This is done to allow you to re scale the car speed on inspection after overspeeding the car Placea full load in the car The car should be level at the top floor The car should be on door disable Be prepared to stop the car if the safety fails to apply 1 Move the regulator trip disable header jumper to the disable position center pin jumped to D pin left side 2 Sendthe car down two floors from the bottom monitoring the car speed and position 3 As the caris running turn the contract speed pot clockwise until the car is at the desired tripping speed 4 The car may not set the governor at the overspeed setting If not you must stop the car before the car gets to the terminal landing at a speed greater than contract speed 5 Re scale the car speed on inspection before moving the car 6 Remove any tiedown that may have been placed on the safety 4 22 Manual 42 02 2100 Contents Index _MCE Web Final Test Problems Overspeeding 1025 Regulator The following are some of the prob lems that may prevent you from getting up to the governor tripping speed The contract speed pot will only increase the car speed until the raw tach voltage is 150VDC If the over speed is not achieved before this tach voltage you will not be able to increase the speed If this is the case you can insert a 100 K OHM resistor in series with one wire off the raw t
18. Possible noise or bad programmer connector Check connector on Control board and programmer Replace Control board or programmer if fault cannot be corrected Comm Fault No Drive Handshake The programmer lost communications with the drive Control board Possible noise or bad programmer connector Check connector on Control board and programmer Replace Control board or programmer if fault cannot be corrected Contactor Fault Contactor state does not match commanded state Drive has turned on command to close main contactor and Con tactor Confirm signal is not present for amount of time specified by Contact Flt Time parameter Cube Data Fault The drive parameters are invalid Check drive parameters Cycle drive power If fault recurs go to Utility menu select Restore Defaults If fault persists replace Control board Note Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameter be set to their correct values Cube ID Fault Drive identification is invalid Check all drive parameters Cycle power to drive If fault recurs go to Utility menu and select Restore Defaults f fault persists replace Control board Note The Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameters to be set to their correct values Contents dex _MCE Web 3 15 Startup amp Drive Adjustment MeE Table 3 2 HPV 600 Drive Faults Open Loop Curr Reg Fault Actual current does
19. Switches S1 S2 and S3 S1 Used with S2 to set parameters or during normal operation displays or resets trip counter Press momentarily to display the limit and rope gripper trip count on LEDs DS17 through DS242 Fault Parameter Learn LEDs in the board illustration following Sum of lighted LEDs Count Mis Q psi8 gt W ps19 oO N N 0o wo o o O OAOA A A na SJ 9 a AK Ad Ad AS 8 16 32 64 O CN N N N 09 128 C re Press and hold S1 for 5 seconds to clear the trip counter If a fault code had been dis played it will also be cleared S2 Resets the safety for a limit fault enters parameter setting mode Used with S1 to change parameter values Use S3 to exit parameter setting mode Parameter I ndication Parameter DS25 DS24 DS23 Blinking Off Off 1 Car speed in FPM Blinking Off On 2 Limit section overspeed in FPM Blinking On Off 3 Rope gripper overspeed in FPM Blinking On On 4 Flags DS17 On rope gripper enabled DS18 On rope gripper overspeed trip from overspeed parameter enabled DS19 On rope gripper overspeed from governor input enabled Press S2 momentarily and release to reset the safety for a limit fault If five consecutive limit trips have occurred during a short interval limit trips will stop automatically reset ting In this event pressing S2 momentarily also resets the limit trip counter and re enables
20. To edit a field Keep pressing the key until you reach the desired field Enterthe value using the numbers on the keypad Usethe key to accept You will move to the next field If you are on the last field you will move back to the Lantern Parameters screen Usethe key to abort change You will move back to the Lantern Parameters screen To return to the PI Board setup menu use the key Table 5 26 Indicator Parameters Edit Screen Editable Field Description Value Blink ON time This sets the time the lantern will stay ON for the first blink of the down direction If set zero there will be no double ding for the down direction Blink OFF time This sets the time the lantern will stay OFF after the first ding of the down direction double ding Wait time This sets the time the lantern will stay OFF if switching from Up to Down or vice versa Contents Index _MCE Web 5 65 Tricon Configuration Mem BMS Setup Figure 5 11 Car BMS Setup Screen The BMS board provides a modem control interface between the Tricon controller and a remote monitoring system Grayed areas apply only to group dispatcher application Table 5 27 BMS Screen Parameters i HHU Display Sed piis Units Help 1 Job identification name 8 characters 2 Phone number 1 Enter the primary dial out phone number 3 Phone number 2 Enter the secondary
21. 1 floor 8 or down arrow key to move forward one 1 floor Contents Index _MCE Web 5 55 Tricon Configuration Nes To edit the selected floor Press the key when the cursor is on the desired floor Keep pressing the key until you reach the desired field Use the left and right arrow keys to move in multi character fields Move to the desired entry field a A M um Enter the desired characters M ES a zt IMMER 3 character display Display will right justify and truncate if more characters are entered than can be displayed 2 character display Enterthe value using the numeric keypad or the Yes No keys to scroll through other character selections Press the key to accept You will move to the next field If you are on the last field you will move back to a view screen Pressthe key to abort change You will move back to a view screen 5 56 Manual 42 02 2T00 Main Menus Position I ndicators View amp Edit Screens CTOP CSTA or HALL Board O type Terminal boards mounted in specific locations on Cartop Car station or Hall I O 24 boards may be used to drive position indicators directly or to control a light duty CE fixture driver board If your PI needs are limited this may provide an economical display solution The Position Indicators menu allows you to set up from one to three of the O type Terminal boards to directly drive indicators or to set up one O
22. 128 Insp Enable contr Insp yes no no yes no Allow construction Inspection with bypass With bypass switches switches 129 Insp Disable top of car yes no no yes no If set to Yes controller ignores top of car inspection input Set to Yes if car does not have top of car inspection switch yes no f set to Yes controller ignores IN CAR inspection switch input disabling in car inspection operation inspection switch 130 Insp Disable in car inspection switch yes no yes 131 Normal Independent 0 3 1 each Independent riser behaves as follows riser mode 1 to 3 0 Disabled will not accept calls O off 1 Normal will work only on SIMPLEX 2 Concurrent will work together with group calls 3 Automatic car will switch to independent riser and out of group if any calls are made on the independent riser 132 Inspection High inspec yes no no yes no Set both APP and LEV outputs when moving tion speed this allows inspection speed and approach speed to be set separately with certain drives Mitsubishi VVVF 133 Car switch Enable car yes no no yes no Set to yes for car switch attendant opera switch operation tion 134 Normal Pulse buzzer yes no no yes no If set to Yes buzzer will sound briefly when with car call registered a car call is registered 135 Normal Hold car last yes no no yes no If set to Yes when stopping at a floor the direction when stopping car will establish direction from a hall
23. A1 Check motor machine and brake for possi ble mechanical binds Check for correct setting of motor param eters Check for excessive motor current Tq Lim 2Hi 4cube Torque limits based on programmed motor data exceed drive capacity Verify that the drive is sized correctly Verify that the motor parameters are set correctly Verify that the MTR TORQ LI MIT A1 and REGEN TORQ LI MIT A1 are set correctly Undervolt Fault DC Bus voltage low DC bus voltage dropped below user entered values of INPUT L L Volts A4 and UV FAULT LEVEL A4 Check braking resis tance and connections Verify proper AC input voltage to drive Possible disturbance on AC line Undervolt Alarm DC Bus voltage low dur ing run 3 56 Manual 42 02 2T00 DC bus voltage dropped below user entered values of INPUT L L Volts A4 and UV ALARMLEVEL A4 Check braking resis tance and connections Verify proper AC input voltage to drive Possible disturbance on AC line Contents Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive HPV 900 High Speed Adjustment The drive should be running on inspection speed at this point When commanded to run in the up direction the car should run up when commanded to run down the car should run down Use a hand tach to confirm that the speed displayed on the drive programmer at the parameter DISPLAY DO ELEVATOR DATA D1 SPEED REFERENCE exactly matches the speed at which the car
24. Addresses how fast drive responds to Disable Disable Disable removal of Drive Enable logic input Enable MLT SPD to DLY1 Assigns multi step speed command to rec None None None ognition delay timer 1 mspd1 mspd15 MLT SPD to DLY2 Assigns multi step speed command to rec None None None ognition delay timer 2 mspd1 mspd15 MLT SPD to DLY3 Assigns multi step speed command to rec None None None ognition delay timer 3 mspd1 mspd15 MLT SPD to DLY4 Assigns multi step speed command to rec None None None ognition delay timer 4 mspd1 mspd15 C2 Logic Inputs Log In 1TB1 16 Logic input 1 DRIVE DRIVE ENABLE ENABLE Log In 2 TB1 17 Logic input 2 RUN CONTACT CONFI RM Log In 3 TB1 18 Logic input 3 g z FAULT FAULT RESET RESET Log In 4 TB1 19 Logic input 4 UP DN STEP REF BO Log In 5 TB1 20 Logic input 5 S Curve STEP REF Sel 0 B1 Contents __index_ _MCE Web Table 3 3 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Closed Loop Magnetek HPV 600 Log In 6 TB1 21 Logic input 6 STEP REF STEP REF BO B2 Log In 7 TB1 22 Logic input 7 STEP REF STEP REF B1 B3 Log In 8 TB1 23 Logic input 8 STEP REF RUN DoWN B2 Log In 9 TB1 24 Logic input 9 External RUN UP Fault 1 C3 Logic Outputs Log Out 1 tb1 9 Logic Output 1 Ready To SPEED REG Run RLS Log Out 2 tb1 10 Logic Output 2 Run Com NO FUNC mand TION Log Out
25. Buzzer fire attendant handicap etc BUZ AF 29 AF30 A3 5 to A3 6 Fire light FLT AF 21 AF 22 A2 5 to A2 6 Passing chime PCH AF 31 AF 32 A3 7to A3 8 Attendant up light AUL AF 23 AF 24 A2 7 to A2 8 Attendant down light ADL BO 26 B3 1 to B3 2 Position indicator 1 PI1 BO 18 B2 1 to B2 2 Position indicator 2 PI2 BO 28 B3 3 to B3 4 Position indicator 3 PI3 BO 20 B2 3 to B2 4 Position indicator 4 PI4 BO 30 B3 5 to B3 6 Position indicator 5 PI5 BO 22 B2 5 to B2 6 Position indicator 6 PI6 BO 32 B3 7 to B3 8 Position indicator 7 PI7 BO 24 B2 7 to B2 8 Position indicator 8 PI8 CL 1 C3 1 to C3 2 Car call ack Light floor 1 CCA1 CL 2 C2 1 to C2 2 Car call ack Light floor 2 CCA2 CL 3 C3 3 to C3 4 Car call ack Light floor 3 CCA3 CL 4 C2 3 to C2 4 Car call ack Light floor 4 CCA4 CL 5 C3 5 to C3 6 Car call ack Light floor 5 CCA5 CL 6 C2 5 to C2 6 Car call ack Light floor 6 CCA6 CL 7 C3 7 to C3 8 Car call ack Light floor 7 CCA7 CL 8 C2 7 to C2 8 Car call ack Light floor 8 CCA8 Contents Index _MCE Web 5 29 Tricon Configuration Mek Hall Board Table 5 10 Hall Board HALL N v6 2 Input Examples A17 1 2000 HALL N Terminals Connectors Name Label AO 1 A1 1 Fire recall switch FIRE AO 2 A1 2 Fire smoke detectors bypass switch FBYP AO 3 A1 3 Smoke detectors SMOK AO 4 A1 4 Lobby smoke detector s LSMK AO 5 A1 5 Lobby recall switch EP pr
26. Code Blue car switch operation If the CWS input is ON the car may only be run from the cartop inspection station If set and the CWS input is continuously ON the car will run at reduced speed in response to a Lobby Phase 1 fire recall If set and the CWS input is continuously ON the car will run at reduced speed in response to a Lobby Phase 1 fire recall only if the recall floor is above the counter weight position 1 21 Tricon General I nformation Ne Seismic I nput and Output Definitions Please refer to Seismic Equipment on page 2 38 for additional explanation CWS Counterweight Displacement Switch input Connected to a relay operated by the counterweight displacement switch or to the switch directly When triggered the car will make an emergency stop then move to and level at the nearest floor in the direction away from the counterweight Once leveled the car will open its doors and allow passengers to exit If the car is on Fire Phase 2 the doors will operate as defined for that mode When in earthquake operation the SAL Seismic Activity Light output will be enabled f on independent or attendant service the BUZ buzzer output will be enabled until the car is returned to a landing SAS Seismic Activity Switch input Connected to a switch or seismic device When trig gered a car in motion will drop all car and hall calls and proceed to the nearest landing Once leveled the car will open it
27. Contract Car Spd Elevator Contract Speed fpm 0 3000 400 Contract Mtr Spd Motor Speed at elevator contract speed rpm 50 3000 1130 E Response Sensitivity of speed regulator rad 1 0 20 0 10 10 sec Inertia System inertia sec 0 25 50 00 2 0 2 0 Inner Loop Xover Inner speed loop crossover frequency rad sec 0 1 20 0 2 0 2 0 with Ereg speed regulator Gain Reduce Mult Percent of response of speed regulator 96 10 100 100 100 used in low gain Mode Gain Chng Level Speed level to change to low gain mode 0 100 0 100 0 with internal gain switch Tach Rate Gain Helps with effects of rope resonance 96 0 30 0 0 0 Spd Phase Margin Sets phase margin of speed regulator y 45 90 80 80 with PI speed regulator Ramped Stop Time Time to ramp from rated torque to zero sec 0 2 50 0 20 0 20 with torque ramp down stop function Contact Flt Time Time before a contactor fault is declared sec 0 10 5 00 10 50 2 0 Brake Pick Time Time before a brake pick fault is declared sec 0 5 00 1 00 0 5 Brake Hold Time Time before a brake hold fault is declared sec 0 5 00 0 20 0 00 Overspeed Level Threshold for detection of overspeed fault 100 0 150 0 115 0 115 Overspeed Time Time before an overspeed fault is declared sec 0 9 99 1 00 1 00 Overspeed Mult Multiplier for overspeed test 96 100 150 125 125 Encoder Pulses Encoder counts per revolution ppr 600 10000 1024 1024 Spd Dev Lo Level Range around speed ref
28. Figure 4 1 Limit and 2K Limit Gripper Boards Limit Board Standard 2K Limit Gripper Board Wn 4 2 Manual amp 42 02 2700 Contents Index _MCE Web Limit Board Adjustment Limit Board Standard The limit board monitors the signal from a DC tachometer or an encoder to control car speed under various operating conditions The board monitors direction speed and status by inter preting hoistway switch input states Please refer to Limit Board Diagram on page 4 4 for a more detailed view of the wiring switches and LEDs described here There are two parallel rows of LEDs on the Limit board Input states are displayed by the left row of LEDs D1 D9 The right row D10 D17 displays board fault codes or status Adjusting the Limit board requires the car be run to the terminal landings while in a learn mode Please refer to Operation Inspection Setup Before High Speed on page 4 7 Please refer to Operation Normal Setup High Speed on page 4 7 If any car speed or slowdown adjustments are made after the limits are learned the Limit board learn process must be repeated The limit board must learn the speed of the car on Inspection to provide inspection speed protection The car should be fully adjusted in high speed without going to the terminal landings The hoistway limits must be set to open at the same distance from the terminal landing as the selector magnet slowdowns The board will open the safety c
29. LD 3 tb STD messed 2 2 24 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Completing I nstallation Hoistway Tape Installation The SET 9000 system uses 2 inch wide steel tape The tape is hung from a bracket at the top of the hoistway in a single vertical run to a second bracket at the bottom of the hoistway The bot tom bracket has a tensioning spring that is adjusted to maintain tension on the tape preventing undue movement and possible noise from tape vibration Tape installation includes Top bracket and hanger installation Bottom bracket and tensioner installation Before installing stationary tape ensure the location you choose will have adequate clearance from shaft way beams walls counterweights cab and terminal limit cams Make sure the SET 9000 is not placed too dose to the governor lift arm so that when the car safeties are activated the sensor assembly might be damaged or the car safeties prevented from working properly Top Bracket and Hanger Installation 1 Runthecarup the hoistway on Inspection mode until the counterweight is resting on a fully compressed buffer 2 Usingthe dlips provided attach the top bracket to the back of the elevator guide rail as shown below The bracket should be installed to position the steel tape as close to the car sling as the guide shoe and hoistway equipment dearance will allow Figure 2 11 Top Tape Bracket I nstallation Guide rail di Rail clips
30. Motor Poles gt 64 Setup Fault 3 Motor Poles parameter not set correctly MOTOR POLES A4 must be set to an even number Setup Fault 4 Encoder PPR and Motor Speed parameters not set correctly Check ENCODER PULSES A1 and RATED MTR SPEED A1 Must satisfy formula 300 000 Rated Motor Speed Encoder Pulses 18 000 000 Setup Fault 5 Rated Motor Power and Rated Motor Voltage not set correctly Check RATED MOTOR PWR A4 and RATED MTR VOLTS A4 Must satisfy formula 07184 Motor Pwr Motor Voltage Drive Current Rating Setup Fault 6 Multi Step speed refer ence exceeds contract speed Check SPEED COMMAND 1 through SPEED COMMAND 16 and CONTRACT CAR SPD parameters Setup Fault 7 Run logic inputs are not correctly defined Check LOG I N 1 TB1 16 through LOG IN 9 TB1 24 for correct setting Setup Fault 8 DIR CONFI RM C1 enabled RUN UP RUN DOWN not assigned as logic inputs SPD COM MAND SRC C1 not set to ANALOG I NPUT Not used Speed Dev Desired speed differs from actual speed Actual motor speed differs from demanded speed by more than specified by SPD DEV HI LEVEL A1 or SPD DEV LO LEVEL A1 longer than time specified by SPD DEV TIME A1 Stall Test Fault Motor current exceeds value of STAL TEST LVL for more than time period specified by STALL FAULT TI ME Confirm correct settings of STALL TEST LVL A1 and STALL FAULT TI ME
31. Parameters Screen Main Menus Contents dex _MCE Web 74 Consecutive drive faults 0 255 120 sec If this time elapses without any drive faults time or timeouts the consecutive faults counter is reset to zero The consecutive faults counter is incremented every time a fault or timeout occurs If too many successive faults occur the counter will reach the value set in parameter 73 consecutive faults count and the car will be shut down 75 Drive Number of drive 0 255 5 each Determines number of times the drive will reset attempts before try to reset before giving up giving up 76 Drive Time to hold 0 25 5 0 sec Time to hold drive running after brake out drive run after brake put is turned off Applies only to inspection drops insp operation 77 Drive Time to hold 0 25 5 1 sec Time to hold drive running after brake out drive run after brake put is turned off Applies only to automatic drops auto operation 78 Drive Time to wait 0 25 5 0 sec Car will not attempt to relevel until this time before releveling relev has elapsed This prevents the rapid switch debounce ing of relays if the car bounces 79 Drive Time reset output 0 25 5 3 5 sec Drive reset line On time ON when drive resets 80 Drive Time reset output 0 25 5 4 0 sec Drive reset line Off time OFF when drive reset 81 Brake Time to delay the 0 25 5 O sec Time to delay the brake
32. Use extreme caution Do not touch any components resistors circuit boards power devices or electrical connections without ensuring that high voltage is not present Environmental Considerations e Keep the machine room clean Controllers are generally in NEMA 1 enclosures e Do not install the controller in a dusty area e Do not install the controller in a carpeted area Keep room temperature between 32 and 104 degrees F 0 to 40 degrees C e Prevent condensation on the equipment e Donotinstall the controller in a hazardous location or where excessive amounts of vapors or chemical fumes may be present e Make certain that power line fluctuations are within plus or minus 10 of proper value Air Conditioned Equipment Cabinets If your control or group enclosure is equipped with an air conditioning unit it is very important to observe the following precautions Failure to do so can result in moisture damage to electri cal components Maintain the integrity of the cabinet by using sealed knockouts and sealing any holes made during installation e Donotrunthe air conditioning while the cabinet doors are open Ifyou turn the air conditioner off while it is running wait at least five minutes before restarting it Otherwise the compressor may be damaged Observe the recommended thermostat setting 75 degrees and follow recommended maintenance schedules e Make certain that the air conditioning drain tube remains clear
33. Verify correct setting of OVLD START LEVEL A1 and OVLD TI ME OUT A1 parameters Check for bad motor Overcurr Fault Overspeed Fault Overtemp Fault Phase current exceeded 25096 of rated current Motor speed exceeded user entered parame ters The heatsink tempera ture is too high Contents dex _MCE Web Verify car is balanced correctly Verify proper motor and drive sizing Check for possible bad motor or motor connection Check for bad main contactor contacts Check for mechanical bind in car or machine Check parameters OVERSPEED LEVEL A1 and OVERSPEED TI ME A1 If OK check tracking of motor to desired speed and tune regulator for better performance Drive heatsink temperature has exceeded 1052C 2219F Check fans on drive make sure airflow is adequate 3 35 Startup amp Drive Adjustment MeE Table 3 4 HPV 600 Drive Faults Closed Loop Overvolt Fault The DC Bus voltage is too high Voltage on the DC Bus exceeded 850 volts on a 460 volt drive or 425 volts on a 230 volt drive Check braking resistance con nected and sized properly Check for possible high AC line Confirm input voltage to drive If everything checks OK possi ble bad braking IGBT Drive unit needs to be replaced PCU Data Fault PCU parameters not cor rect Check all drive parameters Cycle power to drive If fault recurs go to the Utility menu and select Restore Defaults f fault persists
34. is labeled and numbered 3 The following table lists the software label that will appear on the I O 24 board upper left cor ner IC and its name as displayed by the HHU Table 5 3 Software Label to HHU Display BOARDS LABEL ON CHIP HHU CTRL Control Card EXT1 Ext1 Board or Ext Board A17 1 Hall Hall Card Hall 2 n Hall Card 2 n CTOP Car top Card CSTA Car Station CSTA2 Car Station 2 PI Position Board CCL Car Call Lock Board Dispatcher HHU Dhall Group Hall Calls Dhall2 Group Hall Calls 2 5 22 Manual 42 02 2T00 Main Menus The hand held unit allows real time observation of all I O 24 board inputs and outputs If the hand held screen below a selected I O board is blank the board is not available or is not com municating If the board is operating properly all 24 inputs and 24 outputs will be displayed at once inputs to the left outputs to the right When an input is turned ON voltage at the pin it will display a I An input turned OFF no voltage at the pin will display a period The exam ple display below is for a Car Station board Active outputs display an O inactive outputs a period Figure 5 2 Input Output Activity Display Example Figure 5 3 Input Output to Connector Correlation CSTA I O 24 Board 8 inputs 8 inputs 8 inputs mE E E 2 8 outputs 8 outputs 8 outputs A2 1 A2 8 B2 1 B2 8 C2 1 C2 8 8 outputs 8 outpu
35. replace Control board Note The Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameters to be set to their correct values Phase Fault Open motor phase Check motor motor connections motor windings and main contactor contacts Setup Fault 1 Rated motor speed poles and frequency not set correctly Parameters RATED EXCIT FREQ A5 RATED MTR SPEED A5 and MOTOR POLES A4 do not satisfy the formula 9 6 lt 120 Excit Freq Motor Poles Motor Speed lt 1222 3 Setup Fault 3 Motor Poles parameter not set correctly MOTOR POLES A4 must be set to an even number Setup Fault 5 The Rated Motor Power and Rated Motor Voltage parameters are not set correctly Check RATED MOTOR PWR A4 and RATED MTR VOLTS A4 They must satisfy the formula 07184 Motor Pwr Motor Voltage Drive Current Rating Setup Fault 6 Multi Step speed refer ence exceeds contract speed Check SPEED COMMAND 1 through SPEED COMMAND 16 and CONTRACT CAR SPD parameters Setup Fault 7 Run logic inputs are not correctly defined Check LOG IN 1 TB1 16 through LOG IN 9 TB1 24 for cor rect setting Setup Fault 8 DIR CONFIRM C1 enabled RUN UP RUN DOWN not assigned as logic inputs SPD COM MAND SRC C1 not set to ANALOG INPUT Not used Setup Fault 9 Incorrect setting of motor parameters Motor parameters must satisfy the following formulas MOTOR MIN VOLTS lt
36. slowdown distance from the floor above 4 Above slow Abve sld1a The car is moving up above the current down vane position in the slowdown vane for the next floor up 5 Above slowdown Above sldn The car is moving up above the current position in the slowdown zone for the floor above out of the slowdown vane 6 Above slow Above sld2 The car is moving up above the current down 2 position in the low speed slowdown zone for the floor above 7 Below level Below level The car is in the leveling zone below the leveled position 8 Below Below The car is below the position not yet at slowdown distance from the floor below 9 Below slowdown Below sldla The car is moving down below the current vane position in the slowdown vane for the next floor down 10 Below slowdown Below sldn The car is moving down below the current position in the slowdown zone for the floor below out of the slowdown vane Contents index _MCE Web Main Menus Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 282 and HHU Version 6 262 03 07 11 Below slowdown Below sld2 The car is moving down below the current 2 position in the low speed slowdown zone for the floor below 12 Leveled error LEVEL ERR The car suddenly lost both LU and LD at the same time 13 No leveling inputs NO LEV INP No leveling inputs have been detected 16 Nudgi
37. the motor has enough torque to level under all load conditions If final leveling speed is too slow the car may stall at leveling speed or leveling current may be too high There is no speed regulation or load compensation in open loop volts hertz mode All adjust ments may cause high acceleration deceleration and holding currents You must check these current levels after each adjustment to insure they are kept as low as possible L 2 Adjust acceleration time parameter 7 for comfortable acceleration while keeping the peak current as low as possible Adjust deceleration time parameter 8 for approximately three inches of final leveling with full load in the down direction The drive is shipped with the S curve in the linear mode parameter 29 0 This is nor mally adequate for open loop mode but you can try setting parameter 29 to a 1 S curve operation and decide which you prefer To reduce the accel and decel currents increase acceleration time and deceleration dis tance The deceleration distance should be approximately 1 foot for every 50FPM of rated contract speed This can be made longer if the motor will not slow down the load properly Final Stop Adjustment Open Loop Volts Hertz Final stop is adjusted using DC injection voltage parameter 12 Injection voltage is applied to the motor when the car is level LU and LD on The DC voltage should not be any larger than required to stop the motor To check the holding curre
38. voltage at the pin will show as an 0 Toreturn to theInput amp Output menu use the key You will need to do this to view other I O boards 5 82 Manual 42 02 2T00 Main Menus Clock Figure 5 20 Dispatcher Clock Set Screen The dispatcher contains a realtime clock that may be set from this screen To move into the Clock Setup view screen use 8 or key To return to the previous menu use key To move between the Clock Setup view and edit screen use key To return to the previous menu use key To edit Toreach the desired field 6 or right arrow key to move right one field 4 or left arrow key 5 to move left one field When you reach the desired field 2 or up arrow to increase one increment 8 or down arrow to decrease one increment When satisfied press the key to start clock Pressthe key to abort change You will move back to the Clock screen To return to the Dispatcher Setup menu use the key Tricon Configuration Nes BMS Setup The BMS board provides a modem control interface between the Tricon dispatcher and a remote monitoring system Table 5 30 BMS Screen Parameters i HHU Display iine rbd Units Help 1 Job identification name 8 characters 2 Phone number 1 Enter the primary dial out phone number 3 Phone number 2 Enter the secondary dial out phone number 4 Call time 1 star
39. will not be held responsible for circuit modifications made in the field unless they are approved in writing by MCE Circuit boards believed to be defective must be sent to MCE for repair and testing Field repair may leave the board with undetected problems Care should be taken when using test leads and jumpers to avoid shorting high voltage or ground to low voltage microprocessor circuits Contents Index _MCE Web 2 3 Installation Nes I nstallation Considerations 1 Dust carbon or metallic particles must not be allowed to accumulate on any part of the control Avoid vibration and shock Avoid rapid temperature change high humidity high ambient temperatures Avoid caustic fumes Prevent electromagnetic interference This may be caused by radio transmitters high voltage inductive spikes from unsuppressed relay coils improper grounding and improper wiring practices Note the following Theouter door will protect against interference only if closed When the door is open do not run high wattage radios near the microprocessor Noise from door operator reactors can cause a problem if mounted on the controller fthe CRT shows lines spikes or other signs of interference check for electromagnetic interference noise by checking the following Proper grounding High voltage wiring running near the MPU board or monitor f seen when the door motor is operating CX or OX are lit on the screen add sup pression around
40. 120 Dispatcher 51 Flags 1 and 16 B44 Buildings without fire sensors under the jurisdiction of the National Building Code of Can ada NBCC only 120 Dispatcher 51 Flag 32 Contents Index _MCE Web 5 89 Tricon Configuration 5 90 Manual 42 02 2T00 Numerics 2K job speed sensor 13 5V 6A Power Supply 5 A A500 drive startup 78 AC Drive parameters MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 7 Yaskawa F7 Drive 68 ACC 143 ACC 2 43 Access 36 Access board 5 Access Inspection 14 Attendant Operation One floor run 15 Attendant operation 15 Attendant operation hall calls 16 Attendant Service 15 26 28 79 B BMS board 8 66 84 Board identification 4 Brake 25 Parameters 43 Buffer tests 19 BUZ 22 Buzzer output 22 C Car Balancing 18 Car call lockouts 68 Car connection hand held unit 12 Car Controller Board Inputs 24 Car Diagnostics 6 Car Door Operation 16 26 27 28 37 39 40 41 Code Blue 52 Fire 45 Lobby 48 Parking 47 75 Car errors 6 19 Car lockouts 68 Car Setup Parameters Screen 38 Car speed in FPM 2K Limit Gripper 13 Car Station Board 10 28 Car Top Inspection 14 16 Car Group Interconnection 39 Cardiac Arrest 19 CCL board 5 CE Driver board 5 54 60 63 CE Indicator Set Up 54 Cleaning hoistway tape 26 Clear fault counter 6 Clock Setup 70 83 Code Blue 19 79 Override Fire Recall 20 Override Independent and Attendant 20 Wait Time 20 Code Blue call inputs and outputs 19 Code Blue Indicator 1
41. 15 0 1 0 1 0 Ovid Start Level Maximum continuous motor current 100 150 110 110 Ovid Time Out Time that defines motor overload curve sec 5 0 120 0 460 0 60 0 Flux Sat Break Flux saturation curve slope change point 0 100 75 75 Flux Sat Slope 1 Flux saturation curve slope for low fluxes 0 200 0 0 0 Flux Sat Slope 2 Flux saturation curve slope for high fluxes 96 0 200 0 50 50 3 30 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Table 3 3 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Closed Loop Magnetek HPV 600 Configure CO C1 User Switches programmed to Run Up and Run Down Spd Command Src Speed Command Source Analog input Multi step Multi step Multi step Serial Run Command Src Run Command Source External TB 1 External External TB Serial TB1 Serial extern Hi Lo Gain Src High low gain change switch source External TB 1 Internal Internal Serial Internal Speed Reg Type Chooses speed regulator Elev spd reg Elev spd Elev spd Pi speed reg reg reg Motor Rotation Allows user to reverse direction of motor Forward Forward Forward or rotation Reverse Reverse Spd Ref Release Determines when speed reference release Reg release Reg Reg release is asserted Brake picked release Cont Confirm Src Determines if an external logic input is None None External TB used for contactor confirmation External TB 1 Pre Torque Source Determines if a pre torque
42. 3 tb1 11 Logic Output 3 MTR NO FUNC OVER TION LOAD Log Out 4 tb1 12 Logic Output 4 READY TO NO FUNC RUN TION Relay Coil 1 Relay 1 Function Selection FAULT READY TO RUN Relay Coil 2 Relay 2 Function Selection SPEED SPEED REG REG RLS RLS C4 Analog Outputs Analog Out 1 Analog Output 1 TORQUE TORQUE REF REF Analog Out 2 Analog Output 2 SPEED SPEED FEEDBK FEEDBK Utility UO U1 Password Password 000000 000000 U2 Hidden Items Enable or disable hidden parameters Enable ENABLE ENABLE Disable U3 Unit Unit for parameters English ENGLISH ENGLISH Metric U4 Overspeed Allows overspeed test during inspection Yes No No Test No U5 Restore Dflts Reset all parameters to default values U6 Drive Info Drive information Drive Version Boot Boot Version Version and Cube ID Drive Cube ID U7 HEX Monitor Hex Monitor U8 Language Sel Selects Language for operator text English English English deutsch U9 BASICS Selects Open Loop or Closed Loop drive Open Loop Open Loop Operation Operation Closed Loop Contents Index _MCE Web 3 33 Startup amp Drive Adjustment MeE HPV 600 Drive Faults Closed Loop If a fault occurs in the drive the Fault LED on the front panel lights To access drive faults using the hand held programmer go to the FAULTS FO menu This menu has two sub menus ACTIVE FAULTS F1and FAULT HISTORY F2 Use the arrow keys to access the desired menu If the drive is fau
43. 40 50 of the cars rated capacity To con firm this the following procedure must be followed 1 2 aU eU 10 Access the car top Run the car on inspection to the center of the hoistway Stop the car so the crosshead on the counterweight is exactly adjacent the crosshead on the car Place a chalk mark on the cables in the machine room and mark the hoist motor so that while the car is run from the machine room you will be able to tell when the car passes through the center of the hoistway Move the car to a convenient floor Place 40 of the car rated capacity in the car On inspection run the car so it about 10 feet above the center of the hoistway Place an Amprobe on one of the leads to the hoist motor armature While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car down on inspection operation through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary Place the car about 10 feet below the center of the hoistway While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car up through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary Ignoring whether the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running up was greater than the value run
44. 5 70 Poe lt 2 ee ene errr rere eaaa eer et ee 5 71 BM PUEDE oed E E E E E PE E V VR 5 71 Rest Floor Tale ETT 5 72 D e E E EE NE E EEE E A E eee eens 5 72 Dispatcher Sep iuosaest xa d kexbe pd taa S acxered be tax CERES REN MER da 5 73 ien ET EEEE T E E EE E E S TE E di 5 73 Hoor Tale rM 5 81 Dispatcher Input US oe Fe ib brEpRAG P AAdddesstikbPEedkbbbredddg ded 5 82 E ELESETT eta 4 Pee Tee Tee ere eT Tee E VE E ERS TENA TAE 5 83 PMG SD Luxexkrddq seuhdkssrrdiq eddeiqeestbs aa aed da 5 84 Reset Dispatcher Parameters hs dad eS KART A erenn rn RAM Ed AAA 3 85 Reset Dispatcher Floor Tole sss eda dob E ROC ERG EO ICE FR ECCE CC ER 3 85 Reset Dispatcher BMS Parameters 0164400454406 ees WERAEX sad Adr dar ees 3 85 PEDIS Cei da was vue dddddeq capud AM Md RES Sud Rd EI HE Add d EXER EX 5 85 Fireman Operation Setup sssssssssssssssscecsesosososooeoeeo 5 86 OS MD OFT E E TE E E OT EE EEE PETE 5 86 Farom oeeie ddd eka i d ra A 5 86 Wae AB iTia ea EET E E E E E E duri dd dad E 5 88 viii Manual 42 02 2T00 F4 10 6 09 Hi T Quick Topics Tricon Car Controller Cartop Station Car Station Dispatcher Hand Held Unit Operating Modes Ruf ek Tricon General Information 1 Tricon The job prints are the primary document necessary to install the controller The job prints and manual together provide information to install adjust and troubleshoot the controller Study the job prints and read the manual before starting work Call
45. 6 00 0 00 0 00 Bias actual speed command voltage Spd Command Scales analog speed command 0 90 3 00 1 00 1 00 Mult Pre Torque Bias Subtracts an effective voltage to volts 0 6 00 0 00 0 00 actual pre torque command voltage Pre Torque Mult Scales pre torque command 10 00 10 00 1 00 1 0 Zero Speed Level Threshold for zero speed logic output 96 0 99 99 1 00 1 00 Zero Speed Time Time before zero speed logic output is sec 0 9 99 0 10 0 10 declared true Up Dwn Thresh Threshold for detection of up or down 0 9 99 1 00 1 00 old direction Mtr Torque Limit Motoring torque limit 96 0 250 0 250 0 200 0 Regen Torq Limit Regenerating torque limit 96 0 250 0 250 0 200 0 Flux Wkn Factor Defines torque limit at higher speeds 60 0 100 0 75 0 100 Ana 1 Out Offset Subtracts an effective voltage to 96 99 9 99 9 0 00 0 00 actual analog output 1 Ana 2 Out Offset Subtracts an effective voltage to 96 99 9 99 9 0 00 0 00 actual analog output 2 Ana 1 Out Gain Scaling factor for analog output 1 0 10 0 1 0 1 0 Ana 2 Out Gain Scaling factor for analog output 2 0 10 0 1 0 1 0 Flt Reset Delay Time Before a fault is automatically sec 0 120 5 5 reset Flt Reset Hour Number of faults allowed to be auto faults 0 10 3 3 matically reset per hour Up to SPD Level The logic output function is true when 0 110 00 080 00 080 00 motor speed is above user specified speed defined by this parameter M
46. AE Ra Ede 4 13 Inna m EOD eere EORR a OS EORR IPSE Qs APERTE D FERRE 4 14 Normal Leali ee ee ee ee ER PLORA eee RO KE UR eres eee 4 15 Operating Examples fn cake chance ceGeed eu N Fre OGOR COP en ERRE EERE eae wRe 4 16 a ee ee ERE 4 19 l o PP 4 19 Pee o OA ego mv ESORI MORE MER TER CEA quamet das abu asa 4 19 Contract Speed Buffer Test Car uiuoel sakenk berries xA Ade FERRE YR 4 20 Contract Speed Buffer Test Counterweight 0 00 cece ccc e cence eee 4 21 Govomor Sao TES asosa dE ARE CDD ERR eee ere Sree ere 4 22 Be Loon Quo dud ea ird ds Gira d eid d dades aou ora didus iai cule S 4 22 Governor Safety Test Overspeed 1025 Regulator 00 c cece cence ees 4 22 Normal Terminal Stopping NTS Test 46 ik ids p ssquXia FR RERGSAXAA RA 4 erreren 4 23 Top Ploor Test PIDE C oua dAS4X6RTeaYEEETAdA4 A C HOHER EE re ER a 4 23 Bottom Hoo Tet PAWS i eaaas rE RAR EE RERR RE PEERRL ERE PAP rS Sra ca 4 23 Reset Floor o cre ieee een ded 4 23 Iu DEN aceri idat erneten 65000555050 dU dixe addi dee M RV kd 4 24 Magnetek 5 GEG wo 8 RE e hE dS Be is enone ks 4 24 Magnetek HPV 900 Drive onic cio cees ecb wae dee w edi ees dee RE RAR RE I ed Ra ees 4 24 Mitsubishi ASOD DING Lu nde epee needed ease hin AUI cee ee Ren THERE HCR AR RE AR 4 24 Top Floor Test Prt anes ow AUI FRE ER ROGER HE Ed PCR E ER A eda 4 24 Bottom Floor Tet uror lu EMEN 4 25 vi Manual 42 02 2T00 F4 10 6 09 index _MCE Web S
47. BL 2 B1 2 Hall Call 2 HC2 BL 3 B1 3 Hall Call 3 HC3 BL 4 B1 4 Hall Call 4 HC4 BL 5 B1 5 Hall Call 5 HC5 BL 6 B1 6 Hall Call 6 HC6 BL 7 B1 7 Hall Call 7 HC7 BL 8 B1 8 Hall Call 8 HC8 CL 1 C1 1 Hall call 9 HC9 CL 2 C1 2 Hall call 10 HC10 CL 3 C1 3 Hall call 11 HC11 CL 4 C1 4 Hall call 12 HC12 CL 5 C1 5 Hall call 13 HC13 CL 6 C1 6 Hall call 14 HC14 CL 7 C1 7 Hall call 15 HC15 CL 8 C1 8 Hall call 16 HC16 5 32 Manual 42 02 2100 Contents Index _MCE Web Table 5 13 Dispatcher Hall Board DHALL N v6 2 Output Examples DHALL Board Outputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AO 26 A3 1 to A3 2 Fire recall switch ON indicator FONI AO 18 A2 1 to A2 2 Fire OFF switch ON indicator FOFI AO 28 A3 3 to A3 4 AO 20 A2 3 to A2 4 AO 30 A3 5 to A3 6 AO 22 A2 5 to A2 6 AO 32 A3 7 to A3 8 AO 24 A2 7 to A2 8 BL 1 B3 1 to B3 2 Hall call ack light 1 HCA1 BL 2 B2 1 to B2 2 Hall call ack light 2 HCA2 BL 3 B3 3 to B3 4 Hall call ack light 3 HCA3 BL 4 B2 3 to B2 4 Hall call ack light 4 HCA4 BL 5 B3 5 to B3 6 Hall call ack light 5 HCA5 BL 6 B2 5 to B2 6 Hall call ack light 6 HCA6 BL 7 B3 7 to B3 8 Hall call ack light 7 HCA7 BL 8 B2 7 to B2 8 Hall call ack light 8 HCA8 CL 1 C3 1 to C3 2 Hall call ack light 9 HCA9 CL 2 C2 1 to C2 2 Hall call ack light 10 HCA10 CL 3 C3 3 to C3 4 Hall call ack light 11 HCA11 CL 4 C2 3 to C2 4 Hall call ack light 12 HCA12
48. COD iacu gra ee ko CE ER CR ER cR Re et 2 35 Limit and Slowdown Switches 124 bow eb Ru WR C ARA HERR ERR GA RN RO EP Ses 2 36 OEC E a Gareth chor nia aser Ded XOT TER HELD EP dab bU E Rd 2 38 Car to Group Wiring aussev4aevuxuetdutdeerdwkdAuweteeya sau water wes 2 39 Running on Inspection Mode eee nnn 2 41 Controller Power UP ead edpbipe A he EO RR ERE IER CREE ER AGER OCE RE re ER BORN 2 41 Ee in NER 2 42 Iuspocuon LOI uudassad d raARR Rr 4g EARS RR RRRPTACE NAP RRuOafsPeddijq dARd ads 2 42 Hon E Complen CS rastre rrek r IHE 9 6 kh E I cA dd 2 42 ZEND C ME rec iE EE RA A arp REV ERER RA EREEREPqERIQSSQERAAddpES a dw 2 42 BD NES vy eee beer d d EN ARA ENERO o DER EC e e ERR C n 2 43 He Relator hh EE NAE A Wa bd d e REXQEA 4A RP qEPPQ CE dE OE E Pudd 2 43 Rae eg E a TUTO 2 45 __ MCE Web Section 3 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Di this Section s 64 kon ka kn dO OO akt AOT AOR CRGO RODEO RR ER ERE 3 1 Magnetek HPV 600 iiiiusdesk uk kRERRARRSZRRAWEARTRREYATR4RRARREE RARE RS 3 2 HPV 600 AC Drive Start Up Open LOOD 6icassee soi wew ses E PE AAATAReA Eur da 3 2 Suum D VEA cases pides rt idant hada O i eR GAEE M REGARE RA SERA 3 2 Drove Progamm NETT 3 2 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open Loop cee cece eect nnne 3 3 F r dS adi AER EE e 2 4 P IPITES od ee cs AM IIIS 3 4 oia ci amp ARTT 3 6 Drive Parameter Reference Open LOOP 00 cc nunon unnn cece eee eeenes 3 7 HPV 600 Drive Faults O
49. Dio2 ee High Speed P1 17 P1 18 C1 01 Acceleration 48 Hz Medium High Level Zero Speed P1 04 P1 07 Time Table for Selection of S Curves Increasing the value time of an S curve parameter causes a longer smoother transition Range Velocity FPM Start Accel End Accel Start Decel End Decel 1 Less than P1 01 x P1 04 P1 05 x P1 06 P1 07 2 Between P1 01 and P1 02 P1 08 P1 09 P1 10 x P1 11 3 Between P1 02 and P1 03 P1 12 k P1 13 P1 14 x P1 15 4 Greater than P1 03 P1 16 gt P1 17 P1 18 P1 19 These are the only S curve parameters that require field adjustment to smooth the elevator ride All the other parameter values are set to the MCE Drive defaults Set values for 200 volts The value at 400V is twice that of 200V Do not initialize the drive in the field if it is not required Setting A1 03 1110 and pressing enter will initialize the Drive and will set all of the drive parameters to the MCE Drive default values Parameter A1 03 will display 0 after Initialization 3 75 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A eE At the factory MCE sets drive parameters to the values in the MCE Set column and saves those values as defaults by setting parameter O2 03 1 In the field the drive parameters can be reset to MCE Set values by setting parameter A1 03 1110 The Field Adjustable parameters can then be re entered The Yaskawa drive softwar
50. Disabled parameter which reduces speed Disabled when a UV alarm low voltage is declared DB Protection Dynamic braking Protection fault or Fault Fault Fault alarm selection Alarm Encoder Fault Temporarily disables Encoder Fault Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Stopping Mode Determines stopping mode when Immediate Immediate I mmediate Spd Command Src multi step Ramp to stop Motor Ovrld Sel Motor Overload Selection Alarm Alarm FLT Immedi Fit Immediate ate Fault at Stop Auto Stop Auto Stop Function enable Disable Disable Disable Enable Serial Mode Serial Protocol selection None Mode 1 None Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 2 test SER2 FLT Mode Defines reaction to serial communi immediate Immediate immediate cation fault while in Serial Mode 2 Run Only serial mode 2 remove rescue DRV Fast Disable Addresses how fast drive responds Disable Disable Disable to removal of Drive Enable logic Enable input MLT SPD to DLY1 Assigns multi step speed command None None None to recognition delay timer 1 mspd1 mspd15 MLT SPD to DLY2 Assigns multi step speed command None None None to recognition delay timer 2 mspd1 mspd15 3 12 Manual 42 02 2T00 Magnetek HPV 600 Table 3 1 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open Loop MLT SPD to DLY3 Assigns multi step speed command None None None to recognition delay timer 3 mspd1 mspd15 MLT SPD to DLY4 Assigns multi step speed command
51. Disabled 1 General purpose 2 Intelligent L3 02 StallP Accel Lvl Stall Prevention Level During Acceleration 96 0 200 180 180 N A to Flux Vector L3 04 StallP Decel Sel Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration 0 3 0 0 0 Disabled 1 General purpose 2 Intelligent 3 Stall Prevention with Braking Resistor L3 05 StallP Run Sel Stall Prevention Selection During Running 0 2 0 0 N A to Flux Vector 0 Disabled 1 Decel Time 1 2 Decel Time 2 L3 06 StallP Run Level Stall Prevention Level During Running 96 30 200 160 160 N A to Flux Vector Ref Detection Flux Vector only Set to Drive Default for V F L4 01 Spd Agree Level Speed Agreement Detection Level Hz 0 0 400 00 0 60 0 L4 01 E1 04 Flux Vector only L4 02 Spd Agree Width Speed Agreement Detection Width FV only Hz 0 0 20 0 2 0 5 0 8 0 Fault Restart L5 01 Num of Restarts Number of automatic restart attempts 0 10 1 1 L5 02 Restart Sel Automatic restart operation selection 0 1 1 1 0 No Fault Relay 1 Fault Relay Active Torque Detection L6 01 Torg Det 1 Sel Torque Detection Selection 1 0 8 0 0 0 Disabled 1 OL3 at Speed Agree Alarm 2 OL3 at Run Alarm 3 OL3 at Speed Agree Fault 4 OL3 at Run Fault 5 UL3 at Speed Agree Alarm 6 UL3 at Run Alarm 7 UL3 at Speed Agree Fault 8 UI3 at Run Fault L6 02 Torq Det 1 Lvl Torque Detection Level 1 96 0 300 150 150 L6 03 Torq Det 1 Time Torque Detection Time 1 sec 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 1 Torque
52. Display Parameter Description Unit Range Defaults MCE Set Initialization A1 00 Select Language Selects the language for the Digital Operator 0 6 0 0 0 English 3 Francais 6 Portuguese 1 Japanese 4 Italiano 2 Deutsch 5 Espanol A1 01 Access Level Sets parameters accessible by Digital Operator 0 2 2 2 0 Operation Only 1 User Level A2 parameters must be set 2 Advanced Level A1 02 Control Method Selects the drive control method 0 3 0 0 V F without PG 2 Open Loop Vector 1 V F with PG 3 Flux Vector closed loop V F Control open loop 0 Flux Vector closed loop 3 A1 03 Init Parameters Sets parameters to default values see Note 1 0 3330 Q O 0 No Initialize 2220 2 Wire Initial 1110 User Initialize 3330 3 Wire Initial A1 04 Enter Password If A1 04 does not match A1 05 parameters 0 9999 0 A1 01 thru A1 03 and A2 01 thru A2 32 can not be changed A1 05 Select Password 0 9999 0 Sequence B1 01 Reference Source Selects the frequency reference input source l 0 4 0 0 0 Operator 2 Serial Com4 Pulse Input 1 Terminals 3 Option PCB B1 02 Run Source Selects the run command input source 0 3 1 1 0 Operator 2 Serial Com 1 Terminals 3 Option PCB B1 03 Stopping Method Selects the stopping method 0 3 0 0 0 Ramp to Stop 2 DC Injection to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 3 Coast with Timer B1 04 Reverse Oper Prohibition of reverse operation 0 2 0 0 0 Reverse Enabled 1 Reverse Di
53. Down Hall Call Local hall calls per floor simplex independent Yes No riser Front CB Front Code Blue Simplex IR Yes No Rear CC Rear Car Call For local amp group Yes No Rear U Rear Up Hall Call Local hall calls per floor simplex independent riser Yes No Rear D Rear Down Hall Call Local hall calls per floor simplex independent Yes No riser Rear CB Rear Code Blue Simplex IR Yes No To view all the floors use the 20rup arrow key to move backwards one 1 floor 8 or down arrow key to move forward one 1 floor 5 50 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Main Menus To edit a floor Press the key when you are on the desired floor You will see a blinking cursor Keep pressing the key until you reach the desired field Press the right or left arrow keys to move between characters in a multi character field Enter the value using the numbers on the keypad or the Yes No keys Press the key to accept You will move to the next field If you are on the last field you will move back to a view screen Press the key to abort change and move back to a view screen To return to the Floor Table menu must be at a view screen use the key The car will reject up calls at the top floor and down calls at the bottom floor Therefore if you are adding floors add the top and the bottom floor first Then add all the intermediate floors Floor Table Specia
54. ENABLE 8 LOGIN 2 TB1 17 Set to CONTACT CFIRM 9 LOGIN 3 TB1 18 Set to FAULT RESET 10 LOG IN 4 TB1 19 Set to STEP REF BO 11 LOGIN 5 TB1 20 Set to STEP REF BL 12 LOG IN 6 TB1 21 Set to STEP REF B2 13 LOG IN 7 TB1 22 Setto STEP REF B3 14 LOG IN 8 TB1 23 Set to RUN DOWN 15 LOG IN 9 TB1 24 Set to RUN UP 16 Access the Logic Outputs C3 sub menu 17 LOG OUT 1TB1 5 Set to CLOSE CONTACT 18 LOG OUT 2 TB1 7 Set to READY TO RUN 19 LOG OUT 3 TB1 9 Set to SPEED REG RLS 20 LOG OUT 4 TB1 11 Set to SPEED REG RLS 21 RELAY COIT 1 Setto READY TO RUN The HPV600 drive is now configured for open loop operation Running the Car 1 Attempt to run the car up using the inspection up down buttons Hold the up button until the car starts to move If the motor moves in the down direction stop the car Using the programmer access the Configure CO menu Go to User Switches C1and change parameter Motor Rotation from Forward to Reverse 2 Again run the motor Confirm that the motor turns in the correct direction to move the car up or down 3 Usingthe programmer access the Display D1menu Monitor Speed Reference Run the car in the down direction The speed reference displayed on the drive should be neg ative Usingthe inspection up button run the car in the up direction The speed refer ence should be positive 4 While usingthe inspection up down buttons to run the car use a hand tach to check car speed It should be
55. Electric Eye bypass 3 Buzz EE bypass Safe Edge stops door 4 Buzz EE bypass low pressure close 5 Buzz EE bypass low pressure close SE stops Selects nudging mode Off keep closing stop doors but not reopen or reopen buzzer only 2 Door Time after clos O 255 20 sec If the car has a direction and the doors can ing start to begin nudg not close the door will begin nudging after ing this time expires 3 Front Door Minimum 0 25 5 2 sec After reopening door will remain open for at reopen time least this time 4 Front Door Car call 0 25 5 1 sec Time door will remain fully open when minimum time if EE SE opened due to a car call at the floor This or DCB detected time cannot be reduced by the electric eye or door close button 5 Front Door Car call max 0 25 5 5 sec Maximum time doors will remain open due time if no EE SE or DOB to a car call only no Electric Eye Safe Edge or Door Open Button 6 Front Door Hall call 1 25 5 2 sec Minimum time door will remain fully open minimum time when opened due to hall call Time cannot be reduced by electric eye or door close but ton 7 Front Door Hall and car 0 25 5 6 sec Maximum time doors will stay fully open due to a hall or combination hall and car call 5 38 Manual 42 02 2T00 Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen Main Menus 8 Front Door Number 0 255 3 each If the door c
56. Indicator Parameters This screen contains fields to modify indicator behavior To move into the Indicator Parameters screen use 8 or key Toreturn to the previous menu use key To edit a field keep pressing the key until you reach the desired field Enterthe value using the numbers on the keypad or the Yes No keys Usethe key to accept You will move to the next field If you are on the last field you will move back to the Indicator Parameters screen Usethe key to abort change You will move back to the Indicator Parameters screen Table 5 25 Indicator Parameters Edit Screen Editable Field Description Value Blink ON time This sets the time the lights will stay ON when position indicator 1 100 seconds blinks Blink OFF time This sets the time the lights will stay OFF when position indicator 1 100 seconds blinks Sleep time If there is no position and or direction change for longer than the 1 100 seconds time set in this field the position indicator will shut off Setting this time to zero will turn the indicators ON indefinitely Has dir arrows If set to YES two outputs will be allocated for direction arrows Yes No To retum to the PI Board setup menu use the key Lantern Parameters This screen contains several parameters related to the hall lan terns To move into the Lantern Parameters screen use 8 or key To retum to the previous menu use key
57. Jerk out 2 Rate of decrease of acceleration to ftjs3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when approaching contract ele vator speed Decel Jerk in 2 Rate of increase of deceleration up ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 to Decel Rate when decreasing ele vator speed Decel Jerk out 2 Rate of decrease of deceleration to fs3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when slowing the elevator to leveling speed Accel Rate 3 Acceleration rate 3 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Decel Rate 3 Deceleration rate 3 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Accel Jerk in 3 Rate of increase of acceleration up ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 to ACCEL Rate when increasing ele vator speed Accel Jerk out 3 Rate of decrease of acceleration to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 3 9 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 1 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open Loop MeE Decel Jerk in 3 Rate of increase of deceleration up ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 to Decel Rate when decreasing ele vator speed Decel Jerk out 3 Rate of decrease of deceleration to fs3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when slowing the elevator to leveling speed A3 Multistep Ref Speed command 1 Multi Step Speed command 1 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 4 Speed command 2 Multi Step Speed command 2 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 gi 12 Speed Command 3 Multi Step Speed command 3 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 45 Speed command 4 Multi Step Speed command 4 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 i
58. Limits Flux Vector only L7 01 Torque Limits Set to Factory Defaults 96 0 300 200 200 thru Flux Vector only L7 04 Hardware Protection L8 01 DB Resistor Prot Protection Selection for Internal DB Resistor 0 1 0 0 0 Not Provided 1 Provided L8 05 Ph Loss In Sel Input Phase Loss Protection 0 1 1 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled L8 07 Ph Loss Out Sel Output Phase Loss Protection 0 1 1 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 3 73 Startup amp Drive Adjustment MeE Monitor Select O1 01 lUser Monitor Sel Monitor Selection 6 Output voltage 4 45 6 6 O1 02 Power On Moni Monitor Selection upon Power up 1 1 4 1 1 tor 1 Frequency reference 2 Output Frequency 3 Output Current 4 User monitor O1 03 Display Scaling Digital Operator Display Selection 10100 to 11000 Set to Sets the units of Frequency References D1 01 to 19999 contract D1 17 Frequency Reference Monitors U1 01 2100 speed U1 02 U1 05 and Modbus communication fre FPM quency reference Units are fixed at FPM ft Min with a range of 10 0 to 999 9 FPM at max fre quency 10100 to 19999 User units e g 10100 10 0 FPM 19999 999 9 FPM Key Selections O2 01 lLocal Remote Local Remote Key 0 1 0 0 Key 0 Disabled 1 Enabled O2 02 Oper Stop Key Stop key during external terminal operation 0 1 1 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled O2 03 U
59. MFVC mode with encoder 1 vector mode with zero speed 2 vector mode with servo lock 372 Speed Control P gain Used to set the proportional gain of the speed loop A higher set ting will make the speed response faster Suggested setting 150 373 Speed Control gain Used to set the integral gain of the speed loop A lower setting will increase restoration time at the occurrence of a speed variation Suggested setting 5 380 S shaped Accel Only valid when Parameter 29 4 Suggested setting 50 381 S shaped Decel Only valid when Parameter 29 4 Suggested setting 50 Alarms E OC1 Over Current During Acceleration Alarm Drive overheating Check cooling fan Increase Acceleration time Pr 7 Decrease Torque boost Pr OC Output Transistor Module Damaged Disconnect the motor from the M relay and try the drive If the drive trips as soon as it is enabled to run the drive is damaged E OC2 Over Current During Constant Speed Alarm Drive overheating Check cooling fan Consider using Magnetic Flux Vector Control Mode if using V F mode Auto tune motor to the drive E OC3 Over Current During Decel or Stop Alarm A Drive overheating Check cooling fan B Increase Decel time Pr 8 C Check brake unit FR BU H transistor or brake resistor if applicable D Output transistor module damaged Disconnect the motor from the M relay and try the drive If the drive trips as soon as it is enabled to run the d
60. MOTOR MID VOLTS lt RATED MTR VOLTS MOTOR MIN FREQ lt MOTOR MID FREQ lt RATED EXCIT FREQ Confirm settings Stall Test Fault Motor current exceeds value of STALL TEST LVL parameter for more than the time specified by STALL FAULT TIME Confirm correct setting of STALL TEST LVL A1 and STALL FAULT TI ME A1 Check motor machine and brake for pos sible mechanical bind Check correct setting of motor parame ters Check for excessive motor current Undervolt Fault DC Bus voltage low Voltage on the DC Bus has dropped below user entered values for INPUT L L Volts A4 and UV FAULT LEVEL A4 Check braking resistance and connections Verify proper AC input voltage to drive Possible disturbances on the AC line Undervolt Alarm DC Bus voltage low dur ing run DC bus voltage has dropped below user entered values for INPUT L L Volts A4 and UV ALARM LEVEL A4 Check braking resistance and connections Verify proper AC input voltage to drive Possible disturbances on the AC line 3 36 Manual 42 02 2T00 Magnetek HPV 600 HPV 600 High Speed Adjustment Closed Loop The drive should be running on inspection speed at this point When commanded to run in the up direction the car should run up when commanded to run down the car should run down Use a hand tach to confirm that the speed displayed on the drive programmer at DISPLAY DO ELEVATOR DATA D1 SPEED REFERENCE exactly matches the
61. Manual phase 2 Manual override Parameter 21 set to Yes will allow you to recall all cars starting with cars that have their manual select switch on and then all remaining cars afterwards The manually selected car will then be returned to service for phase 2 operation Operation Mode 3 Manual recall Manual override Parameters 22 set to No will allow only cars with their manual select switch on to be selected With the select switch on the car will be selected to recall When finished with the recall operation the car will be immediately selected for phase 2 operation If the first car is deselected and a different car selected the first will be recalled When the first car finishes the second will recall and go back into service This process must be repeated for every car if all cars are to be recalled In this mode of operation a car that has its selection switch OFF will never be selected for either recall and or normal operation 1 18 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Operating Modes Code Blue Operation The Code Blue feature provides a method of entering a high priority call at a floor This feature allows one of a specified group of cars to be called to a floor for priority service Determining which cars are eligible to respond is programmed at the job site using a hand held unit and may range from one car to all cars This operation is also known as Hospital Emergency Phase I and or Cardiac Arr
62. Paramete qar V dX eed DER rd PX Y RACE EEE E OEC REA 2 16 DS Puma oaksas qaad RE RRAAS RR EE A Cheeks sud dks E RERS Ras 2 16 Using Inspection augus TO BUE aaa 6h itid dd EE FR PYAA bxc CER ERR TS PS 2 16 CODEC uuo 266i PREDA SEIR d sade iiss Makau edo S edel E ipi dad und 2 16 Car Top ac decd irpo Ghee dri eoe a oud id acr RR Ie RE d 2 16 Temporary Run Box Hookup aus zbaakq t eased x PR ERR E T EA Rd ESI RE Y x 2 17 PUDE TURTLE a y ce FER REFER RETE ERRARE AREE RCERPRMCDHEFI T AERE A4 2 18 ol duco ee ee ee ee ee er eee ee ee ee re re 2 18 ii Manual 42 02 2T00 F4 10 6 09 dde Completing Installation ceca nn nnn 2 19 Low voltage Sigal DO udeexd 14er I EDTILY QUII HERO P He 2 20 F Type Terminal Board 6 os onc bev eR ds GABA ACE ELEC ERGO ERR ERROR KC FERA EG SA 2 21 G Type Terminal Boa epa Vi arr R AR n e RAE IRR EERIE ENRE MAC OE RE RRR 2 22 Ee Te BOE resa eae ees ah actore oe pl dd t E a E EAR ERR 2 23 SET SUUU LOBORMO VOU 12a ar dat dut eO REERRRRARPPPERERFePEX esse deen 2 24 xiv cec dito Minor PRETTCTTTMMTCTP 2 25 Interconnect Box Installati n i ie sorsisicrsrs scorri trenei i AERA binithi ad 2 27 Sensor Head PO aa idqae edu kitit rE dd ute d abe exe ERO FRE S 2 27 Mome ISDN 23424 d ELE CE ER EE OE VERRE RE d dA eee 2 29 Leveling Magnet Instalbablolh oe epe ex Qu eC PUE REROEIE EACH a RC d 2 30 Slowdown Magnets uiia y Ree RERO CORO eR eR OEC EGRE RR Ra 2 32 Landing System
63. PeelleX11 Firel FPI BF 29 BF 30 B3 5 to B3 6 Peelle X12 Designated landing FDL BF 21 BF 22 B2 5 to B2 6 Peelle X13 Fire 2 FP2 BF 31 BF 32 B3 7 to B3 8 Peelle X14 Fire hold FHD BF 23 BF 24 B2 7 to B2 8 Peelle X18 Fire car OFF OFF CO 26 C3 1 to C3 2 Peelle D03 D05 inspection INS CO 18 C2 1 to C2 2 Peelle D06 D08 auto close disable ACH CO 28 C3 3 to C3 4 Peelle D06 D07 auto close ACO CO 20 C2 3 to C2 4 Peelle D01 D012 hall PB cutout FHB CO 30 C3 5toC3 6 Peelle D060 D070 inspection rear Cline RINS CO 22 C2 5 to C2 6 Peelle D060 D050 Auto close Disable rear C line RACH CO 32 C3 7 to C3 8 Peelle D060 D080 Auto close rear C line RACO CO 24 C2 7 to C2 8 Peelle D010 D022 hall PB cutout rear C line RFHB 5 37 Tricon Configuration Car Setup Menu The Car Setup menu includes Parameters Floor Table Group Assignments Car Soft Lockouts Position Indicator PI Board Setup CE Indicator Setup BMS Setup Car Lockouts Setup Clock Reset Errors Parameters The following table provides a list of editable parameters the value range across which they may be set the factory default value and a supporting description Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen MeE call door maximum time EUR Hand Held Display Mine RIDE Units Help 1 Door Nudging mode 0 5 0 enum OzNo nudging 0 disabled 1 Buzzer only 1 5 see manual 2 Buzz
64. Remaining Motor A5 sub menu parameters remain at their default values Configure CO Menu 1 Access the User Switches C1 sub menu 2 SPEED COMMAND SRC Set to MULTISTEP 3 RUN COMMAND SRC Set to EXTERNAL TBL 4 Skip down to SPD REF RELEASE Set to REG RELEASE 5 CONT CONFIRM SRC Set to EXTERNAL TBL Remaining User Switches C1 sub menu parameters remain at their default values Access the Logic Inputs C2 sub menu LOG IN 1TB1 16 Set to DRIVE ENABLE LOG IN 2 TB1 17 Set to CONTACT CFIRM LOGIN 3 TB1 18 Set to FAULT RESET LOG IN 5 TB1 20 Set to STEP REF B1 LOG IN 6 TB1 21 Set to STEP REF B2 LOG IN 7 TB1 22 Setto STEP REF B3 LOG IN 8 TB1 23 Set to RUN DOWN LOG IN 9 TB1 24 Set to RUN UP o ououmuNne Contents Index _MCE Web 3 25 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Nes 10 Access the Logic Outputs C3 sub menu 11 LOG OUT 1TB1 5 Set to CLOSE CONTACT 12 LOG OUT 2 TB1 7 Set to READY TO RUN 13 LOG OUT 3 TB1 9 Set to SPEED REG RLS 14 LOG OUT 4 TB1 11 Set to SPEED REG RLS 15 RELAY COIL 1 Set to READY TO RUN The HPV600 drive is now correctly configured for closed loop operation Running the Car 1 Attempt to run the car up usingthe inspection up down buttons Hold the up button until the car starts to move If the motor moves in the down direction stop the car Using the programmer access the Configure CO menu Go to User Switches C1and change parameter Motor Rotation from Forward to Reverse 2 Agai
65. Speed Command 5 Multi Step Speed command 5 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed command 6 Multi Step Speed command 6 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed Command 7 Multi Step Speed command 7 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed command 8 Multi Step Speed command 8 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 Speed Command 9 Multi Step Speed command 9 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed Command 10 Multi Step Speed command 10 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed Command 11 Multi Step Speed command 11 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed Command 12 Multi Step Speed command 12 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed Command 13 Multi Step Speed command 13 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed Command 14 Multi Step Speed command 14 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed Command 15 Multi Step Speed command 15 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 A4 Power Convert Id Reg Diff gain Flux Current regulator differential 0 80 1 20 1 00 1 00 gain Id Reg Prop Gain Flux current regulator proportional 0 20 0 40 0 30 0 30 gain Iq Reg Diff Gain Torque current regulator differential 0 80 1 20 1 00 1 00 gain Iq Reg Prop Gain Torque current regulator propor 0 20 0 40 0 30 0 30 tional gain PWM Frequency Carrier frequency kHz 2 5 16 0 10 0 10 0 UV Alarm Level Voltage level for undervoltage alarm 96 80 99 90 90 UV Fault Level Voltage level for undervoltage fault 50 88 80 80 Extern Reactance External choke reactance 96 0 10 0 0 Input L L Volts Nominal line line AC input Voltage volts 110 480 Drive de
66. and OVERSPEED TI ME A1 If OK check tracking of motor to desired speed and tune regulator for better performance Overtemp Fault Heatsink temperature is too high Drive heatsink temperature exceeded 1059C 2219F Check fans on drive make sure airflow is adequate 3 16 Manual 42 02 2T00 Magnetek HPV 600 Table 3 2 HPV 600 Drive Faults Open Loop Overvolt Fault DC Bus voltage is too high DC bus voltage exceeded 850 volts on a 460 volt drive or 425 volts on a 230 volt drive Check braking resistance connected and sized properly Check for high AC line Confirm input volt age to drive If these check OK possible bad braking I GBT Drive unit needs to be replaced PCU Data Fault PCU parameters not cor rect Check all drive parameters Cycle power to drive If fault recurs go to the Utility menu and select Restore Defaults f fault persists replace Control board Note The Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameter to be set to their correct values Phase Fault Open motor phase Check motor motor connections motor windings and main contactor contacts Setup Fault 1 Rated motor speed poles and frequency not set correctly RATED EXCI T FREQ A5 RATED MTR SPEED A5 and MOTOR POLES A4 do not satisfy the formula 9 6 120 Excit Freq Motor Poles Motor Speed lt 1222 3 Setup Fault 3 Motor Poles parameter not set corre
67. cabinet Table 5 6 Cartop Board CTOP N v6 2 Input Examples A17 1 2000 CarTop Board I nputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AF 1 Al 1 Top of car inspection switch TINS AF 2 A1 2 Top of car up inspection button TIUB AF 3 A1 3 Top of car down inspection button TI DB AF 4 A1 4 Access and in car inspection 2 CIN2 AF 5 A1 5 Attendant ATT AF 6 A1 6 Cam dropped contact CDC AF 7 A1 7 Half load switch HLSW AF 8 A1 8 Access Gate Monitor AGM BF 1 B1 1 Open limit DOL BF 2 B1 2 Close limit DCL BF 3 B1 3 Safety edge SE BF 4 B1 4 Electric eye EE BF 5 B1 5 Simplex switch SPLX BF 6 B1 6 Hospital emergency switch HEM BF 7 B1 7 Rear open limit RDOL BF 8 B1 8 Rear close limit RDCL CO 1 C1 1 Leveling up LU CO 2 C1 2 Leveling down LD CO 3 C1 3 Rear inner door zone RIDZ CO 4 C1 4 Inner door zone IDZ CO 5 C1 5 Up step US CO 6 C1 6 Down step DS CO 7 C1 7 Rear safety edge RSE CO 8 C1 8 Rear electric eye REE 5 26 Manual 42 02 2100 Contents Index _MCE Web Main Menus Table 5 7 Cartop Board CTOP N v6 2 Output Examples A17 1 2000 CarTop Board Outputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AF 25 AF26 A3 1 to A3 2 Car lantern up CLU AF 17 AF 18 A2 1 to A2 2 Car lantern down CLD AF 27 AF 28 A3 3to A34 JUpdirecionarrov UDA AF 19 AF20 A2 3 to A2 4 Down dir
68. call wires will have to be shifted to the right by 8 locations The bottom floor up call will not start on the DHALL CL1 location This will continue on to the DHALL 2 board You may need an additional I O board or I O board field terminal board to relocate all of the hall calls Followingis a list of new inputs that will be created when the emer gency power option is provided All inputs will select the function when turned on Table 1 1 Emergency Power Option Inputs Input Function B1 1 Car 1 selected B1 2 Car 2 selected B1 3 Car 3 selected B1 4 Car 4 selected B1 5 Car 5 selected B1 6 Car 6 selected B1 7 Pre transfer This will stop all running cars at the next floor and wait for the removal of this input B1 8 Emergency power operation Contents Index _MCE Web 1 17 Tricon General I nformation A eE Car Parameters Description and Operation The car uses two parameters for emergency power parameters 108 and 155 Parameter 108 the fire recall floor is used as the recall floor for fire service and emergency power Parameter 155 emergency power enabled must be set to yes when dispatcher parameter 20 emergency power recall time is not set to 0 This will enable emergency power operation on the car and the dispatcher Once parameter 155 is set to yes the car will not operate if it cannot communicate with the dispatcher Dispatcher Parameters Description and Operati
69. car station converts the discrete inputs of the car operating panel into a high speed serial stream communicating with the car controller through a simple twisted strand cable The car station allows the bulk of the traveler cable to be reduced since it is no longer necessary to use individual wires between the car and the controller for each car operating panel button or lamp Please contact MCE Sales support if you are interested in a car station for your Tricon installa tion 1 10 Manual 42 02 2T00 _Contents Index _MCE Web Dispatcher Dispatcher The Tricon dispatcher pro vides centralized control of up to six cars to efficiently handle building traffic The dispatcher also controls car parking assignment spe cial operating modes i e lobby peak and group response during atypical operation i e operation during fire conditions emergency power condi tions etc Dispatcher Circuit Boards The circuit board complement of the dispatcher varies according to customer requirements The illustration below shows a typical dispatcher layout Figure 1 5 Typical Dispatcher Layout CPU board DHALL 1 O 24 boards Contents Index MCEWeb Ln Tricon General I nformation Ae Hand Held Unit HHU The Hand Held Unit is used to set up and troubleshoot the Tri con controller cartop car station and dispatcher components The Hand Held Unit allows you to set system parameters and view stat
70. chosen for ground and a true electrical ground is later introduced to the system a difference in potential can occur between the assumed ground and the actual earth ground This may lead to unsafe operating conditions and the possibility of electrical shock to passengers or personnel 3 A water pipe is an adequate ground only if the water in the pipe is connected to a contin uous city water source Wiring Connections for Properly Grounded Systems 1 Anuninterrupted ground wire of at least 48 AWG should be run from each car control ler cabinet chassis or backplate to earth ground The connection at the car controller must be free of paint so the ground connection is made to the bare metal of the enclo sure The car controller should read less than 1 ohm to ground with the power off 2 Groundstraps or short loops of ground wire should be run from the controller ground connection to the primary duct connections 3 An uninterrupted 8 AWG ground wire should be run from the hoist motor frame to the controller ground The ground connection to the hoist motor must be free of paint 4 Acontinuous looped ground wire should be run from each hall lantern and position fix ture box to controller ground The ground connection at each fixture should make an electrical connection to the bare metal of the fixture box and its cover This connection should be free of paint 5 An uninterrupted ground wire of minimum 14 AWG should be run from a terminatio
71. command is None None None used and if used determines the source of Analog input the pre torque command Serial Pre Torque Latch Chooses if analog pre torque command is Not latched Not Not latched latched Latched latched Ptorq Latch Clck Determines source of pre torque latch External TB 1 External External TB control if used Serial TB1 Fault Reset Src Fault reset source External TB 1 External External TB Serial TB1 Automatic Overspd Test Src Determines external logic source to trigger External TB 1 External External TB overspeed test Serial TB1 Brake Pick Src If drive controls mechanical brake deter Internal Internal Internal mines source of brake pick command Serial Brake Pick CNFM Determines if a logic input is used for None None None brake pick confirm External TB 1 Brake Hold Src If drive controls mechanical brake deter Internal Internal Internal mines source of brake hold command Serial Ramped Stop Sel Chooses between normal stop and torque None None None ramp down stop Ramp on stop Ramp Down En Src Determines source that signals torque External TB 1 External External TB ramp down stop if used Run logic tb1 Serial Brk Pick Flt Brake pick fault enable Enable Disable Disable Disable Brk Hold Flt Ena Brake hold fault enable Enable Disable Disable Disable Ext Torq Cmd Src When Speed Reg Type External Reg None None None sets source of torque command Serial Dir Confirm Confirms proper analog signal
72. correctly Contents Index _MCE Web 3 39 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A eE If the car does not have compensation motor torque will vary depending on car position in the hoistway Verify that the motor torque is between 15 as the car passes through the center of the hoistway 4 10 11 Observe EST RATED RPM found under Display Power Data D2 Enter this value into RATED MTR SPEED found under Adjust Motor A5 Removethe full load from the car and place balanced load in it Run the car from bottom tB 16 17 With the car running from top to bottom and back observe EST NO LOAD CURR found under Display Power Data D2 Enter this estimated value into the parame ter NO LOAD CURR A5 Repeat until the value of the EST NO LOAD CURR and the NO LOAD CURR A5 are equal Verify that motor torque is still 15 and flux reference is still 100 If not adjust the NO LOAD CURR A95 as needed Increase car speed to 100 of contract speed With a balanced load in the car run from top to bottom and back Whilethe caris running observe EST NO LOAD CURR found under Display Power Data D2 Compare this value to the value found under NO LOAD CURR found under Adjust Motor A5 If the EST NO LOAD CURR value is 2 larger than the NO LOAD CURR then increase FLUX SAT SLOPE 2 by 1096 If the EST NO LOAD CURR and 6 NO LOAD CURR values are within 296 continue Repeat until EST NO LOAD CURR and NO LO
73. decrease of acceleration to zero f s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 when approaching contract elevator speed Decel Jerk in 1 Rate of increase of deceleration up to ft s3 0 80 8 0 0 0 Decel Rate when decreasing elevator speed Decel Jerk out 1 Rate of decrease of deceleration to zero ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 when slowing the elevator to leveling speed Accel Rate 2 Acceleration rate 2 ftis 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Decel Rate 2 Deceleration rate 2 ftus 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Accel Jerk in 2 Rate of increase of acceleration up to ft s3 0 80 8 0 0 0 ACCEL Rate when increasing elevator speed Accel Jerk out 2 Rate of decrease of acceleration to zero ft s3_ 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 when approaching contract elevator speed Decel Jerk in 2 Rate of increase of deceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 Decel Rate when decreasing elevator speed Decel Jerk out 2 Rate of decrease of deceleration to zero ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 when slowing the elevator to leveling speed Accel Rate 3 Acceleration rate 3 fus 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Decel Rate 3 Deceleration rate 3 fus 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Accel Jerk in 3 Rate of increase of acceleration up to ft s3 0 80 8 0 0 0 ACCEL Rate when increasing elevator speed Accel Jerk out 3 Rate of decrease of acceleration to zero fs3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 when approaching contract elevator speed Decel Jerk in 3 Rate of increase of deceleration up to ft s3 0 80 8 0 0 0 Decel Rate when decreasing elevator speed Decel Jerk out 3 Rate of decrea
74. door operator circuitry f seen when a relay is picking or dropping add arc suppression around the coil ge WN Standard arc suppressors resistor capacitor networks are used on AC relays Diode resistor combinations work well for DC relays Consult MCE for proper component sizing Machine Room Preparation When preparing the machine room for controller installation consider Equipment location Machine room environment When choosing equipment location consider Adequate working space and a workbench or table Logical arrangement considering other equipment in the machine room and electrical power Do not install equipment in a hazardous location Atelephone in the machine room facilitates remote diagnostic and adjustment assistance f any areas in the machine room are subject to vibration they should be avoided or rein forced to prevent equipment damage Provide adequate lighting Reduce wiring by locating the isolation transformer near the controller 2 4 Manual 42 02 2100 Contents Index _MCE Web Installation Considerations Environmental conditions are important Ambient temperature should remain within 32 to 104 Fahrenheit 0 to 40 Celsius Temperatures outside these guidelines may be tolerated but will shorten equipment life Adequate ventilation is required Air conditioning may be necessary Theair in the machine room should be free of excessive dust corrosive elements a
75. doors open due to a hall call registered but no pas senger waiting This parameter only applies to the manual door CPU chip version CARM and is intended to be used with freight doors Applies to both front and rear doors Y freight doors open automatically N door open button must be pressed 15 reserved 0 255 0 each 16 reserved 0 255 JO each 17 Front Door op Door 0 25 5 14 sec If the door cannot open in this time it will open failure timeout reclose and try again until the retry count is reached 18 Front Door op Door 0 25 5 14 sec If the doors do not fully close within this close failure timeout time they will reopen and try again 19 Front Door op Door lock 0 25 5 3 Sec If the doors close but cannot lock within this failure timeout time they will reopen 20 Front Door op Flag 1 yes no no yes no 21 Front Door op Open yes no no yes no Door open output will be kept always ON output stays On when while door is opening or opened WARNI NG door opened Some door operators could be damaged if this flag is set 22 Front Door op Door yes no no yes no Set this flag for door operators that do not close output turns OFF run with power Example Moline when door closed Contents dex _MCE Web 5 39 Tricon Configuration Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen MeE 23 Front Door op Door has yes no no yes no Set this flag if th
76. floor Group Considerations All cars in a group should know a particular floor by its floor name 1to 8 Some cars in a group may not serve all floors in this case floors not served by those cars should be designated as empty floors for them Contents Index _MCE Web 5 51 Tricon Configuration Nem Group Assignments View amp Edit Screen Figure 5 5 Car Group Assignments Screen When the screen is selected from the menu the first floor is displayed However the first car floor may not be the cars bottom floor since in a group not all cars may go to the bottom floor Table 5 20 Group Dispatcher Parameters Only Editable Fields Explanation Value Floor Number Floor Number See note above 1 32 Floor Designation Use keypad to enter a name up to five characters The characters can be letters digits or punctuation marks Front HU Car has front door up hall call at this floor Yes No Front HD Car has front door down hall call at this floor Yes No Front CB Car has front door Code Blue at this floor from dispatcher Yes No Rear HU Car has rear door up hall call at this floor Yes No Rear HD Car has rear door down hall call at this floor Yes No Rear CB Car has rear door Code Blue at this floor from dispatcher Yes No To view all the floors use the 20rup arrow key to move backwards one 1 floor 8 or down arrow key to move forward one 1 floor To edit a floor Pre
77. has been adjusted you can adjust one floor runs Raise or lower one floor run speed to achieve the same finial leveling distance as multi floor runs A dual trace storage oscilloscope should be used to shape the S Curve output Insure the scope has a floating ground ground pin on the scope power cord must not be connected to earth ground The output common TB1 3 is not connected to ground You can monitor the speed reference and car speed at the drive analog outputs 3 94 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _ MCE Web Table 3 18 DSD 412 Drive Parameters Magnetek DSD 412 DC Drive Contents inde _MCE Web P Parameter Description Unit Range Default po 1 Current Limit Sets drive current limit as a percentage of 96 0 300 250 275 rated armature amps parameter 3 2 User Self Tune Selects self tune variables measured values ON OFF OFF OFF 3 Rated Arm Amp Motor rated current Amp 10 1250 50 4 Armature Ohms Total armature circuit resistance not includ Ohm 0 001 0 1 0 450 ing brush drop 5 0 6 Armature Induc Value of motor armature circuit inductance MHNY 0 001 1 0 0 01 0043 tance 7 Rated Arm V Rated motor name plate armature voltage Volts 150 550 240 Note LT 8 Reg Crossover Current regulator bandwidth Response will RAD 100 500 500 increase as this number increases At higher 1000 values motor current will fluctua
78. head mounting subassembly onto the adaptor bracket 4 Remove the screws that hold the tape guide outer end caps in place and remove the caps Figure 2 14 Tape Guides b Tape Guide closed Tape Guide open 5 Position the sensor head assembly on the steel tape 6 Replace the tape guide caps Reinsert the Screws P Guide rail 7 Bolt the sensor head assembly to the subas sembly Adjust the mounting bracket and secure 8 Connectthe sensor head assembly to the interconnect box using the supplied cable 9 If needed adjust the sensor assembly so it does not ride hard on one side of the uni strut bracket during any part of the travel through the hoistway Interconnect box E Tape guide uif Sensor assembly Adaptor bracket m Steel tape 2 28 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Completing I nstallation Magnet I nstallation The floor leveling and slowdown magnetic strips are 6 inches long nstall all floor leveling magnets before installing one floor run up high speed up one floor run down and high speed down magnets Two speed operation requires leveling one floor run up and one floor run down magnets only Three speed operation requires leveling one floor run up one floor run down high speed up and high speed down magnets Selective installations front and rear car doors require in addition to the appropriate two speed or three speed operation magn
79. in a slower leveling speed and cause the car to travel a shorter distance before stopping If you are unable to achieve consistent floor stops by modifying leveling speed the brake may not be adjusted properly Confirm that all brake voltages are set correctly and that the resis tance around the brake coil is connected properly The resistance can be changed to control brake set Less resistance causes a slower drop More resistance causes a quicker drop The car should now be running at contract speed with accurate floor stops and a smooth ride Remove all weights from the car and staying away from the terminal floors make one floor runs and multi floor runs up and down Add weight to the car approximately 100 pounds at a time Staying away from the terminal floors observe the one floor and multi floor runs to be sure that the car rides well under all load conditions Keep adding weight until the car has full load less the weight of anyone riding the car Contents Index _MCE Web 3 59 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Nes HPV 900 Adaptive Tuning Ifthe motor is an old motor and no data is available for it an adaptive tune must be performed The adaptive tune requires that the car is run at contract speed and is capable of lifting full load 1 Select the Default Motor option for the Motor ID parameter This will load default val ues into the motor data parameters to prepare the drive for the adaptive tune 2 Enterthe followin
80. in the deceleration profile will result in a different approach into the floor You may need to modify other deceleration parameters to get the desired ride 3 20 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 12 Observe floor stops Make multi floor runs and one floor runs into a floor at the center of the hoistway If the car is stopping short of the floor too high in the down and too low in the up increase the SPEED COMMAND 14A3 parameter This will result in faster leveling speed and cause the car to travel farther before stopping 13 If the caris stopping past the floor too high in the up and too lowin the down decrease the SPEED COMMAND 143 parameter This will result in slower leveling speed and cause the car to travel a shorter distance before stopping If you are unable to achieve consistent floor stops by modifying leveling speed the brake may not be adjusted properly Confirm that all brake voltages are set correctly and that the resis tance around the brake coil is connected properly The resistance can be changed to control brake set rate Less resistance causes a slower drop and more resistance causes a quicker drop The car should now be running at contract speed with accurate floor stops and a smooth ride Remove all weights from the car and staying away from the terminal floors make one floor runs and multi floor runs up and down Add weight to the car approximately 100 pounds at a time S
81. is greater than 200 feet per minute make a one floor run Observe the approach into the floor If the approach is longer than the multi floor runs increase the SPEED COMMAND 4 A3 parameter until the approach on a one floor run is the same as the multi floor run If the approach is quicker decrease the SPEED COMMAND 4 A3 parameter until the approach on a one floor run is the same as the multi floor run 11 The speed curve parameters have been set up Ride the car and observe acceleration deceleration and jerk rates If any rate seems too sharp make that value smaller Note that changing values in the deceleration profile will result in a different approach into the floor You may need to modify other deceleration parameters to get the desired ride 12 Observe floor stops Make multi floor runs and one floor runs into a floor at the center of the hoistway If the car is stopping short of the floor too high in the down and too low in the up increase the SPEED COMMAND 1 A3 parameter This will result in faster leveling speed and cause the car to travel farther on before stopping 13 Ifthe caris stopping past the floor too high in the up and too lowin the down decrease the SPEED COMMAND 1 A3 parameter This will result in slower leveling speed and cause the car to travel a shorter distance before stopping 3 If you are unable to achieve consistent floor stops by modifying leveling speed the brake may not be adjusted properly Confirm
82. is running While observing the hand tach run the car up and down in the middle section of the hoistway Modify the CONTRACT MTR SPEED parameter under the ADJ UST AO MOTOR A5 menu to exactly achieve the speed displayed at SPEED REFERENCE Car Balancing In order for the drive to perform properly the car must be properly balanced Geared cars are typically balanced with 40 50 of the cars rated capacity To confirm this 1 Access the car top Run the car on inspection to the center of the hoistway Stop the car so the crosshead on the counterweight is exactly adjacent to the crosshead on the car 2 Placea chalk mark on the cables in the machine room and mark the hoist motor so that while the car is run from the machine room you will be able to tell when the car passes through the center of the hoistway Move the car to a convenient floor Place 4096 of the cars rated capacity in the car On inspection run the car so it about 10 feet above the center of the hoistway Place an Amprobe on one of the leads to the hoist motor While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car down on inspection operation through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary 7 Placethe car about 10 feet belowthe center of the hoistway 8 While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car up through the center of
83. is the gearless ratio of the encoder If the encoder is mounted to the motor shaft set this value to 1 000 Magnetek DSD 412 DC Drive 9 Access parameter 17 Enter the contract speed of the car in feet per minute FPM Press enter to save 10 Access parameter 49 Enter the running field current in amps If field weakening is not used enter the full field current in amps Press enter to save 11 Access parameter 50 Enter the full field current in amps This may or may not be the value on the motor nameplate the fields may have been re wired If you are unsure check the survey data to see what the field current was with the old controller Press enter to save Access parameter 52 Enter the full field voltage in volts Press enter to save Access parameter 53 Enter the standing field current in amps This value is typically half of the full field value from parameter 50 Press enter to save 14 Access parameter 56 If the motor uses field weakening enter a value of 90 If field weakening is not used enter a value of 130 Press enter to save 15 Access parameter 57 If the motor uses field weakening enter a value of 70 If field weakening is not used enter a value of 130 Press enter to save 16 Access parameter 82 Enter a value of 1 0 Press enter to save 17 Access parameter 87 Enter a value of 1 0 Press enter to save 18 Access parameter 97 Enter a value of 1 0 Press enter to save 19 Access par
84. lift brake lift auto 82 Brake How long brake 0 25 5 3 5 sec Determines how long brake lift voltage will lift voltage is applied be applied It must be long enough to allow the brake to lift fully 83 Brake Time Brake 0 25 5 0 sec Determines how long brake will hold after remains ON after car car reaches full leveled position Allows car becomes level auto to fully stop motion before setting brake 84 Brake Time to delay the 0 25 5 O sec Brake lift delay in Inspection mode brake lift insp 85 Brake Time brake 0 25 5 0 sec Brake drop delay in Inspection mode remains ON after car stops insp 86 Brake Time to delay the 0 25 5 O sec Brake lift delay when releveling Allows drive brake lift relevel to pre torque before starting preventing rollback 87 Brake Time Brake 0 25 5 O sec Determines how long brake will hold after remains ON after car car reaches full leveled position Allows car becomes level relevel to fully stop motion before setting brake 88 Brake Brake has con yes no no yes no Set to Yes if brake has a contact that opens tact which opens when when brake is lifted If brake does not have brake lifts this contact set to NO 89 Brake Brake uses BRL yes no no yes no Set to Yes if a separate relevel setting is output when releveling desired WARNING If the controller does not have hardware for brake relevel BRLR relay or electronic brake control DO NOT set this parameter to Yes
85. motor name plate or the manufacturer data sheet 3 24 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _ MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 8 MOTOR POLES parameter Tells the drive how many poles the motor has If the syn chronous speed of the motor is 900 RPM set to 8 poles If the synchronous speed of the motor is 1200 RPM set to 6 poles If the synchronous speed of the motor is 1800 RPM set to 4 poles This value must be an even number or a Setup Fault will occur 9 RATED MTR SPEED Speed the motor should be turning when it is excited at its rated frequency and producing rated power Set to the value from the motor nameplate orthe manufacturers data If this value is not available temporarily set it for the value calculated by No Slip Motor RPM 0 98 The final setting can be calculated by the drive during adaptive tuning This value must be less than 900 RPM on 8 pole motors 1200 RPM on 6 pole motors and 1800 RPM on 4 pole motors or a drive set up fault will occur Reuland motors have the synchronous speed on the motor nameplate Setting this parameter to synchronous speed will result in a set up fault The correct value is approximately synchronous speed times 0 9833 10 NO LOAD CURR Current required to turn the motor at rated speed with no load This can be determined from the motor manufacturer data sheet If it is not available temporarily set it to 50 The final setting can be calculated by the drive during adap tive tuning
86. n ces ee eee eee Rede Reed eR SRE RETO ES 2 7 Wiring Connections for Properly Grounded Systems 0 0 cece eee ee eee 2 7 AC Power Connections iiia Ek EASERTERVEA VAY i kk kier eee HET ERD EOS 2 8 Inipal PO UP Laud iqasd Ax vnk irane baa ads REESE GU a d ed d dad CRE kp 2 9 Motor Brake and Encoder Connection eee nn 2 10 is kh ee Hb kW d EE XGER ER Lenehan weeds 2 10 Insulation Breakdown Test i eek tobe eRe EA 3X RAE WAYS vXxXAd ded R TREE 2 10 BRNO TUERI ou cers ema ec etd IEEFEE ET E E Vedi eps EROS PS 2 10 Brake Connoc OB ee a Se ee Vd AR GERE abc E CR WERE ERE RAN RR Rd 2 10 Brake BERNER oa dora acie qoe ERE abe Re acad arr dei ta o i o ERR en 2 10 Velocity Encoder Installation and Wiring 0 ccc ccc ec cee cee ene eee eens 2 11 Encoder OUMU osos mene ne Ree a E EET TOL ICH ere anne er eer ne Eat 2 11 EXORDIO C401 ho eh ee EN E EE RERO Cw a we a ee REFER NS 2 12 Pug Pt sp evckbiscsankeaseckisxssedbetedeuaere E E 2 12 T Limit 2K Motor Speed Position Sensor 0 0 c cee cece cece een e ernn 2 13 Mounting the Magnet Assembly 5 6 scdccaseetdasieseeda ses dancsuedeae aan 2 13 Mounting the Speed Sensor yo de CE REOR OR OSS oer RE os 2 14 Construction Operation cc cece cece cece eee n hn n nnn 2 5 Mund BS 4 5 w ne oS 4 kA RG oleh ae EGR eh a ET pP 2 15 Jamper iiis or UMP A s rE RT 2 15 Required Controller and Drive Parameter Settings lleeueeuues 2 15 CoD
87. not match commanded cur rent Check for proper incoming power Check motor parameters and verify proper settings Check motor connections and motor windings for open circuit Check main contactor for bad contact If OK bad current sensor or bad drive DCU Data Fault The DCU parameters are not set correctly Check all drive parameters Cycle power to drive If fault recurs go to Utility menu and select Restore Defaults If fault persists replace Control board Note The Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameter to be set to their correct values Dir Conflict Commanded direction from analog input does not match polarity of Up Dwn input Not used Drv Overload Drive exceeded over load curve Check motor connections main contactor contacts and motor windings Make sure brake is lifting Verify encoder is properly connected and that feedback matches motor speed Extrn Fault 1 External Fault 1 input is activated Not used activated Extrn Fault 2 External Fault 2 input is Not used activated Extrn Fault 3 External Fault 3 input is Not used activated Extrn Fault 4 External Fault 4 input is Not used drive is open Fan Alarm Heatsink cooling fan not Check fan and connections Clean heatsink operating Fuse Fault The DC Bus fuse on the Check fuse If OK check motor connections Check motor for continuity from windings to ground If OK repla
88. opera tion Set to 0 0 seconds Parameter 106 Pattern start delay during Inspection operation Set to 0 0 seconds Parameter 125 Enable gate and lock bypass switches on RB board Set to Yes Parameter 128 Allow construction inspection with bypass switches Set to Yes Parameter 132 Inspection High Speed Set to Yes to run at 45 FPM Parameter 162 Enable Redundant Inspection Check Set to No Drive Parameters Drive parameters are set on the drive Locate the start up instructions for your drive and feed back loop in this manual Section 4 and set parameters accordingly Consult the drive manu facturer s manual to familiarize yourself with the drive A Danger Set the Inspection Speed parameter of the drive to 45 FPM Using I nspection Stations to Run In inspection a car operates at slow speed using up and down buttons The car will stop as soon as the buttons are released Controller Operate the car using the controller UP or DOWN mpeg inspection buttons A car running in either direction will EMT NEN UE automatically stop when it reaches the normal terminal SEEI 21S o ta switch in that direction Pressing and holding both UP Speen and DOWN buttons at the same time will open the doors WuPiC Speen ole if the car is stopped at a door zone LM DOOR Car Top Inspection Por DISAB In this mode the car is operated by pushing the cartop I UP or DOWN and SAFETY buttons Doors will open if both UP and DOWN buttons are pres
89. operation so the limit board can learn and limit inspection speed to 150 of the learn inspection speed value The Inspection Learn may be completed before the slowdown limits are wired 1 Press and hold switch S3 for 5 seconds The board will enter learn mode LED DS25 will blink rapidly 8 times per second Diagnostic LEDs DS17 18 and 22 will light steadily 2 Movethe car on Inspection in the up direction for 5 seconds When the car is stopped LED DS17 will go off and the Insp Mode LED DS24 will light 3 Movethe car on inspection in the down direction for 5 seconds When the car is stopped the DS18 22 and 24 LEDs will go off and DS25 will light steadily The inspection learn process is complete 4 14 Manual 42 02 2100 Contents Index _MCE Web Limit Board Adjustment Normal Learn The normal learn procedure varies slightly depending upon the revision of software installed on MPU 2 of the Limit Gripper board Please refer to 2K Limit Gripper Board on page 4 12 for processor location Check the revision level of the software on MPU 2 It will be either V2 xx or V3 xx Perform the learn procedure accordingly Before a normal learn can be performed all proper inputs for direction speed and slowdowns must be connected to the limit gripper board Hoistway limits must be set to open at the same distance from the terminal landing as the selector magnet slowdowns come on The board will sense a normal learn mod
90. or 2 To access any of the 300 parameters the encoder board must be installed Always remove power from the drive before unplugging or plugging in the encoder board Closed Loop Speed Control 370 Set to a 0 Overview Set all of the parame ters shown in the table for closed loop operation Please refer to A500 Parameters Closed Loop Speed Control on page 3 86 The following parameters are recognized when the encoder board is installed These parameters must be set properly for the drive to work in this mode 144 359 369 367 368 Parameter 370 set to a 0 requires the encoder direction parameter 359 be set properly for speed regulation from the encoder To determine if this parameter is set properly or the encoder is working do the following 1 Run the car at slow inspection speed with an empty car 2 Viewthe drive display monitoring the frequency 3 Ifthe encoder is working the frequency will be higher in the down direction as well fluctuating to regulate the car speed 4 Ifthe encoder is rotating backwards you will move at the same frequency in the up and the down direction 5 Ifthe encoder is not working or is misconnected you will have the same condition as rotating backwards 6 To reverse the encoder direction change parameter 359 from a 0 to a 1or from a 1to a O You can monitor the motor RPM at the drive to insure the encoder is working Closed loop speed control 370 set toa 1 or 2 Only if you have m
91. polarity Enabled Disabled Disabled when set to Enable and a logic input is Disabled 3 31 Startup amp Drive Adjustment MeE Table 3 3 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Closed Loop 3 32 Manual 42 02 2T00 S Curve Abort Addresses how S Curve Speed Reference Enabled Disabled Disabled Generator handles a reduction in speed Disabled command before S Curve Generator has reached target speed Fast Flux Reduces starting takeoff time by reducing Enabled Enabled Enabled motor fluxing time Disabled Main DIP Ena Enables Mains DIP Speed A1 parameter Enabled Disabled Disabled which reduces speed when a UV alarm Disabled low voltage is declared DB Protection Dynamic braking Protection fault or alarm Fault Fault Fault selection Alarm Encoder Fault Temporarily disables the Encoder Fault Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Stopping Mode Determines stopping mode when Immediate Immediate mmediate Spd Command Src multi step Ramp to stop Motor Ovrld Sel Motor Overload Selection Alarm Alarm FLT Imme Flt Immediate diate Fault at Stop Auto Stop Auto Stop Function enable Disable Disable Disable Enable Serial Mode Serial Protocol selection None Mode 1 None Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 2 test SER2 FLT Mode Defines reaction to a serial communication immediate Immediate immediate fault while in Serial Mode 2 Only serial Run mode 2 remove rescue DRV Fast Disable
92. problems or possibilities If you encounter any difficulties please contact MCE Technical Support Use the Magnetek manual as a reference but follow the start up and adjusting procedures here Before the controller and drive were shipped the entire system was tested at the factory AII drive parameters were preset based on the information provided in the controller order form The drive should run on inspection operation with very little effort If not verify that the motor information given to MCE was correct If not contact Engineering for assistance System Overview The control system uses the HPV 600 internal speed curve algorithm Adjustments to the accel rate jerk rates and decel rate are made through the drive HPV 600 Drive Programming Closed Loop The drive has been modified to meet MCE specifications If replacement of the drive is ever required please contact MCE Technical Support MCE will not accept any drive warranty repair without a Return Material Authorization RMA number issued by Technical Support Remov ing boards from the drive without authorization may void the manufacturer warranty Once the controller has been powered up the drive must be programmed to operate correctly with the equipment on the job site MCE has pre programmed the drive based on the informa tion provided in the electrical survey but it is important to confirm ALL parameters before attempting to run the car The drive may fault on initial p
93. required after the motor has been auto tuned To deactivate the MFVC mode set 9999 in parameters 80 and 81 Atthis point you should already have adjusted the car in open loop volts hertz mode Depending on the motor it may not be possible to auto tune or run the drive in this mode see the section below explaining adjusting problems If an encoder board and encoder have been provided the encoder board must be unplugged from the drive before auto tuning is performed Auto tuning with the card installed can cause theauto tuning parameters to be stored incorrectly Always remove power from the drive before unplugging or plugging in the board Adjusting the Drive in MFVC Vector Mode Initial conditions Car may berun in inspection from the controller Carload must be balanced The encoder board if provided must be unplugged from the drive before auto tuning Always remove power from the drive before unplugging or plugging in a board 1 Movecarto the lowest floor 2 Set the drive to PU by pressing the PU key 3 Set the following parameters Table 3 16 A500 Parameters MFVC Parameter Value FO OKT 1 60 Hz 2 0 Hz 3 60 Hz 4 60 Hz 5 6 Hz 6E 2 7 2 Sec 8 2 Sec 9 Motor nameplate current 10 0 7 Hz II A O08Sec 00000000 13 DRE 22 20096 29 1 S curve 71 13 Contents Index _MCE Web 3 81 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Nes Table 3 16 A500 P
94. required for car switch operation Manual door software can be used with a stan dard car station or car switch Running the Car From the Hand Held The car may be run from the hand held unit for tune up purposes The door disable switch on the controller should be on Enteringa floor in the simplex parking floor parameter 141 moves the car to the entered floor Parking delay time parameter 142 should be set to O Before the car is run from the car switch the parking floor must be set to 0 and the door disable switch must be off If the door disable switch is on the car switch will latch the top and bottom floor car calls Setting Up Car Switch Operation To use car switch operation Putthe caron attendant operation by setting the B2 input on the CSTA board car station ON The field terminal board used on the CSTA I O board for car calls must be the O type This type of field terminal board does not connect the input to the output for the call acknowledge light Parameters and floor tables are set as on a standard job except 133 Yes Inspection flag Prevents car calls from latching 139 0 Prevents car going out of service if delayed 141 0 Parking floor 142 0 Parking delay time Operation When the car switch is moved to the up direction the top floor car call input will be activated This will start the car in motion Moving the handle to the center position top floor car call inp
95. run 1 Just started waiting to leave door zone 10 Running up Run up Drive is running up 11 Down run start DownRunStart Down run start 12 Down run first Down Run 1 Just started waiting to leave door zone 13 Running down Run down Drive is running down 14 Up slowdown Up sldn start Drive is beginning slowdown in up direction start not used 15 Slowdown up Slowing up Drive is in slowdown in up direction 16 Dn slowdown Dn sldn start Drive is beginning slowdown in down direc start tion not used 17 Slowdown down Slowing down Drive is in slowdown in down direction 18 Up leveling in Up ODZ level Drive is in up leveling within outer door zone not used Contents Index _MCE Web Main Menus Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 282 and HHU Version 6 262 03 07 19 Up leveling in Up DZlevel Drive is in up leveling within inner door inner door zone zone 20 Down leveling in DownODZ level Drive is in down leveling within outer door outer door zone zone not used 21 Down leveling in DownlDZlevel Drive is in down leveling within inner door inner door zone zone 22 Up slowdown UpLimit sldn Slowdown in up direction due to limit slow caused by speed down while car position is correct limit 23 Up good limit UpGoodLimSld Drive slowed down in up direction due to slowdown simultaneous position and limit slowdown inputs 24 Down slowdown DnLimi
96. that all brake voltages are set correctly and that the resis tance around the brake coil is connected properly The resistance can be changed to control brake set Less resistance causes a slower drop More resistance causes a quicker drop The car should now be running at contract speed with accurate floor stops and a smooth ride Remove all weights from the car and staying away from the terminal floors make one floor runs and multi floor runs up and down Add weight to the car approximately 100 pounds at a time Staying away from the terminal floors observe one floor and multi floor runs to be sure that the car rides well under all load conditions Keep adding weight until the car has full load less the weight of anyone riding the car HPV 600 Adaptive Tune Ifthe motor is old and no data is available for it an adaptive tune must be performed The adap tive tune requires that the car is run at contract speed and is capable of lifting full load 1 Select the Default Motor option for the Motor ID parameter This will load default val ues into the motor data parameters to prepare the drive for the adaptive tune 2 Placea balanced load in the car Reduce the car speed to 7096 of contract speed by changingthe value of SPEED COMMAND 8 A3 3 Runthe car from top to bottom and back While the car is running monitor the motor torque under Display Power Data D2 The torque should be between 15 If not verify that the car is balanced
97. the current status of several controller functions Car Errors The Car Errors screen displays the last fifty errors that have occurred on the controller Error 1is the most recent Error 50 is the oldest Inputs amp Outputs Allows you to select particular I O 24 boards and view the activity on their inputs and outputs 5 6 Manual amp 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web States Submenu Screen The current operating mode of the controller can be deduced by observing the current status of the state machines The following table lists each state potential status display State Name HHU Label and an explanation Help where appropriate Main Menus If a status is in CAPITAL LETTERS on the HHU it indicates an error condition Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 282 and HHU Version 6 262 03 07 ID Name State State Name HHU Label Help 1 Master 0 Init Initialize System initialization 1 Normal 2 State 2 State 2 3 Loss of Commu NETWORK LOSS Loss of communication with any node card nications in control network 4 Invalid Parame INVALID PAR Invalid Parameter s ters 5 State 5 State 5 6 State 6 State 6 2 Inspection 0 Init 1 Top of car TOC Insp on Top of car inspection 2 In car In car insp In car inspection 3 Access Access Access inspection 4 Controller Insp control Inspection set from the controller switch 5 TOC input failure TOC FA
98. the point the drive will begin to DC 0 7 Hz operating frequency inject for stopping the motor 11 DC Injection brake Adjusts the amount of time the DC will be 0 5 sec duration applied 12 DC Injection brake Adjusts the 96 of motor voltage applied at the 596 voltage stop 19 Base frequency voltage Motor name plate voltage must be lt main Motor nominal voltage line VAC 22 Current limit Maximum current allowed in percentage of 160 drive nominal current 24 Int speed High inspection speed 30 Hz 29 Accel Decel S curve 0 linear 1 S curve 0 linear rate profile 72 PWM Frequency Preset is 2 KHZ which will cause a lot of audi 10 KHz ble motor noise 80 Motor Capacity Activates MVFC mode automatically when set 9999 to any value 81 Number of motor poles Activates MVFC mode automatically when set 9999 to any value 3 80 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Mitsubishi A500 Variable Frequency Drive Mitsubishi A500 Magnetic Flux Vector Control The MFVC mode allows the drive to track speed improving control and almost eliminating stall conditions In this mode the A500 can approach the ride quality of a closed loop vector drive The MFVC mode of operation is automatically activated when parameters 80 and 81 are set to any value other than 9999 When MFVC mode is activated the value entered for torque boost parameter 0 is ignored The drive will internally calculate the necessary torque boost values
99. to one second with the potentiometer fully clock wise fast accel and fast decel S Curve Knee Pots The S shape of the output is controlled by Knee pots P1 P4 When the pots are turned full counter clockwise the curve will be very smooth When the pots are turned full dockwise the curve will be very sharp These adjustments will have more effect when acceleration or deceler ation rates are slow and will have less effect when the rates are fast Pot Function P1 Accel start P2 Accel end P3 Decel start P4 Decel end Dead Zone Pattern Ramp The R54 potentiometer allows the speed reference output to be ramped to 0 when the car enters the dead zone level When the car becomes level the up down signal will be dropped The speed reference will be ramped to zero at a rate determined by the R54 setting With R54 full clockwise the reference will ramp for 10 milliseconds With R54 full counterclockwise the ref erence will ramp for 0 5 seconds Normally the pot should be set full clockwise fastest ramp Final S Curve Adjustments S curve and speed pots have been set at the factory to the speeds shown above Only minor adjustment is required The accel rate has been set to a slow rate full counterclockwise The decel rate has been set to a fast rate full clockwise These setting will help with your first high speed runs preventing overshooting floors Adjust the accel decel and knee pots for a comfort able rate After the multi floor run
100. via an earthing rod to the single ground stud Continuous wire from the main line disconnect to the single ground stud Continuous wire from the motor frame to the single ground stud Continuous wire from the isolation transformer frame to the single ground stud Continuous wire from the line filter frame to the single point ground stud e Jumper the N stud on the line filter to the line filter frame Continuous wire from the load reactor frame to the single point ground stud Continuous wire from the drive frame ground stud to the single point ground stud 2 6 Manual 42 02 2100 Contents Index _MCE Web Equipment Grounding Equipment Grounding A proper ground is essential to trouble free operation Ground is defined as a direct connection to EARTH GROUND This type of ground is not always available from the electrical supply panel The electrical conduit is not a sufficient ground for the system Electrical ground should be obtained and certified from the electrical contractor If this is not available keep the following in mind when seeking an adequate connection to EARTH GROUND 1 Buildingsteel is not always earth ground In most cases building beams rest on concrete beam pockets and the earth connection is inadequate 2 Sprinkler system water pipe is not adequate because the sprinkler system is in most cases isolated from a free flowing earth water source If either of the two methods above are
101. 0 2 Ramp predictable rate upon clamping regulator 86 LPR Decay time Allows relay LPR to remain picked until arma Sec 001 2 5 0 3 0 3 ture current decays 87 Pretorque Mult Multiplies pretorque command 0 9 2 0 1 0 1 0 3 96 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Table 3 18 DSD 412 Drive Parameters Magnetek DSD 412 DC Drive 95 Analog output O Set to 0 to assign Speed Reference to Analog V 0 2Spd 0 0 TB1 45 output 0 0 to 10V between TB1 44 Ref 1 Trace Bf 96 Analog output 1 Set to 0 to assign Speed Feedback to Analog v 0 Spd 0 0 TB1 46 output 1 0 to 10V between TB1 46 and Fbk TB1 80 1 Trace Bf 97 Test Point O Mult Sets multiplier for Analog output 0 TB1 45 V 0 10 7 1 0 98 Test point 1 Mult Sets multiplier for Analog output 1 TB1 46 V 0 10 7 1 0 99 Spd_Err_Hyst Sets amount of time speed command will be sec 0 2 5 0 8 8 allowed to vary from speed feedback before drive trips on a speed error fault 100 Spd Err Lim Sets amount speed command will be allowed 96 10 100 30 0 30 0 to vary from speed feedback before drive trips on a speed error fault 104 1 Serial Gain Sw Determines source of gain Reduce function at ON OFF OFF OFF parameter 108 If set to 0 it is determined by parameter 105 Gain Switch speed 105 Gain Switch Point on speed reference curve at which gain 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 Speed switches to va
102. 0 Acceleration rate 0 fts 0 7 99 3 00 3 50 Decel Rate 0 Deceleration rate 0 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 4 00 Accel Jerk in 0 Rate of increase of acceleration up ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 to ACCEL Rate when increasing ele vator speed Accel Jerk out 0 Rate of decrease of acceleration to ftjs3 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 zero when approaching contract ele vator speed Decel Jerk in O Rate of increase of deceleration up ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 to Decel Rate when decreasing ele vator speed Decel Jerk out 0 Rate of decrease of deceleration to fs3 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 zero when slowing the elevator to leveling speed Accel Rate 1 Acceleration rate 1 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Decel Rate 1 Deceleration rate 1 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Accel Jerk in 1 Rate of increase of acceleration up ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 to ACCEL Rate when increasing ele vator speed Accel Jerk out 1 Rate of decrease of acceleration to ftjs3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when approaching contract ele vator speed Decel Jerk in 1 Rate of increase of deceleration up ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 to Decel Rate when decreasing ele vator speed Decel Jerk out 1 Rate of decrease of deceleration to ftjs3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when slowing the elevator to leveling speed Accel Rate 2 Acceleration rate 2 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Decel Rate 2 Deceleration rate 2 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Accel Jerk in 2 Rate of increase of acceleration up ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 to ACCEL Rate when increasing ele vator speed Accel
103. 00 0FPM Parameter Display First Digit Next Display Result at a Four motor speed of 60Hz Number of Decimal Speed of Car at Maxi Places mum Motor Speed Maximum motor speed E1 04 Default 60Hz Setting Induction motors may be wound in a variety of configurations 4 6 or 8 poles Each will pro duce different RPM for the same applied frequency Additionally the amount of slip in the motor design will affect the actual maximum speed at 60Hz The maximum speed of the motor is set in hertz Hz Unless you are performing an over speed test or the motor is rated at some other frequency it is advisable to leave the maximum motor speed at the default value of 60 hertz and adjust car speed using parameter O1 03 Sample setup of O1 03 Sample information Rated RPM 1100 and Contract Speed 150FPM Find the synchronous speed of the motor in the followingtable using the next higher RPM from the rated RPM for your motors synchronous speed Synchronous no slip RPM Number of Poles 900 8 1200 6 1800 4 Contents Index _MCE Web 3 65 Startup amp Drive Adjustment MeE Since scaling is based on maximum motor speed it is necessary to determine the speed of the car at that speed This can be mathematically calculated using the following formula Using the table above we find that the next higher RPM from our example of 1100RPM is 1200RPM which would indicate that the motor is a 6 pole design Usin
104. 1 RB TB1 3 to GOV1A TB1 on PMT N A on non 2k models Hoistway safety string GOV1 RB TB1 3 to CG1 RB TB3 5 Car Gate CG1 RB TB3 5 to CG2 RB TB3 6 Door Lock TL1 RB TB4 2 to BL2 RB TB4 7 Up Normal Terminal UNT1 RB TB4 8 to UNT2 HY 1 Down Normal Terminal DNT1 HY 2 to DNT2 HY 3 Door Pre Lock PL1 RB TB3 7 to PL2 TB3 8 Factory jumpered if no door pre locks Required Controller and Drive Parameter Settings In order to operate safely in construction mode particular controller and drive parameters must be verified or set A Caution Before powering the controller to make these settings verify that the Run Stop switch is in the Stop position Contents Index _MCE Web 2 15 Installation RA ee Controller Parameters The Hand Held Unit HHU is used to program controller parameters Refer to Section 6 of this guide if you are unfamiliar with the operating the HHU For the settings described here you may plug the HHU into the jack on any of the I O 24 boards in the controller Car Setup Parameters Menu Parameter 76 Timeto hold the drive running after the brake output is dropped during Inspection operation Slow brake compensation Start with 2 0 seconds adjust as needed Parameter 84 Time to delay brake lift during Inspection operation Set to compensate for potential roll back Machine dependent Parameter 85 Time brake remains lifted after the car stops during Inspection
105. 1 05 6 Directional control of the elevator is controlled via input to terminals S1 and S2 forward and reverse respectively These are set during the 2 wire initialization process in parameter A1 03 programmed at the factory prior to shipment Contents Index _MCE Web 3 63 3 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Nes Digital Outputs In addition to digital inputs the Yaskawa F7 Drive has 3 isolated programmable digital outputs and one form C fault contact These have been wired and programmed at the factory Table 3 8 Yaskawa F7 Drive Digital Outputs Terminals Function Parameter Setting MA MC Fault Contact N O N A N A MB MC Fault Contact N C N A N A M1 M2 During Run 3 ready to run output H2 01 0 M3 M4 Not used by Controller Default Zero Speed H2 02 1 M5 M6 Not used by Controller Default Fref Out Agree H2 03 2 Analog Outputs The Yaskawa F7 Drive has 2 analog outputs that can be programmed to monitor a variety of drive functions These are not used by the Tricon controller and may be used for other monitor ing purposes See F7 Users Manual Index A 29 for a list of other output selections Table 3 9 Yaskawa F7 Drive Analog Outputs Terminals Default Function Parameter Setting FM AC Output Speed in FPM 0 10VDC or 10VDC H4 01 2 AM AC Output Current 0 10VDC or 10VDC H4 02 3 Scaling Car Speed to Motor This procedure has been compl
106. 16 Parking seventh prior ity floor floor If an idle car is available to park and floors with higher priority with a valid floor setting have a parked car the available car will be assigned to this floor 17 Parking eighth priority floor floor If an idle car is available to park and floors with higher priority with a valid floor setting have a parked car the available car will be assigned to this floor 18 Open doors once at park ing floor see Help column After parking at this floor the car will cycle open close indicated doors 0 Do not open doors 1 2 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 2 Open both doors This parameter is overridden by the Hold door open parameter for this floor pars 26 33 19 Open doors once at sec ond parking floor 0 3 see Help column After parking at this floor the car will cycle open close indicated doors 0 2 Do not open doors 1 2 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 2 Open both doors This parameter is overridden by the Hold door open parameter for this floor pars 26 33 5 75 Tricon Configuration Nes Table 5 28 Dispatcher Parameter Screen Parameters 20 Open doors once at third 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car parking floor column will cycle open close indicated doors 0 Do not open doors 1 2 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 O
107. 2 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Main Menus Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 282 and HHU Version 6 262 03 07 13 Opened by door Opened DOB Door is opened due to door open button open button activation 14 Opened by Safety Opened SE Door is opened due to safe edge activation edge 15 Opened by elec Opened EE Door is opened due to electric eye activa tric eye tion 16 Opened by a car Opened CC Door is opened due to a car call at present call floor 17 Opened by a hall Opened HC Door is opened due to a hall call at present call floor 18 Opened by both a car and hall call Opened CC amp HC Door is opened due to both a car and hall at present floor 19 Opened Opened Door is opened Door open limit is off 20 Opened by a hall Opened HDoor Door is opened due to the manual hall door door being opened swing door only 21 Opened error OPENED ERROR Doors failed to open fully timeout 22 Closing Closing Door is closing 23 Reopening Reopening Door is reopening after being in closing state 24 Closed Closed Door is closed door closed limit is made 25 Locking Locking Doors are locking 26 Locked Locked Door lock is made 27 Closing error CANNOT CLOSE Door failed to close timeout 28 Locking error CANNOT LOCK Door failed to lock timeout 29 Locked error UNLOCKED Lost gate or lock while car was moving 30 Opening er
108. 25 5 1 sec Sets rate of PI flashing and buzzer pulse rate on nudging during nudging 58 Signals Position indica 0 255 0 sec Determines how long the position indicator tor timeout time will remain on after the car stops with no direction and car call priority expired 59 Signals Lantern output 0 25 5 1 sec When the lantern executes a double ding on off time interval sets the time the lantern will stay ON and the time it will shut OFF before the second ding 60 Signals Passing chime 0 25 5 0 4 sec Passing chime ON time ON time interval 61 Signals Buzzer also yes no no yes no When set to Yes pulses buzzer output used as passing chime together with passing chime output Allows use of only one buzzer for all functions 62 Passing chime will yes no yes yes no When set to Yes passing chime will always always operate in auto operate in automatic service matic service 63 Drive Run timeout 5 255 20 sec If the car takes longer than this time to run time reset at each floor between two floors it will stop and generate an error 64 Drive Minimum time to 0 25 5 O sec Once the drive has stopped it will not wait before re starting restart until this time has elapsed 65 Drive Slowdown time 5 255 20 sec If the car takes more than this time to slow out time down at a floor an error will be produced and the car will stop 66 Drive Time it takes to 0 25 5 5 sec Time it takes the car to fully stop if running f
109. 3 H2 02 Term M3 M4 Sel Terminal M1 M2 Function Selection 0 40 4 4 4 Frequency Detection 1 H2 03 Term M5 M6 Sel Terminal M1 M2 Function Selection 0 40 F F 3 71 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Me Analog I nputs H3 01 Term A1 Lvl Set Sets the signal level of terminal A1 0 1 0 0 0 O to 10VDC 1 10 to 10VDC H3 02 Terminal Al Gain Sets the output level when 10V is input asa 0 0 100 0 100 0 percentage of max output frequency E1 04 1000 0 H3 03 Terminals A1 Sets the output level when OV is input asa 100 0 0 0 0 0 Bias percentage of max output frequency E1 04 100 0 H3 04 Term A3 Signal Sets the signal level of terminal A3 0 1 0 0 0 0 to 10VDC 1 10 to 10VDC H3 05 Terminal A3 Sel Terminal A3 Function Selection 0 1F 1F 1F 1F Not Used H3 06 Terminal A3 Gain Sets the output level when 10V is input 96 0 0 100 0 100 0 1000 0 H3 07 Terminal A3 Bias Sets the frequency reference when OV is 100 0 0 0 0 0 input 100 0 Analog Outputs See H4 01 description in F7 Drive Manual H4 01 Terminal FM Sel Terminal FM Monitor Selection 1 99 1 1 1 Frequency Ref H4 02 Terminal FM Sets terminal FM output level when selected 0 0 100 0 100 0 Gain monitor is at 10096 1000 0 H4 03 Terminal FM Bias Sets terminal FM output level when selected 110 0to 0 0 0 0 monitor is at 096 110 0 H4 04 Terminal A
110. 3 ft m 0 45 Speed command 4 Multi Step Speed command 4 ft m 0 Speed Command 5 Multi Step Speed command 5 ft m 0 0 Speed command 6 Multi Step Speed command 6 ft m 0 0 Speed Command 7 Multi Step Speed command 7 ft m 0 0 Speed command 8 Multi Step Speed command 8 ft m 0 Speed Command 9 Multi Step Speed command 9 ft m 0 0 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 10 ft m 0 0 10 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 11 ft m 0 0 11 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 12 ft m 0 0 12 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 13 ft m 0 0 13 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 14 ft m 0 0 14 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 15 ft m 0 0 15 A4 Power Convert Id Reg Diff gain Flux Current regulator differential gain 0 80 1 20 1 00 1 00 3 49 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 5 HPV 900 Drive Parameters MeE Id Reg Prop Gain Flux current regulator proportional 0 20 0 40 0 30 0 30 gain Iq Reg Diff Gain Torque current regulator differential 0 80 1 20 1 00 1 00 gain Iq Reg Prop Gain Torque current regulator proportional 0 20 0 40 0 30 0 30 gain PWM Frequency Carrier frequency kHz 2 5 16 0 10 0 10 0 UV Alarm Level Voltage level for undervoltage alarm 80 99 80 90 UV Fault Level Voltage level for undervoltage fault 96
111. 50 88 80 80 Extern Reactance External choke reactance 96 0 10 0 0 Input L L Volts Nominal line line AC input voltage RMS volts 110 480 Drive dep A5 Motor Motor ID Motor Identification 4 PoleDFLT 6 MCE Test Pole DFLT MCE Test Rated Mtr Power Rated motor output power HP 1 0 500 5 0 T Rated Mtr Volts Rated motor terminal RMS voltage volts 190 0 575 0 1460 i Rated Excit Freq Rated excitation frequency Hz 5 0 400 0 60 Rated Motor Curr Rated motor current amps 1 00 800 00 6 8 Motor Poles Motor poles 2 32 6 Rated Mtr Speed Rated motor speed at full load RPM 50 0 3000 0 1130 96 No Load Curr Percent no load current 96 10 0 60 0 Stator Leakage X Stator leakage reactance 0 20 0 9 0 9 0 Rotor Leakage X Rotor leakage reactance 96 0 20 0 9 0 9 0 Stator Resist Stator resistance 96 0 20 0 1 5 1 5 Motor Iron Loss lron loss at rated frequency 96 0 15 0 0 5 0 5 Motor Mech Loss Mechanical loss at rated frequency 96 0 15 0 1 0 1 0 Ovld Start Level Maximum continuous motor current 100 150 110 110 Ovld Time Out Time that defines motor overload sec 5 0 120 0 60 0 60 0 curve Flux Sat Break Flux saturation curve slope change 96 0 100 75 75 point Flux Sat Slope 1 Flux saturation curve slope for low 96 0 200 0 0 0 fluxes Flux Sat Slope 2 Flux saturation curve slope for high 0 200 0 50 50 fluxes Configure CO C1 User Switches Spd Command Src S5peed Command Source Analog input Multi ste
112. 6 Not used FPM 0 0 0 0 0 0 D1 07 Combination High Inspection Speed FPM 0 0 42 0 45 0 must be gt D1 03 and lt D1 02 D1 08 Reference 8 Preset Reference 8 Not used FPM 0 0 0 0 0 0 D1 17 jog reference J og Reference Medium Speed FPM 0 0 42 0 Reference Limits D2 01 Ref Upper Limit Frequency Reference Upper Limit 96 0 0 110 0 100 0 100 0 D2 02 Ref Lower Limit Frequency Reference Lower Limit 96 0 0 110 0 0 0 0 0 3 69 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Nes Jump Frequencies not used set at drive defaults MQ eae ae ee eee E1 05 Mnid 0 E1 08 l Min l E1 10 FREQUENCY Frrin Fmid FA Frax E1 09 E1 07 E1 06 E1 04 V F Pattern Field Adjustable Parameters are shaded E1 01 Input Voltage Input Voltage Setting V 180 460 230 460 E1 02 Motor Selection Motor selection 0 Fan Coded 1 Blower 0 1 0 0 Coded E1 03 V F Selection V F Pattern Selection N A to Flux Vector 0 F F F 0 50Hz 1 60Hz Saturation 2 50Hz Saturation 3 72Hz 60 Hz Base 4 50Hz Variable Torque 1 5 50Hz Variable Torque 2 6 60Hz Variable Torque 1 7 60Hz Variable Torque 2 8 50Hz High Starting Torque 1 9 50Hz High Starting Torque 2 A 60Hz High Starting Torque 1 B 60Hz High Starting Torque 2 C 90Hz 60 Hz Base D 120Hz 60 Hz Base E 180Hz 60 Hz Base F Custom V F FF Custom w o limit E1 04 Max Frequency Maximu
113. 9 Code Blue parameters Group 79 Communication cables 39 Connecting Cars to Groups 39 Connecting the HHU to the car 12 Connecting the HHU to the group 12 Construction mode 18 Construction operation 15 Construction operation jumpers 15 Construction operation parameters 16 Contract speed learn 2K 15 Contract speed learn standard 7 Controller board 5 Controller inspection 14 16 41 Counterweight buffer test 21 Counterweight Displacement Switch 22 Counterweight Position Switch 22 CPU 5 Cross cancellation 79 CWS 22 D De burring hoistway tape 26 DEC 143 DEC 2 43 DHall Board Inputs 30 32 34 DHALL Board Outputs 31 DHALL card 82 DHALL2 card 82 DHALL3 card 82 Diagnostic States 7 Directional limits 36 Dispatcher board 13 Dispatcher connection hand held unit 12 Dispatcher connections 39 Dispatcher Setup 73 Dispatcher Parameter Screen Parameters 66 74 84 DN5 9 Door behavior at Parking floor 75 77 Door Operation 15 16 Access 14 Code Blue 19 Inspection 14 16 Door Parameters 38 74 Fire45 Lobby 48 Parking 47 75 Down slowdown magnets 29 Drive Parameters 42 Drive applications 2 DSD 412 88 DSL 5 9 DZ10 DZBP 5 9 Index 1 E Earthquake equipment install 38 Farthquake operation 21 Earthquake parameters 49 ECHLON boards 54 Electrical noise 5 Emergency power 18 47 78 Pre transfer 16 Emergency power inputs Group 17 Emergency power manual operation 18 Emergency power parameters car 18 Emergency p
114. 9 Increase the car speed to 100 of contract speed With balanced load still in the car run the car from top to bottom and back 10 While the caris running observe EST NO LOAD CURR found under Display Power Data D2 Compare this value to the value found under NO LOAD CURR found under Adjust Motor A5 11 If the EST NO LOAD CURR value is 2 larger than the NO LOAD CURR then increase FLUX SAT SLOPE 2 by 10 If the EST NO LOAD CURR and NO LOAD CURR values are within 2 continue to step 12 12 Repeat steps 9 and 10 until EST NO LOAD CURR and NO LOAD CURR are within 2 13 Place full load in the car Run the car at contract speed from top to bottom and back 3 60 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive 14 Observe EST RATED RPM found under Display Power Data D2 15 Enter this value into RATED MTR SPEED found under Adjust Motor A5 16 Remove full load from the car and place balanced load in it Run the car from bottom to top and back 17 Observe EST INERTIA found under Display Elevator Data D1 Write down the value for up and down 18 Average the up and down values of EST INERTIA Enter this value into INERTIA found under Adjust Drive AD 19 Remove weights from the car Ride the car up and down adding 100 pounds of weight at atime Observe one floor two floor and multi floor runs to be sure that the car rides well under all load conditions Normal Speed Learn O
115. 9 Parking Main parking floor 0 32 floor Set this to the floor where at least one car should always park Setting this to zero will instruct the dispatcher to dynamically select all parking floors 11 Parking second priority floor 5 74 Manual 42 02 2T00 0 32 floor and the Main parking floor when set to a number other than 0 has a parked car the available car will be assigned to this floor If an idle car is available to park Table 5 28 Dispatcher Parameter Screen Parameters Main Menus 12 Parking third priority floor 0 32 0 floor If an idle car is available to park and floors with higher priority with a valid floor setting have a parked car the available car will be assigned to this floor 13 Parking fourth priority floor floor If an idle car is available to park and floors with higher priority with a valid floor setting have a parked car the available car will be assigned to this floor 14 Parking fifth priority floor floor If an idle car is available to park and floors with higher priority with a valid floor setting have a parked car the available car will be assigned to this floor 15 Parking sixth priority floor floor If an idle car is available to park and floors with higher priority with a valid floor setting have a parked car the available car will be assigned to this floor
116. 96 of the learned inspection speed when the car is operating in Inspection mode The inspection learn can be completed before the slowdown limits are wired To learn inspection speed 1 Pressand hold the S3 and S1 switches Release switch S1 before releasing switch S3 LED D25 will blink rapidly four times per second Diagnostic LEDs D10 and D11 will be on 2 Movethe car on inspection in the up direction for five seconds When the car is stopped the D10 LED will go off 3 Movethe car on inspection in the down direction for five seconds When the car is stopped the D11 LED will go off D25 will now be on continuously indicating the learn was successful Operation Normal Setup High Speed The Limit board must have all of the proper inputs for direction speed and slowdowns The hoistway limits must be set to open at the same distance from the terminal landing as the selec tor magnet slowdowns The board will sense a normal learn mode when the board is in thelearn mode and the UP input goes on Either the USL or HUSL input will be on If after UP input is on and HS or MS are not on then the board enters inspection set up mode as outlined in the inspection setup When the car enters set up mode LEDs D10 and D11 are illuminated 1 To place the limit board on the learn mode press and hold the S3 and S1 switches Release switch S1 before releasing switch S3 LED D25 will blink rapidly four times per second Diagnostic LEDs D10 an
117. A two car group example of this board is shown below Figure 1 7 Optional Dispatcher Board f ae TODOTCHER D 1 ean s 10 0022 ASSY 03 0022 EN m a LA m LL PCB a m ORAN Controls 2 Please refer to Seismic Equipment on page 2 38 for an example of how a Dispatcher board is connected inside the dispatcher cabinet Control Parameters A good way to familiarize yourself with the capabilities of Tricon car and group controls is to read through the control parameters tables Ifyou have not installed Tricon controls before this is a very valuable process Please refer to Car Setup Parameters Screen on page 5 38 Please refer to Dispatcher Parameter Screen Parameters on page 5 74 Contents Index MCEWeb 113 1 Tricon General I nformation Cm Operating Modes This section describes controller operating modes including nspection Operation Car Switch Attendant Operation Emergency Power Operation Code Blue Operation Seismic Operation I nspection Operation Inspection priority order is Top of car Access Controller In inspection a car operates at slow speed using up and down buttons The car will stop as soon as the buttons are released A Danger Changing parameters 76 and 85 may allow the drive to remain on after the buttons are released Make sure 76 and 85 are set to 0 zero when the car is released to normal service Controller In
118. AD CURR are within 2 Place a full load in the car Run the car at contract speed from top to bottom and back to top and back Observe EST INERTIA found under Display Elevator Data D1 Write down the value for up and down Average the up and down values of EST INERTIA Enter this value into INERTIA found under Adjust Drive A1 Remove weights from the car Ride the car up and down adding 100 pounds of weight at atime Observe one floor two floor and multi floor runs to be sure that the car rides well under all load conditions Normal Speed Learn Operation You must now perform a normal speed learn operation using the controls on the Limit Board Please refer to the learn operation information for your particular Limit Board in Section 4 of this guide Please refer to Limit Board Standard on page 4 3 Please refer to 2K Limit Gripper Board on page 4 9 3 40 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _ MCE Web Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive This section describes HPV 900 Startup HPV 900 High Speed Adjustment HPV 900 Adaptive Tuning Brake Adjustment HPV 900 Startup The Magnetek HPV 900 is an AC Vector drive In order to obtain optimal ride quality and per formance the drive must be tuned to the motor The tuning process requires that you be famil iar with the drive and AC motors If you have never worked on this drive or another AC Vector drive please contact Moti
119. Board each car Gateway Board PW5 Board To Additional Cars Contents Index _MCE Web 2 39 Installation Mek Figure 2 18 Car Group Communication Alternate Configuration NYCHA DISPATCHER Gateway Board Gateway Board Gateway Board 5 Car 1 L3 mm Disp Car 1 Car2 Car 3 Car2 HA v Disp Car1 Car2 Car 3 Car 3L PW5 Board Dispatch Board Shielded Twisted Pair shield connected at CAR 2 ne end only PW5 Board UOOU Ug A ik N1 N2 SHLD CAR 1 PW5 Board Hl 2 40 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Running on Inspection Mode Running on Inspection Mode A Danger Controller inspection warnings Read Sections 1 and 2 completely before starting this procedure Have someone stand by the main line disconnect during the following phases of the start up procedure for added safety First time power is applied to the controller First time an attempt is made to move the car nsure all safety circuits are functional nsure all hoistway door interlocks are functional nsure car gate circuitry is functional Prior to Applying Power Verify all circuits are wired to the controller properly Check the following items NSP switch up STOP switch down Door Disconnect up Verify with an ohmmeter that the governor overspeed switch and any ot
120. Board setup menu use the key Yes No keys If you are using an output group to drive a light duty CE driver board that in turn drives CE digital indicators special characters may be displayed by entering a value larger than 32 Please refer to PI Programming Using CE Light Duty Driver on page 5 60 Contents Index _MCE Web 5 63 Tricon Configuration Example 1 Single output per floor lamp MeE Set up for 9th floor PI Board position indicator and lantern and gong not activated PI Floor setup 9 1E Jf 10 LU LD RLU RLD N Y N N Ten 10 floor building No hall lanterns and gongs Enables 1 output of group in position B Single output per floor Example 2 Multiple closures used to drive light duty CE board Set up for Ath floor PI Board position indicator and lantern and gong PI Floor setup 4 IE 4 LU LD RLU RLD N Y N Y Four 4 floor building With hall lanterns and gongs for front and rear door Binary outputs If configured Lantern outputs will map themselves in this sequence The first output will start at the bottom floor front door up lantern front door down lantern rear door up lantern rear door down lantern Lanterns will map themselves in the next available output after position indicators and direc tion arrows Direction arrows are configured in the Indicator Parameters submenu 5 64 Manual 42 02 2T00 Main Menus
121. CL 5 C3 5 to C3 6 Hall call ack light 13 HCA13 CL 6 C2 5 to C2 6 Hall call ack light 14 HCA14 CL 7 C3 7 to C3 8 Hall call ack light 15 HCA15 CL 8 C2 7 to C2 8 Hall call ack light 16 HCA16 Main Menus 5 33 Tricon Configuration MeE Dispatcher EP Hall Board Table 5 14 Dispatcher EP Hall Board DHALL N v6 2 Input Examples A17 1 2000 DHALL Board Inputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AO 1 A1 1 Fire recall switch FIRE AO 2 A1 2 Fire smoke detectors bypass switch FBYP AO 3 A1 3 Smoke detectors SMOK AO 4 A1 4 Lobby smoke detector s LSMK AO 5 A1 5 Machine room smoke detectors FMRS AO 6 A1 6 Low hoistway smoke detectors FLHS AO 7 A1 7 Remote fire switch ON position FRON AO 8 A1 8 Remote fire switch OFF position FROF BL 1 B1 1 Emergency Power Select 1 EP1 BL 2 B1 2 Emergency Power Select 2 EP2 BL 3 B1 3 Emergency Power Select 3 EP3 BL 4 B1 4 Emergency Power Select 4 EP4 BL 5 B1 5 Emergency Power Select 5 EP5 BL 6 B1 6 Emergency Power Select 6 EP6 BL 7 B1 7 Emergency Power pre transfer PRE BL 8 B1 8 Emergency Power ON EP CL 1 C1 1 Hall call 1 HC1 CL 2 C1 2 Hall call 2 HC2 CL 3 C1 3 Hall call 3 HC3 CL 4 C1 4 Hall call 4 HC4 CL 5 C1 5 Hall call 5 HC5 CL 6 C1 6 Hall call 6 HC6 CL 7 C1 7 Hall call 7 HC7 CL 8 C1 8 Hall call 8 HC8 5 34 Manual 42 02 2100 Contents Index _MCE Web Main Menus Table 5 15 Dispatcher EP Hall Boar
122. Connection Velocity Encoder Installation and Wiring The velocity encoder reports hoist motor speed to the controller The encoder must be mounted and wired according to the drawings When installed the encoder must be electrically isolated from the motor or any other ground Resistance between the encoder casing and the motor or other ground should be infinite Do not place the encoder or its wiring close to a magnetic field the motor or brake coils Mag netic fields can induce AC into the encoder signal This can cause the drive to miscount produc ing erratic control at lower speeds The encoder wiring must use a separate grounded conduit Inside the controller cabinet if con trol wires must cross power wires they must cross at right angles to reduce the possibility of interference Encoder Mounting The following illustration shows two typical encoder installations Typical mounting bracket Figure 2 1 Typical Encoder Installations Hoist motor 9 pin D Connector Velocity Encoder Hoist motor shaft Hoist motor T shaft solator bushing Phenolic isolator Velocity Encoder Contents __Index _MCE Web 2 11 Installation A eE It is very important that the encoder does not slip wobble bounce or vibrate due to poor instal lation of the shaft extension coupling or encoder mounting It is also important that the encoder housing be electrically insulated from the
123. Deceleration f s 0 01 30 00 3 5 3 5 P1 16 AccelJerk In 4 S Curve 4 at the Start of Acceleration f s 0 01 30 00 15 00 15 00 P1 17 Accel Jerk Out 4 S Curve 4 at the End of Acceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 2 5 ba P1 18 Decel Jerk In 4 S Curve 4 at the Start of Deceleration f s 0 01 30 00 6 0 P1 19 Decel Jerk Out 4 S Curve 4 at the End of Deceleration f s 0 01 30 00 15 00 15 00 Set values for 200 volts The value at 400V is twice that of 200V Do not initialize the drive in the field if it is not required Setting A1 03 1110 and pressing enter will ini tialize the Drive and will set all of the drive parameters to the MCE Drive default values Parameter A1 03 will display O after Initialization 3 74 Manual 42 02 2T00 Yaskawa F7 Drive Note 1 At the factory MCE sets parameters to the values in the MCE Set column and saves those values as defaults by setting parameter O2 03 1 In the field drive parameters can be reset to MCE Set values by setting parameter A1 03 1110 Field Adjustable parameters can then be re entered Note 2 Yaskawa drive software has been modified for this application Some of the parameters in this sheet are different and are not available in the drive manuals If a drive has been replaced in the field all parame ters should be entered manually and verified according to this parameter sheet Figure 3 2 Velocity Curve and S Curve Parameters Velocity FPM Velocity Range
124. E EE EQ PER ad d wd 1 16 lipid Ero soo MP X r PT 1 17 Car Parameters Description and Operation 0 ccc ccc eee eee eees 1 18 Dispatcher Parameters Description and Operation 00 cc eee eee eee 1 18 LOB 9 ica k by daa d Vd ud ear dd Ep Eee ELA UC Ra eC CERCA 1 19 Recall PIDE ee ee eee ee eee ere Tee ee eee rer ree eris pud 1 19 Car ae is ES i he 4 8 hk 9S TEs ee 1 19 Dispatcher Parameters Description ccc cece cece cece eee rn 1 20 GEO OPEP ss reran REA hee OOS ESS 4 bw e Rice d Rd ua 1 21 Seismic Input and Output Definitions nunun norse rere cee eee nas 1 22 Section 2 Installation Installation persegra Y REOR AOROR EKER EREHES RRO R A PEATEELE ENES 2 1 Install Seg ent Lu ar dr OG er DIOC ee eee 2 2 Sop ung MONADO REFERT EP 2 2 Safely quadasd ua da tranki wd NK ENTERS AENEA COR ACECR RRS ERRORS 2 3 FSI SB aoa es oe TET SERE DP eo ee E CMS PERS 2 3 Ernoipment Sab og ehh hk Sdn ITALE AR RERRSdAAE RARE RR RR REFERAT THA 2 3 Installation Considerations eeeeeeeeee nnn 2 4 Machine Room Preparation a dua 44b e ERE FIO GERE YA EAT Yakp ees 2 4 PHA oe Eb na nse Rd S RPRERRRA RIA C P QaA EV EEREdA V eed AR Kd 2 5 How Electrical Noise Occurs uis bcc coeds eos X RERE YI ERE ORE OR Ree E ex 2 5 How to Avoid Electrical Noise Problems selle 2 5 Possible EMI RFI Interference lt ooo ona RC RD IP ee eke eee he eee ERSTER 2 6 Equipment Grounding i
125. EEDBK FEEDBK Utility UO U1 Password Password 000000 000000 Hidden Items Enable or disable hidden parameters ENABLE ENABLE U2 i Enable Disable Unit Unit for parameters ENGLISH ENGLISH U3 a English Metric UA Overspeed Test Allow overspeed test during inspection No No Yes No u5 Restore Dflts Reset all parameters to defaults Drive Info Drive information Drive Version U6 Boot Version Cube ID Drive Type u7 HEX Monitor Hex Monitor 3 53 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Drive Faults If a fault occurs in the drive the Fault LED on the front panel will light To access drive faults using the hand held programmer go to the FAULTS FO menu This menu has two sub menus ACTIVE FAULTS F1and FAULT HISTORY F2 Use the arrow keys to access the desired menu If the drive is faulted ACTIVE FAULTS will display the present fault FAULT HIS TORY will display faults that occurred previously MeE The followingis a list of detected drive faults Listed after each fault is a description of what the fault is and a suggested corrective action Table 3 6 HPV 900 Drive Faults overcurrent Fault Description Corrective Action AtoD Fault Control board analog to Cycle power to controller and see if fault clears If not replace digital converter not Control board responding Brake Alarm Dynamic brake resistor Confirm motor data correctly entered into drive braking resis tance connected and sized correctly and c
126. ERE E UP TR 3 91 High Speed Adjust Magnetek DSD 412 20 ec cee ene ene eenes 3 92 Cur A 5 sb nen Fake R re tei Ebes di QqbqididivtoEkhi kei isddddX RA eke 3 92 Luo Pu SEE eedan VAS RuAF EE Rd EY RAP RERUR dba eibi dd dace c a a eR d o 3 93 S Ourve Pattem AIS 2 4 Vr E adds irte dki ker EEA TR RRRRS xa 3 93 INT DOLI 85 OCEE TERNOS REC EETISEPEPCERC UA End CPU EE Es 3 93 Acceleration Deceleration Pots 1 olece seas erra habra E RRR RAE Ra RR ERR es 3 94 OVE PUES da ka er ees 345 x25 9946 05 9339 x49 EdEE EE EA erba E FOE 3 94 Dead Zone Pattern Ramp ok eee 0 ab ERA RRRVAYEAREddENqaS E CRAP dd EE ERE 3 94 Final SIUE et So ok 4h CERES ERRARE EOE ER KEE RE RE EVER EE 3 94 Normal Speed Learn Operation c eeseeeeeeeeeeeee eene 3 98 Section 4 Release to Normal Operation I this Section ua enano OC AGRO AGER ORS ER RODA EROR CR ERR RN 4 1 Limit Board Adjustment eeclesie n nn 4 2 Gmi Bod IUD o oy ko 3 6 os aw 8 SEEK SE Er EIIN rAr 4 3 Input EOS cad aded RE rd d EE FREE ER Eel RE RR PST CREE RR REESE 4 4 Diagios cand Mode LEDS iius 04 6044 SEES AA TERR CERE E ad 4 5 Operation Inspection Setup Before High Speed 0 c ccc cee eens 4 7 Operation Normal Setup High Speed iiaass rr ashoor a RR ERE EE R 4 7 Gperaton TIOIISOL ears iX CERRADA ERR AER REOOCROCEOR ELLO TS REOR RC CA 4 8 2k EC CS ot cee ec cannes TT PE P 4 9 Parameter PIII LosLecoosauxe uinen gs ERE RE EERRRAPPERG QE MAREM
127. F 3 The reset switch is typ ey G es SRE Seismic Reset Switch ically a momentary EXTI contact pushbutton Counterweight position switch 4 Counterweight position switch E sasssa erornnamen _ POS switch is closed when the car is EE above the counterweights Pun SAL Seismic Activity Light 0 erremammmomnn eneren tee t eeaeee l SAL 23 24 O O EXTI EXTI AF AF 2 38 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Car to Group Wiring Car to Group Wiring Car controllers communicate with the group dispatcher through high speed twisted pair net work connections Communication cables white shielded wire between the cars and the dis patcher should be run in a separate pipe from all other signal wiring When a car is part of a group an additional circuit board the Gateway board is used In most applications a Gateway board is mounted in each car cabinet In some jurisdictions NYCHA for example all Gateway boards for all cars in a group are mounted in the group dispatcher cabinet In both instances drawings in the job drawing package detail the appropriate connec tions The following drawings provide examples of both types of interconnection Figure 2 17 Car Group Communication Standard Implementation DISPATCHER N1 N2 SHLD PW5 Board Shielded Twisted Pair shield connected at one end only Alternatively a separate Gateway Board twisted pair may be used for PW5
128. F followed by a 2 or 3 digit number For example F 910 indicates a blown fuse There are two 2 error logs within the drive Parameter 800 contains a list of the last 16 faults that occurred This list is constantly updated with the newest error overwriting the oldest The list is stored on NVRAM and is never cleared Errors on this list could be from the first time the drive was powered up It is a continuous list constantly updated Parameter 0 also contains a list of the last 16 faults that occurred This list is also con stantly updated with the newest error overwriting the oldest However this list can be cleared To view or dear this error list do the following Use the arrow keys to scroll to Parameter 0 Press DATA FCTN key The first entry is ALL Press ENT to clear all the errors in the list Use arrow keys to scroll past the ALL entry to viewthe error list The first error after ALL is the latest error Press the ENT key to clear that particular error The end of the list will be indicated by END For a more complete description of Parameters 800 amp 0 refer to the Magnetek Technical Manual _Contents Index _MCE Web 3 91 Startup amp Drive Adjustment PA eE High Speed Adjust Magnetek DSD 412 Car Balancing In order for the drive to perform properly and be set up correctly the car needs to be properly balanced Geared cars are typically balanced with
129. HHU Basics The Hand Held Unit is used to set up and trouble shoot the controller It provides user access to system parameters status and error information Connection The Hand Held Unit plugs into any I O 24 board in the elevator controller using a simple telephone jack connector If the installation includes a cartop or car station the Hand Held Unit may also be con nected to boards in these enclosures Ifthe installation includes a dispatcher controlling multiple cars the Hand Held Unit provides dis patcher access when plugged into an I O 24 in the dispatcher enclosure 5 2 Manual 42 02 2TOO HHU Basics Operation Functions are arranged under a series of menus submenus and function screens The top line of the display indicates the currently active menu Moving within the Current Menu To move within the current menu down through submenus or back up to the current menu use The 2 and 8 keys or the Up Down arrow keys Moving Between Submenus Thesubmenu is displayed on the second line of the display To move between sub menus use the 4 and 6 keys or the Left and Right arrow keys A Ba l Y Activating a Submenu To select the submenu to be the currently active menu or to select a displayed function screen from an active submenu press the key or the 8 key while the desired submenu is displayed Think of the key as an ENTER key OR with submenu selected After you select a su
130. HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open Loop MeE for a defined multistep speed com mand Zero Speed Level Threshold for zero speed logic out 0 99 99 25 00 1 00 put Zero Speed Time Time before zero speed logic output sec 0 9 99 0 10 0 10 is declared true Up Dwn Threshold Threshold for detection of up or 96 0 9 99 1 00 1 00 down direction Mtr Torque Limit Motoring torque limit 96 0 250 0 200 0 200 0 Regen Torq Limit Regenerating torque limit 96 0 250 0 200 0 200 0 Flux Wkn Factor Defines torque limit at higher speeds 96 60 0 100 0 100 0 100 Ana Out 1 Offset Subtracts an effective voltage to 99 9 99 9 0 00 0 00 actual analog output 1 Ana Out 2 Offset Subtracts an effective voltage to 99 9 99 9 0 00 0 00 actual analog output 2 Ana Out 1 Gain Scaling factor for analog output 1 0 10 0 1 0 1 0 Ana Out 2 Gain Scaling factor for analog output 2 0 10 0 1 0 1 0 Fit Reset Delay Time Before a fault is automatically sec 0 120 5 5 reset Fit Reset Hour Number of faults allowed to be auto faults 10 10 3 3 matically reset per hour Up to SPD Level Logic output function is true when 0 110 00 80 00 080 00 motor speed is above user specified speed defined by this parameter Mains DIP Speed When enabled by Main DIP Speed 96 5 99 9 25 00 25 00 A1 parameter speed is reduced by this percent when a UV alarm
131. HZ Setting parameter 4 to 55HZ will give the drive some headroom to regulate the speed of the car at high speed Running the car with full load the drive should regulate the high speed and final leveling speed quite closely after you have adjusted the gain as described below If you need more than 60HZ at high speed raise parameters 1 and 3 they are the limits for the drive 1 The drive normally requires S curve parameter 29 to be set to a 1 as the control may be bumpy with sharp changes to the pattern profile 2 Parameter 89 defines the gain of the vector control which acts like any typical closed loop gain control To change parameter 89 disable write protect by setting parameter 77 to 801 Parameter 89 is factory set to 100 Increasing the gain will increase the speed control precision and decreasing it will make the car more stable To find the optimal gain for the installation do the following 3 Putfullloadin the car 4 Observe car speeds and slowdown times in the up and down directions If they are sig nificantly different additional gain will reduce the difference If the car oscillates or overshoots significantly the gain is set too high 5 Ifno gain setting seems to improve the car up and down symmetry verify counterweight balance Also verify the slowdown distances Remember that the TRICON controller ini tiates slowdown when it ENTERS the slowdown magnet Contents Index _MCE Web 3 83 Startup amp Drive A
132. Hall call mini 0 25 5 5 sec Minimum time door will remain fully opened mum time when opened for a hall call Time cannot be reduced by electric eye or door close button 32 Rdoor Hall and car call 0 25 5 10 lsec Maximum time doors will stay fully opened door maximum time due to hall or combination hall and car call 33 Rdoor Number of door 0 255 5 each If rear door cannot close it will retry as failure cycles before many times as set here after which it will retry wait stop for the time set in the retry wait time parameter then start the cycle again If set to zero doors will keep trying indefinitely 34 Rdoor Wait time before 0 255 60 sec Time the rear doors will sit idle before retry recycling doors again ing the last operation 35 Parameter 35 0 255 0 each 36 Rdoor Preopen rear yes no no yes no When this flag is set the doors will start to door in the inner door open when the slowing car reaches the inner zone door zone 37 Rdoor Rear door hall yes no no yes no Set to Yes if door is swing type with manu doors are swing type ally operated hall doors 38 RDoor Door 0 10 JO each Sets door and door operator type 1 Peelle 0 standard manual or automatic 2 Peele with OL 1 Peelle freight doors w o open limit 3 Courion 2 Peelle freight doors with open limit 3 Courion freight doors 39 Parameter 39 0 255 fO each 5 40 Manual 42 02 2T00 Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen Main Menu
133. IHORERERT RYE RUPES IDERUFLS IEEE CS 19 LOD UOO DUE cao 22433499324 YE EE heheh AFER E eee II Re UP EE 1 10 Car Staion quas aoo de AOROCR ACIE ERAGE AES EER ACER we EEE CORO e 1 10 Dispatcher Lolo ER ERREUR ARRA CRUCE ORDRE ye er ee ee ee 1 11 Dispatcher Circuit os dau al eh Y Ue Rd OCCORRE 1 11 Hand Held Unit HHU 5 6xsc0 sds 696 4644 809s Ko ROR RHR SEEDER EDR HOR RRS 1 12 HHU Dispatcher Board Connection Optional 0 ccc cee cee eee ees 1 13 Control ParamelerS isnt ak RREXARERRERRXRREREXARERRATRATERERATRATE 1 13 Operating Modes iiuououss ERR RRRWRRRREARAVAWAFRASTVRAWECTAEAAZENAVAVKIVEX 1 14 Dunn LM cciisnibgetreoBP ese hak DUET PEL EIU OA ees IP E EET EEIeE 1 14 Controller IIODOCDON oiu 55 s ERE RR REGERE ORA ERROR OLEO UPEOR CR HERES 1 14 Car Top DROPPED ua hor REC Nae TRE LIRE FR E e ann Rude dd acea 1 14 a TUSDODDDNL ida aca oda eee dh ES ER ACA ERR Ea a do de a o 1 14 Cur HC Za 443 on bara dca Cada eR EP EK RIOSU PETERE EX RONAN Prsd 1 15 Running the Car From the Hand Held 12 2224 ex RE ERE AREAS 1 15 Set ng Up Car Sale ss cheb vid A REGERE trias EI E ERE DER a 1 15 IDOL La aqaa oae ea dE ded dp E Re e CEDE or WR Ra ed Eo doa 1 15 Lar Door ODGO is dh QAAE Gand pbi eR ER esed UPPER QEES SudEeP Pd dE SSeS 1 16 HORE ele oed pt RESOURCE HERE UA GEO ees 1 16 Emergency Power Operation 1cicocuaouaki se Rubzaexch usnkRbeSaRRi sR4 Wu e d Ead 1 16 os ou 2 0 NN 1 16 Software Required ok oh bb aa soe eaddoes esse eed ents E EERR
134. ILURE TOC inspection inputs do not agree 6 In car input fail IN CAR FAIL In car inspection inputs do not agree ure 7 Access failure ACCESS FAIL Access inspection inputs do not agree 8 Control failure CONTROL FAIL Controller inspection inputs do not agree 3 Services 1 0 Init 1 Normal Automatic 2 Fire Fire System is in fire service 3 Inspection Inspection System is in inspection 4 Doors disabled Door disable Car doors are prevented from opening from the controller switch 5 State 5 State 5 6 Code Blue Code Blue Code Blue cardiac arrest hospital service from priority hall riser 7 Hospital emer Hosp Emerg Operation of car by staff under hospital gency emergency rules 8 Control board CTRL BRD COMM Cannot communicate with CTRL board comm loss LOSS 9 Car top board CAR TOP COMM Cannot communicate with CAR TOP board comm loss 10 Car station board CSTA COMM LOSS Lost contact with the car station board comm loss 5 7 Tricon Configuration MeE Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 282 and HHU Version 6 262 03 07 11 Car MG switch Car MG sw The car MG switch has been operated The car will not restart and the doors will open if in the door zone 12 Lobby MG switch Lobby MG sw The MG switch at the lobby has been oper ated The car will not restart and will close the doors 13 Canada board CAN COMM LOSS Lost contact with EXT 1 board com
135. IN VOLTS Reset the SPEED COMMAND 3 A3 parameter to 45 feet per minute or the desired inspection speed Contents Index _MCE Web 3 19 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Nes Speed Curve Setting and Adjustment The Magnetek HPV 600 drive has an internal speed curve algorithm that controls acceleration deceleration and jerk rates There are four independently selectable speed curves This system uses only the first Preliminary setting of speed curve parameters was done in the drive programming section The values entered at that time are designed to be somewhat aggressive to ensure that the car does not overshoot the floors but rather comes in slow This will prevent the car from running into the pit or the overhead until the final values for the speed curve are entered 1 2 Place a balanced load in the car Disable the doors and place a car call two floors away from the present position of the car one floor away if the car speed is 200 feet per minute or less Keep the elevator away from the terminal floors at this time 3 10 11 While the car is running monitor car speed with a hand tach It should be running at contract speed 596 If not adjust CONTRACT MTR SPEED A1to obtain the cor rect speed Observe deceleration as the car approaches the floor The car should decelerate rapidly and there should be two noticeable steps of speed prior to stopping at the floor If there are not confirm that the t
136. If less than 200 ft min set to cars rated speed If the car is rated for a speed greater than 200 ft min set to 200 ft min Ifthe cars rated speed is greater than 200 ft min go to the SPEED COMMAND 8 parameter 7 Set SPEED COMMAND 8 to contract speed Remaining Multistep Ref A3 sub menu parameters are not used UR WNP D 1 Access the Power Convert A4 sub menu 2 INPUT L L VOLTS parameter Input line voltage This value is used by the drive to declare a low line voltage fault Set to the nominal AC voltage at the input to the drive 3 Goto sub menu Motor A5 4 MOTOR ID To obtain this value determine the motor speed at the rated excitation frequency without any slip The formula is 120 Rated Frequency No Slip Motor RPM If you cannot determine motor speed with zero slip take the motor nameplate RPM and use it in the formula Round the number up to the nearest even whole number to determine motor poles If the motor has a synchronous no slip speed of 900 or 1200 RPM set this parameter to 6 POLE DFLT If the motor has a synchronous speed of 1800 RPM set this parameter to 4 POLE DFLT 5 RATED MTR PWR Rated motor horsepower or kilowatts Set to the value on the motor nameplate 6 RATED MTR VOLTS Rated motor voltage Set to the value from the motor name plate 7 RATED EXCIT FREQ Frequency at which the motor is excited to obtain motor nameplate rated RPM Typically this is 60 Hz Set to the value from the
137. LED DS25 will blink slowly once per second 2K Limit Gripper Fault I dentification Table ID Fault No Tights No fault Overspeed up Overspeed down Overspeed at HUSL MPU 2 V2 xx Overspeed at terminal up MPU 2 V3 xx Overspeed at USL MPU 2 V2 xx Overspeed in DZ up MPU 2 V3 xx Overspeed at HDSL MPU 2 V2 xx Overspeed at terminal down MPU 2 V3 xx Overspeed at DSL MPU 2 V2 xx Overspeed in DZ down MPU 2 V3 xx Direction Failure e of SJ oy ui AT WN el o o Inspection Failure Up Inspection Failure Down Stall Failure Up m m Stall Failure Down m N No Demand Failure Up m w No Demand Failure Down H vj A Bypass Locks Failure Limit Relay Contact Failure m Oo Gripper Unintended Movement m N Gripper Governor Overspeed m Gripper Limit Overspeed 19 Gripper Relay Contact Failure DZ up is the door zone of the top landing DZ down is the door zone of the bottom landing Press S1 momentarily to display a count of the total number of faults that have occurred since the last time faults were cleared Press S1 for 7 seconds to reset the fault counter Reset Limit Section Safety Press S2 momentarily Rope Gripper Reset Press S3 momentarily 4 18 Manual 42 02 2TOO The last detected fault is displayed on LEDs DS17 through DS21 as a binary value The values of each lighted LED are
138. M Sel Terminal AM Monitor Selection 1 99 2 2 2 Output Freq H4 05 Terminal AM Sets terminal AM output voltage in percent of 96 0 0 100 0 100 0 Gain 10Vdc when selected monitor is at 10096 out 1000 0 H4 06 Terminal AM Bias Sets terminal FM output voltage in percent of 96 110 0to 0 0 0 0 10Vdc when selected monitor is at 096 output 110 0 H4 07 AO Level Select Selects the signal level of terminal FM 0 2 0 0 1 0 Oto 10Vdc 1 10 to 10V 2 4to 20mA H4 08 AO Level Select Selects the signal level of terminal AM 0 2 0 0 2 0 Oto 10Vdc 1 10 to 10V 2 4to 20mA Motor Overload L1 01 MOL Fault Select Motor Overload Protection Selection OL1 0 3 2 2 0 Disabled 2 Blower Cooled 1 Fan Cooled 3 Vector Motor L1 02 MOL Time Const Motor Overload Protection Time min 0 1 20 0 11 0 1 0 Power Loss Ridethrough L2 01 PwrL Selection Momentary power loss ridethrough selection 0 2 0 0 0 Disabled 1 Ridethrough for time set in L2 02 2 Ridethrough while CPU has power L2 02 PwrL RideThrough t Momentary Power Loss RideThrough Time sec 0 0 25 5 2 0 2 0 L2 03 PwrL Baseblock t Momentary Pwr Loss Minimum Base Block Time sec 0 1 5 0 0 7 0 7 3 72 Manual 42 02 2T00 Yaskawa F7 Drive Stall Prevention L3 01 StallP Accel Sel Stall Prevention Selection During Acceleration 0 2 1 1 N A to Flux Vector 0
139. MCE with any questions you may have Depending on the job the Tricon system may include Controller Configured according to customer job survey Cartop station Interface interconnect control box between car mounted equipment and the car controller Cartop junction box Some jurisdictions require that components normally mounted inside the Car top station be in the controller cabinet instead In these instances a smaller car top junction box is used in place of the car top station Car station Optional car operating panel to cartop interface Group Dispatcher Dispatching components may be installed in a separate cabinet or in one of the car controller cabinets Hand Held Unit The HHU is a hand held programming and diagnostic tool that plugs into the Tricon serial communications stream using a simple telephone style plug Specifications Performance up to 300 feet per minute Upto 32 single or double openings Up to 6 cars in a control group Extensive field programmability 1 1 Tricon General I nformation Car Controller Tricon controllers may be ordered in ASME A17 1 2000 or other compliance versions Tricon is compatible with drives including Magnetek HPV 600 AC vector drive Magnetek HPV 900 AC vector drive Yaskawa F7 AC vector drive Mitsubishi A500 AC drive Magnetek DSD412 DC drive Tricon may use open or closed loop control A typical Tricon controller with an AC dri
140. MeE Motion Control Engineering Inc 11380 White Rock Road Rancho Cordova CA 95742 voice 916 463 9200 fax 916 463 9201 WWW mceinc com Tricon Controller Installation amp Adjustment Magnetek HPV 600 Drive Magnetek HPV 900 Drive Yaskawa F7 Drive Mitsubishi A500 Drive Magnetek DSD 412 DC Drive V6 2x Software Manual 42 02 2T00 Rev F4 October 2009 Copyright 2009 Motion Control Engineering All Rights Reserved This document may not be reproduced electronically or mechanically in whole or in part without written permission from Motion Control Engineering Trademarks All trademarks or registered product names appearing in this document are the exclusive property of the respective owners Warning and Disclaimer Although every effort has been made to make this document as complete and accurate as possible Motion Control Engineering and the document authors publishers distributors and representatives have neither liability nor responsibility for any loss or damage arising from information contained in this document or from informational errors or omissions Information contained in this document shall not be deemed to constitute a commitment to provide service equipment or software by Motion Control Engineering or the document authors publishers distributors or representatives Limited Warranty Motion Control Engineering manufacturer warrants its products for a period of 15 months from the date of shi
141. N Leo7 MS ran Len 16 one Analog Speed Reference IN LEDs IBI HS Can MS LED 17 INSPECTION MODE Q Speed Ref In LED9 BI DZBP Hs Speed Ref In ON Normal io second FKE ped Analog Speed Reference OUT 1 8 Second Flash LEARN MODE Speed Ref Out Numbers FPM x 100 X Speed Ref Out A 1000 B 1100 C 1200 51 Reset D 1300 E 1400 F 1500 Adds 30 pae RO Enables LEARN MODE N LED27 IBI To RB Board S2 Flashing Board Failure IP1 Board Power IP2 110 VAC AUX SAFETY INPUT COMMON To RB Board GND 1 L To Safety Circuit on relays section 4 4 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Limit Board Adjustment USL Up slow down This input is the last up slowdown to open prior to reaching the top landing The hoistway switch must be adjusted to open at the same time the normal selec tor slowdown magnet comes on HUSL Up High Speed Slow Down This input is the first up slowdown to open prior to reaching the top landing This slowdown is used only on cars with contract speeds greater than 200FPM DSL Down slow down This input is the last down slowdown prior to reaching the bot tom landing This input should be on when the car is above it and the DN down input is on HDSL Down High Speed Slow Down This slowdown is present on higher speed cars and is further away from the bottom landing than DSL This input sh
142. POLE Down slowdown High speed slowdown minus 6 Slowdown inches distance minus 6 inches Floor level Slowdown distance minus 6 inches High speed slowdown minus 6 inches Up slowdown 2 34 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Completing I nstallation High Speed Operation Front amp Rear Doors When a car has both front and rear doors two additional magnets are required per floor Front door zone magnet For each floor a front door zone magnet is placed in tape row 1 immediately to the left of the floor level magnet Rear door zone magnet For each floor a rear door zone magnet is placed in tape row 3 immediately to the right of the floor level magnet Slowdown and Leveling magnets are NORTH POLE Door zone magnets are SOUTH POLE Down slowdown High speed slowdown minus 6 Slowdown inches distance minus 6 inches Front door zone Floor level Slowdown distance minus 6 Rear door zone inches High speed slowdown minus 6 inches Up slowdown 1 Install a door zone magnet for each door opening in its corresponding location If there are two openings at a floor install both door zone magnets Door zone magnets are SOUTH POLE Used ONLY on jobs with Front AND Rear open ings Landing System Cabling Wirethe cartop interconnect box as described in your job prints Relay outputs are dry contact 1 amp N O Contents Index _MCE Web 2 35
143. ROF AL 6 A1 6 AL 7 Al 7 Gate bypass monitor GBM AL 8 A1 8 Lock bypass monitor LBM BL 1 B1 1 Access top zone limit ATUL BL 2 B1 2 Access top zone up button ATUS BL 3 B1 3 Access top zone down button ATDS BL 4 B1 4 Access bottom zone limit ABUL BL 5 B1 5 Access bottom zone up button ABUS BL 6 B1 6 Access bottom zone down button ABDS BL 7 B1 7 Access top monitor ATM BL 8 B1 8 Access bottom monitor ABM CL 1 C1 1 Displacement switch CWS CL 2 C1 2 Seismic switch SAS CL 3 C1 3 Seismic reset switch SRE CL 4 C1 4 Counterweight position switch POS CL 5 C1 5 CL 6 C1 6 CL 7 C1 7 CL 8 C1 8 Peelle door open contact X15 16 DOL 5 36 Manual 42 02 2100 Contents Index _MCE Web Table 5 17 Extension Board EXT1 N Output Examples A17 1 2000 Main Menus Extension Board Outputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AF 25 AF26 A3 1 to A3 2 Door locks bypass enable DLB AF 17 AF 18 A2 1 to A2 2 Car gate bypass enable GBY AF 27 AF 28 A3 3to A3 4 Ropegripperresetl RGRi AF 19 AF20 A2 3 to A2 4 Rope gripper reset 2 RGR2 AF 29 AF30 A3 5 to A3 6 Out of service indicator OSV AF 21 AF 22 A2 5 to A2 6 Fire recall switch ON indicator FONI AF 31 AF 32 A3 7 to A3 8 Fire OFF switch ON indicator FOFI AF 23 AF 24 A2 7 to A2 8 Seismic indicator SAL BF 25 BF 26 B3 1 to B3 2 BF 17 BF 18 B2 1 to B2 2 BF27 BF 28 B3 3 to B3 4 BF 19 BF 20 B2 3toB2 4
144. The brake will not pick if this parameter is set to Yes and there is no hardware installed 90 Brake Flag 1 yes no no yes no 5 43 Tricon Configuration Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen MeE 91 Brake Parameter 1 0 255 JO each 92 Field Speed at which 0 2000 1000 fpm Speed at which the field weakens the motor field weakens 93 Field Time before drop 0 25 5 2 5 sec Time to apply full field before dropping to ping from full to run run field strength field 94 Field Time field is held O 25 5 2 5 sec Time the field is held high after the car high after the car stops stops 95 Field Time to reach full 0 25 5 O sec Time to reach full motor field motor field 96 Field Relays proving 0 25 5 1 sec The controller will check if the relays have delay dropped after the car has stopped com Ozdisabled pletely and this timer expires RSEQ input should turn ON before this time has elapsed 97 MG Time Wye stays ON 0 25 5 3 5 sec Time the start Wye contactor will stay ON before run contractor before the run contactor turns ON turns ON 98 MG Time MG stays ON 0 255 6 min Time the MG keeps running even if the car after car stops Auto has no direction A time of zero will keep the matic mode MG running indefinitely 99 MG Time MG stays ON 0 255 6 min Time the MG will keep running even if the after car stops Inspec car h
145. Too Many Consecutive Drive Faults The drive incurred too many consecutive faults Floor Top Final Limit Operated Top final limit operated Floor Up Leveling Timeout Timed out while leveling in the up direction Floor Up Limit Slowdown Slowdown initiated by limits in the up direction Floor Up Normal Terminal Up normal terminal stopped the car Floor Up Releveling Timeout Timed out while re leveling in the up direction Floor Up Run Timeout Up run timeout Floor Up Slowdown Timeout Up slowdown timeout Floor Up and Down slowdowns opened at the same time No parameter Contents inde _MCE Web 5 21 Tricon Configuration Input amp Outputs Field inputs and outputs are physically connected to pluggable connectors on I O 24 circuit boards inside the Tricon control cabinet The I O tables in this section are ANSI A17 1 2000 examples The actual input output configuration for your job may be different Please refer to the document drawings package accompanying a job for I O tables specific to that job Controller Board Car Top Board CarStation Board Hall Board Dispatcher Hall Board Dispatcher EP Hall Board Extension 1 Board When used as Hall Car Station or Dispatcher Hall boards multiple I O 24 boards may be employed typically but not always stacked one above the other When this is the case the first board has only the base label i e Hall the second is labeled and numbered 2 the third
146. ach After doing this scale the car speed on inspection before moving the car at high speed The regulator has a limited voltage output The output voltage GF1 GF2 is 1 4 times the AC from the transformer secondary You may have to increase the transformer tap to a higher voltage Normal Terminal Stopping NTS Test This procedure will test operation of the Normal Terminal Stopping NTS system 1 Remove the car from service 2 Turn the Door Disconnect switch OFF at the controller This allows the car to answer car calls without responding to hall calls All newly registered car calls will be answered with normal operation 3 Add one floor to the Floor Table Please refer to Floor Table on page 5 50 Top Floor Test Procedure 1 Access the Parking Floor parameter 141 in the Setup Parameters menu 2 Set to the newly entered value for the top floor Step 2 commands the car to run to a floor beyond its limit of travel When the car passes the slowdown switch in the hoistway it will immediately start to slow down and will level and stop at the terminal floor Bottom Floor Test Procedure With the car at the top floor and an additional floor in the floor table the controller will believe the car is one floor higher than it actually is 1 Access the Parking Floor parameter 141 in the Setup Parameters menu 2 Setto01 Step 2 commands the car to run to a floor beyond its limit of travel When the car passes the slowdo
147. ade the drive perform in all of the previous modes are you ready to run in the higher performance modes 1 or 2 If you observe unusual drive operation in this mode refer to the section below If a 1ora2is selected for parameter 370 the A500 drive will be in closed loop vector mode and must be properly tuned with a constant torque motor selected for the motor type parameter 71 and must be auto tuned with motion parameter 96 101 If auto tuningis not performed prop erly the drive will not operate in the vector mode Remember that the encoder board must not be installed when you perform an auto tune If a 10r a 2 is selected for parameter 370 parameter 22 now becomes the torque limit of the motor not the drive This torque limit has a range of 0 300 and should be set to 250 Ifa 10r a 2 is selected for parameter 370 the drive will ignore parameter 367 and try to follow the encoder feedback as closely as possible This may be a problem during acceleration and deceleration where the inertia of the car can cause the drive to over and under shoot the desired speed In a effort to correct itself excessive output can lead to a bumpy ride Setting parameter 370 to a 2 allows access to gain parameters 372 and 373 They can be used to smooth the ride See the explanation of the parameters below Contents Index _MCE Web 3 85 Startup amp Drive Adjustment PA eE Gain Parameters Adjustment When parameter 370 is in mode 2 ga
148. ain Chng Level Speed level to change to low gain 96 0 100 0 100 0 mode with internal gain switch Tach Rate Gain Helps with rope resonance issues 96 0 30 0 0 0 Spd Phase Margin Sets phase margin of speed regulator o 45 90 80 80 with PI speed regulator Ramped Stop Time to ramp from rated torque to sec 0 2 50 0 20 0 20 Time zero with torque ramp down stop function Contact Flt Time Time before contactor fault is declared sec 0 10 5 00 0 50 0 80 Brake Pick Time Time before brake pick fault declared sec 0 5 00 0 00 1 0 3 46 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive Table 3 5 HPV 900 Drive Parameters Brake Hold Time Time before brake hold fault declared sec 0 5 00 0 00 0 20 Overspeed Level Overspeed fault detection threshold 100 0 150 0 125 0 115 Overspeed Time Time before overspeed fault declared sec 0 9 99 1 00 1 00 Overspeed Mult Multiplier for overspeed test 100 150 100 125 Encoder Pulses Encoder counts per revolution ppr 600 10000 1024 1024 Spd Dev Lo Level Range around speed reference for 96 00 1 10 0 10 20 speed deviation low logic output Spd Dev Time Time before speed deviation low logic sec 0 9 99 1 00 0 5 output is true Spd DevHi Level Level for declaring speed deviation 96 0 99 9 20 0 20 0 alarm Spd Command Subtracts an effective voltage to volts 0
149. ain Menu level Pressing the Enter key while at the Sub Menu level moves the programmer into the Entry level to modify the displayed parameter At the Entry level the left and right arrows move a cursor to highlight data When a digit is highlighted pressing the up arrow will increase the value and pressing the down arrow will decrease it Pressing the Enter key will save the value displayed on the programmer Pressing the Escape key will move the programmer back to the Sub Menu level Contents dex _MCE Web 33 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Nes Parameter Settings Check the following to confirm correct settings for your application Note that many parameters are not listed because their default values will not need to be modified or they are not used in this application Adjust AO Menu 1 Gotothesub menu Drive A1 2 CONTRACT CAR SPD This is the rated contract speed of the car Set to the speed in feet per minute for which the car is rated 3 CONTRACT MTR SPD Set to the motor RPM that will make the car run at contract speed This is not the data from the motor nameplate It programs the speed at which the drive will run the motor when the car is at contract speed Go to the S Curves A2 sub menu ACCEL RATE 0 Desired acceleration rate Set to 2 5 ft 2 DECEL RATE 0 Desired deceleration rate Set to 4 0 ft s ACCEL J ERK IN 0 Desired initial jerk rate Set to 3 0 ft s ACCEL J ERK OUT 0 Desired jerk rate when
150. ains DIP Speed When enabled by Main DIP Speed 96 5 99 9 25 00 25 00 A1 parameter speed is reduced by this percent when a UV alarm low voltage is declared Run Delay Timer Delays drive recognition of RUN sig sec 0 00 0 99 0 00 0 10 nal AB Zero Spd Lev Auto Brake Function N A to MCE 96 0 00 2 00 0 00 0 00 products AB Off Delay N A to MCE products sec 0 00 9 99 0 00 0 00 Contactor DO Dly N A to MCE products sec 0 00 5 00 0 00 0 00 3 47 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 5 HPV 900 Drive Parameters MeE 3 48 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web TRQ Lim Msg Dly Determines amount of time drive is in sec 0 50 10 00 0 50 2 00 torque limit before Hit Torque Limit message is displayed SER2 INSP SPD Defines serial mode 2 Inspection ft 0 100 30 30 only serial mode 2 min SER2 RS CRP SPD Defines creep speed used in rescue ft 0 100 10 10 mode min SER2 RS CPR Defines maximum time drive will con ft 0 100 180 180 Time tinue to run at rescue creep speed min serial mode 2 SER2 FLT TOL Defines maximum time that may sec 0 0 2 0 0 04 0 4 elapse between valid run time mes sages before a serial fault is declared only serial mode 2 Rollback Gain Ant rollback gain 1 99 1 1 Notch Filter Frq Notch Filter Center Frequency Hz 5 60 20 20 Notch Filt Depth Notch filter maximum a
151. ake may be required to control roll back This can be seen with a voltmeter on the output of the regulator Moving the car on inspection with all loads and direction starts observe the brake release as well as the start of the car Slowing the ACC 1 rate will release the brake when loop current is sufficient to hold the car without roll back Settings of the following controller parameters can be used to delay the brake lift if required Parameter 81 for normal operation starts Parameter 84 for Inspection starts Parameter 86 for releveling starts D N 2 44 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Running on Inspection Mode Brake Circuit For brake circuits that do not use a regulator follow these instructions RBL adjusts Lift Pick voltage RBD adjusts brake drop less resistance slower drop RBR adjusts Hold or Running voltage Figure 2 20 Brake Circuit From line fuses F1 F2 and F3 F1B F2B F3B white AC2 DBK brake rectifier RBR 100 ohms Brake 180 watts BRL Relevel 3 bi C2 C2 C2 C2 BK 100 ohms Single phase 180 watts rectifier Three phase rectifier Adjust for hold voltage orange brown Sample resistor box layout If the sample brake resistor locations do not match your system consult your job prints for the correct location Contents Index _MCE Web 2 45 Installation Nes 1 Checkthatthe brake coil has been properly connected to the controller 2 Ru
152. all or Car Top board Hall pos ind Floor 3 O type Terminal board outputs Car station ind Floor 2 Floors are typically programmed according to the following table Table 5 24 PI Programming Using CE Light Duty Driver Car top or Hall board Floor Entry Other Characters Entry Other Characters Entry 1 32 1 32 Blank 0 XX 46 B 33 LL 47 B1 34 L1 48 B2 35 L2 49 B3 36 G 50 L 37 GR 51 PH 38 R 52 M 39 SB 53 P1 40 GF 54 P2 41 P3 55 C 42 1R 56 MZ 43 Gl 57 X 44 G2 58 EX 45 G3 59 5 60 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Main Menus PI Board Setup View amp Edit This menu allows you to program PI boards PI boards allow flexible programmable enabling of up to 24 outputs three groups of 8 outputs each on a per floor basis Typically one group of outputs is used to drive hall mounted position indicators while the two remaining groups are used to drive directional arrows and hall lanterns or gongs PI boards are I O 24 boards with special position indicator software and up to three O type Ter minal boards Terminal boards may be programmed so that each activates a single output per floor output per floor lamp or so that each activates a combination of its outputs per floor digital indicators If required multiple PI boards can be used on the car network Each PI board stores its own configuration information Each system is factory co
153. all phase cur rents exceeded 5096 of rated drive amperage Disconnect motor from drive Cycle drive power If problem clears possible bad motor or wiring If problem does not clear possible bad grounding of system or bad drive Hit Torque Limit Measured current equal to or greater than torque limit setting Verify car is balanced correctly Verify motor and drive sizing Can be delayed by increasing value of TRQ LIM MSG DLY A1 Mtr id Fault Mtr Data Fault Invalid motor parame ters Check all drive parameters Cycle drive power If fault recurs go to Utility menu and select Restore Defaults If fault per sists replace Control board Note Restore Defaults will require all drive parameters be set to their correct values Mtr Overload Overcurr Fault Motor has exceeded the motor overload curve Phase current exceeded 25096 of rated current Verify correct balancing of car Check for dragging brake or mechanical bind in machine or hoistway Verify OVLD START LEVEL A1 and OVLD TI ME OUT A1 Check for bad motor Verify car balanced correctly Verify motor and drive sizing Check for bad motor connection Check for bad main contactor contacts Check for mechanical bind in car or machine Overspeed Fault Motor speed exceeded user entered parame ters Check parameters OVERSPEED LEVEL A1 and OVERSPEED TI ME A1 If OK check tracking of motor to desired speed and tune regulator for better pe
154. ameter 98 Enter a value of 1 0 Press enter to save 20 The programmed values must now be saved to the drive non volatile RAM Access parameter 994 Press the DATA FCTN key The display will read rESt Press the up arrow The display will change to SAVE 21 On the upper right hand side of the drive you will find a small slide switch This switch is the NVRAM Protect switch S3 Flip this switch to the up position The red LED NV RAM NOT PROTECTED will illuminate 22 Press the ENTER key on the drive The display should now read 994 23 Flip the NVRAM Protect switch back to the down position The values are now saved bD D Contents Index _MCE Web 3 89 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Nes Self Tune The Magnetek DSD 412 digital DC drive has a self tuning feature that dynamically calculates the armature resistance and inductance This includes the choke and filter used in series with the armature It also measures the motor field resistance and inductance The self tune procedure will learn the motor and store the values in parameters 613 614 and 615 The following assumes you have read the drive manual and understand how to use the parameter unit Motor fields must be at full field current during self tune Display parameter 612 must be the same as parameter 50 Check by running on inspection Motor field fault will result if parame ter 612 is less than parameter 50 during self tune L e wN o
155. ameter is LOG IN 1TB1 16 Set to DRIVE ENABLE LOG IN 2 TB1 17 Set to RUN LOG IN 3 TB1 18 Set to FAULT RESET LOG IN 4 TB1 19 Set to STEP REF BO LOG IN 5 TB1 20 Set to STEP REF B1 LOG IN 6 TB1 21 Set to STEP REF B2 LOG IN 7 TB1 22 Setto STEP REF B3 LOG IN 8 TB1 23 Set to UP DWN LOG IN 9 TB1 24 Set to CONTACT CFIRM Access the Logic Outputs C3 sub menu The first parameter is LOG OUT 1TB1 5 Set to CLOSE CONTACT 11 LOG OUT 2 TB1 7 Set to READY TO RUN 12 LOG OUT 3 TB1 9 Set to SPEED REG RIS 13 LOG OUT 4 TB1 11 Set to SPEED REG RLS 14 RELAY COIL 1 Set to READY TO RUN pana Fr whd e The HPV900 drive is now correctly configured Contents Index _MCE Web 3 45 Startup amp Drive Adjustment MeE Running the Car 1 Attempt to run the car up using the inspection up down buttons Hold the up button until the car starts to move If the motor moves in the down direction stop the car Using the programmer access the Configure CO menu Go to User Switches Cl and change parameter Motor Rotation from Forward to Reverse Again run the motor Confirm that the motor turns in the correct direction to move the car up or down Using the programmer access the Display D1 menu Monitor parameter Speed Ref erence Run the car in the down direction The speed reference displayed on the drive should be negative Using the inspection up button run the car in the up direction The speed reference shou
156. amples Floor Table 50 Parameter screen 73 Parameter setting mode 2K Limit Gripper 10 Parameter settings Construction operation 16 Parameters 38 Pattern Parameters 44 PI boards 61 PI Boards disconnecting when programming others 61 Plugging in the HHU 12 POS 22 Position Indicators 57 Power line fluctuation 5 Power up 9 Priorto Applying Power 41 Priority floor Group parking 74 PW55 Q Quick Start Up guide 1 R RB board 7 41 RBD 46 RBL 46 RBR 46 Reassignment penalty Group 74 Remote fire switch 79 Reset after limit fault 10 Reset Error 71 Reset fire status Group 74 Reset limit board 6 Reset limits after 5 consecutive trips 10 Reset rope gripper 2K Limit Gripper 11 Resetting a floor table 51 RFI 5 Rope Gripper 37 46 Rope gripper functionality 2K Limit Gripper 16 Rope Gripper overspeed in FPM 2K Limit Gripper 13 Run car with hand held unit 15 Running on Construction 18 Running the Car From the Hand Held 15 Index 3 S S1 S2 and S3 2K Limit Gripper 10 Safety 3 22 24 SAL 22 SAS 22 Second priority floor parking Group 74 Seismic Activity Light 22 Seismic Activity Switch 22 Seismic equipment install 38 Seismic Parameter 168 21 Seismic parameters 49 Seismic Reset 22 Sensor head installation 27 Setting door openings 51 Setting Hall Calls 51 Setting Openings 51 Signal Parameters 41 SLH board 8 Slowdown magnets 32 Smoke Detectors 30 32 34 79 Speed sensor for 2K j
157. an interface between the controller and car equip ment like leveling systems and door operators and a cartop control station for running the car on Inspection mode from the cartop The illustration to the right shows an exterior view of a typical cartop station The emergency stop inspection normal safety and directional control buttons are visible across the top The illustration below shows the layout of a typi cal cartop station interior Figure 1 4 Typical Cartop Station Layout CTOP board 5V PS M30024 landing system board Cartop Circuit Boards Like the controller the circuit boards in the cartop station might vary slightly from job to job depending upon customer needs CTOP board The I O 24 board configured with appropriate Terminal boards to handle the car operating panel interface 5V PS A five volt power supply to handle low voltage component needs M30024 Interface board for the SET 9000 cartop landing system Contents Index _MCE Web 1 9 Tricon General I nformation Ae Cartop J unction Box Some installations require that components typically mounted in the cartop station be located in the controller cabinet instead In these cases a smaller cartop interconnect box is used supporting only the landing system interface board A typical cartop junction box is shown to the right Car Station The car station is a semi custom addition to a user provided car operating panel The
158. annot open close or lock it will door failure cycles retry the operation as many times as set in before retry wait this parameter and then stop If this param eter is set to zero doors will retry indefi nitely 9 Front Door Wait time 0 255 60 sec Time the doors will sit idle before retrying before recycling doors the last operation again 10 Front Door Freight hold 0 255 JO sec When this time is set to a value other than time O feature disable zero and the car is not in Attendant mode the attendant Up and Down buttons will behave as Freight door hold front and rear respectively In Attendant mode these inputs will function normally This parameter applies to both front and rear doors 11 Front Door Pre open yes no no yes no The front door will start to open when the front door in inner door car reaches the inner door zone zone 12 Front Door Front hall yes no no yes no Use for swing door with manually operated doors are swing type hall door 13 Front Door Door Type 0 10 JO each Sets door and door operator type 1 Peelle 2 Peelle w OL 0 standard manual or automatic 3 Courion 1 Peelle freight doors w o open limit 2 Peelle freight doors with open limit 3 Courion freight doors 14 Freight door Auto open yes no no yes no When set to yes registered hall calls will on hall calls cause the door to open if so equipped If the car is used unattended set parameter to no to avoid having the car stopped with
159. ant operating modes Contents inde _MCE Web 5 47 Tricon Configuration Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen MeE 157 Lobby return Return 0 32 JO floor Determines lobby return floor A zero will floor disable lobby return feature 158 Lobby return Drop car yes no no yes no When set activation of the lobby return calls immediately switch will immediately drop all registered car calls 159 Lobby return Open 0 3 0 each When the car is returned to the lobby recall door once floor cycle the selected door s one time 0 no 1 front 2 rear 3 both 160 Lobby ret Hold doors 0 3 0 each When the car is returned to the lobby recall open floor open and hold open the selected O no door s 1 front 2 rear 3 both 161 Service set mode 0 3 0 each Set car to one of the following services Oznone normal op OzNormal operation 1 IND 1 Independent 2 DD 2 Door disconnect 3 FR 3 Fire recall 162 Enable redundant yes no no yes no When set to yes the inputs for car top and inspection check in car inspection are duplicated 163 Disable lockouts on yes no no yes no When set to Yes car call lockouts restricted independent and atten calls are ignored if the car is on Indepen dant dent or Attendant operation 164 Hydro Relevel only if yes no no yes no When set to Yes and a car has the doors out of door zone closed it will initiate a relevel only if it drifts beyo
160. ape reader is properly installed and the slowdown magnets are placed the correct distance from the floor Change DECEL RATE 0 A2 to 3 5 ft s This will yield a slower rate of deceleration and less approach distance to the floor Again run the car and observe the approach into the floor If the car still has too much slow down distance decrease DECEL RATE 0 A2 to 0 1 ft less than the present rate Repeat until the car is coming into the floor with about 3 to 6 inches of approach Modify DECEL J ERK IN 0 and DECEL J ERK OUT 0 to get a smooth approach into the floor with 1to 2 inches of sustained leveling If there is not enough sustained level ing the car may overshoot intermittently and cause releveling Modify the ACCEL J ERK OUT 0 rate to the same value entered into the DECEL JERKIN O0 parameter If the rated speed of the car is greater than 200 feet per minute make a one floor run Observe the approach into the floor on single floor runs If the approach is longer than the multi floor runs increase the SPEED COMMAND 4 A3 parameter until the approach on a one floor run is the same as the multi floor run If the approach is quicker decrease the SPEED COMMAND 4 A3 parameter until the approach on a one floor run is the same as the multi floor run The speed curve parameters have been set Ride the car and observe acceleration decel eration and jerk rates If any rate seems too sharp make that value smaller Note that changing values
161. ar 3 both 145 Normal Reverse direc yes no no If no calls away and hall call in the opposite tion without closing direction reverse direction without closing doors doors 146 Normal Car calls are yes no no yes no Calls behind the car are dropped when the dropped on direction car reaches the last call in the current direc reversals tion This is an anti nuisance feature 147 Normal Anti nuisance 0 32 l0 each If car calls in excess of this number are reg count istered without the electric eye verifying passenger entries the calls will be can celled O feature disabled 148 Disable access inspec 0 255 1 each 0 Enable tion switch 1 Disable 2 Bottom rear 3 Top rear 149 Parameter 149 0 each 150 Encoder Medium speed 0 120 0 each Reserved Not currently used look ahead distance 151 Encoder High speed 0 250 JO each Reserved Not currently used look ahead distance 152 Encoder Medium speed 24 1000 48 each Reserved Not currently used slowdown distance 153 Encoder High speed 0 72 11200 each Reserved Not currently used slowdown distance 154 Encoder Disable auto yes no no yes no Reserved Not currently used reset 155 Emerg Power Enable yes no no yes no Set to yes if emergency power operation is emergency power oper allowed for this car ation 156 Emerg Power Recall yes no no yes no When set to Yes Emergency Power Recall cars on Indep Or Atten recalls cars on Independent or Attendant d
162. ar and compensation ropes are in proper sheave grooves Move the car on inspection to lift the counterweight up off the buffer Check for buffer return the car or counterweight being racked and damage to the equipment Contents Index _MCE Web 421 Release to Normal Operation A eE Governor Safety Test Preparation A Danger Only qualified elevator personal skilled in final adjustment and safety testing should per form the following test Safety tests have the potential to damage equipment Over speed tests must be done as far as possible from the terminal landings Over speeding will prevent the car from slowing down at the floor the car is run to The car may not set the governor at the overspeed setting and you must be prepared to stop the car before the car gets to the terminal landing at a speed greater than contract speed Insure that the car is readjusted to run at normal speed after completing an overspeed test A Danger If the car has a counterweight safety ensure that the safety will not apply by tying down the safety actuating arm prior to performing this test Failure to prevent the safety from apply ing may result in the safety applying while the buffer is compressed Governor Safety Test Overspeed 1025 Regulator Before performing this test ensure you read and complete Limit adjustments carefully Before the test Measure and record the raw tach voltage at regulator terminal 1 2
163. ar is balanced cor rectly NOTE After drive stops this becomes Brake IGBT Fault Brk Hold Fault Brake hold state does not match commanded state Disabled Brk IGBT Fault Brake IGBT overcurrent Overcurrent of braking IGBT has occurred Fault latches but does not shut car down until it stops to allow passengers to safely exit Confirm motor data correctly entered braking resis tance connected and sized correctly car balanced correctly Brk Pick Fault Brake pick state does not match commanded state Disabled Bridge Fault Power module is detect ing overcurrent or over temperature condition Overcurrent Check proper sizing connection of dynamic brak ing resistor Check for short in motor wiring or windings Over temperature Check drive cooling fan and heatsink Replace drive if fault cannot be corrected with above measures Charge Fault DC Bus has not charged DC Bus has not reached desired stabilized voltage level within 2 seconds Check incoming AC power If OK replace drive Comm Fault Invalid Check sum The programmer received four consecu tive invalid messages Possible noise or bad connector for programmer Check connec tor on Control board and programmer Replace Control board or programmer if fault cannot be corrected Comm Fault No Drive Handshake The programmer lost communications with the drive Control board Possible noise or bad connector for pr
164. ar is stopping with a down direction pref erence 20 Up Run 1 Up Run 1 21 Down Run 1 Down Run 1 22 State 22 State 22 23 State 23 State 23 9 Doors 0 Init 1 Allow doors to Allow open Doors can open if desired open 2 Close doors Close Doors should close the car is ready to leave the floor 3 Lock doors Locked Doors are locked 4 Slowdown Slowdown The car is in slowdown update lanterns 5 Locked error LOCKED ERROR Doors are unlocked when they should be locked 6 State 6 STATE 6 7 State 7 STATE 7 8 State 8 State 8 9 State 9 State 9 10 Door 0 Init 1 No door No door Car has no door on this side 2 Stopped Stopped Door is neither opening nor closing 3 Stopped by Stopped SE Closing stopped by SE activation safety edge 4 DOB opening Opening DOB Door is opening due to door open button activation 5 SE opening Opening SE Door is opening due to safe edge activation 6 EE opening Opening EE Door is opening due to electric eye activa tion 7 Car call opening Opening CC Door is opening due to answering a car call at floor 8 Hall call opening Opening HC Door is opening due to answering a hall call at floor 9 Car and hall calls Opening C amp H Door is opening due to answering both a car opening and hall call at floor 10 Opening Opening Door is opening 11 Opening by hall Opening HDoor Opening doors due to the hall door being door open swing doors 12 Reclosing Reclosing Door is closing following a re open door sequence 5 10 Manual 42 0
165. arameters MFVC 77 0 801will let you view the motor values stored and write enable 80 Motor horsepower multiplied by 0 746 Some of the typical values for this parameter 7 5 HP 5 5 10 HP 7 5 12 5 HP 9 3 15 HP 11 Motor Poles 120 frequency RPM 900 RPM 8 but use 4 to auto tune 81 1200 RPM 6 1800 RPM 4 83 Motor Voltage V Nameplate voltage Must be less than or equal to the input AC line voltage 84 60 Hz 96 Auto Tuning Enable Use 1 to tune without motion Use 101 to tune with motion Starting the Auto tune To start the auto tune procedure 1 Set parameter 96 to 101 and push the write key 2 Push the EXT button The display will show 101 STOP EXT 3 Push the controller up inspection button The motor will hum intermittently and then the car will accelerate to full speed in the up direc tion before decelerating Do not stop the car unless it gets too close to the top landing or moves too fast 4 Hold the up direction button until the display shows the 103 completed This may take 10 seconds after the car has stopped moving in the up direction When com pleted the display will show TUNE 103 COMP STF STOP PU Please refer to Problems Auto Tuning In MFVC Mode on page 3 84 if the auto tune fails After a successful auto tune more fine tuning can be achieved by adjusting the drive gain as explained in the following paragraph Car Balancing For the drive to p
166. ard has started up properly and is sending data to the MPU board This should take 15 seconds If thelight does not start blinking after 15 seconds check the following 4 pin power cables plugged into all I O24 CI RL boards 5 volt DC power is at all red and black power connections on PW5 board 110 volt power at IP1 and IP2 fuses on relay board Solid Green Solid Amber Board has bad system configuration Assuming all other boards in system OK Blinking Green The MPU is functioning and communicating with the I O24 CTRL boards The LED must be blinking to continue with power up Plugthe Hand Held into the Hand Held Connector on the Car Network I O24 board Use the Hand Held to check the following All Error Conditions except NETWORK LOSS are resolved in the STATES section of the Hand Held Unit CAR DIAGNOSTICS STATES Error conditions are in capital let ters See Section 5 Hand Held Unit for details on operation of the Hand Held and a description of how to correct errors All errors must be resolved to continue nspection Controls is displayed in the state machine Inspection of the Hand Held Unit CAR DIAGNOSTICS STATES INSPECTION This will allow you to operate the car via the car controller inspection buttons on the car control board when necessary Please refer to HHU Basics on page 5 2 Drive Setup Refer to the drive setup instructions in Section 3 of this manual for the drive used on your job R
167. as no direction A time of zero will keep tion mode the MG running indefinitely 100 MG MG or pump 0 255 2 sec Time the MG or pump will keep running delay time after stop after the car stops Helps to avoid pump starts when the car stops and then relevels immediately Do not confuse with the MG shut down time which is very long The MG hold time has a maximum time of 25 sec onds 101 MG Start MG set as yes no no yes no Start the MG set as soon as direction is Soon a a direction is established If set to No MG will start when established doors are closing with calls away 102 Pattern Time delay for 0 25 5 O sec Time to wait before pattern starts building pattern start auto 103 Pattern Time delay for 0 25 5 O sec Time to hold the pattern after the direction pattern start on relevel relays have picked during relevel 104 Pattern Speed set to yes no yes yes no When set to Yes speed will be set to level leveling when LU or LD ing speed as soon as car reaches the level on ing zone 105 Pattern Speed set to yes no no yes no When set to Yes speed set to leveling speed leveling when ODZ on when reaching outer door zone 106 Pattern Time delay for 0 25 5 O sec Pattern start delay on inspection pattern start on inspec tion 107 Drive High speed yes no no yes no Set to high speed YES 108 Fire Main recall floor 1 32 2 floor Fire Phase 1 recall floor 109 Fire Alternate recall 1 32 3 floor Fire Phas
168. at the Encoder end 2 12 Manual 42 02 2T00 Motor Brake and Encoder Connection T Limit 2K Motor Speed Position Sensor For A17 1 2000 CSA B44 00 compliant controllers a speed position sensor mounted on the elevator machine motor provides independent feedback to the T Limit 2K Limit Gripper board through a special cable assembly This connection is detailed on the Limit Rope Gripper Board drawing in the drawings package accompanying the controller The speed sensor detects a magnet assembly attached to the shaft of the motor as the magnet assembly passes during each motor revolution Mounting the Magnet Assembly DO NOT drill any holes in the motor shaft to mount the assembly Use hose clamps as shown in the following illustration Figure 2 2 Mounting the Speed Sensor Magnet Assembly End View Magnet Magnetic Side View Shunt Iron Aluminum Base Motor Shaft Hose Clamp Installation A eE Mounting the Speed Sensor When mounting the speed sensor do not over tighten the mounting nuts Position the face of the sensor so there is 1 16 to 1 8 1 6 3 18mm clearance between the face of the sensor and the magnet assembly The speed sensor must be electrically isolated from the motor body The sensor is provided with the proper mounting hardware Figure 2 3 Speed Sensor Mounting side view Sensor iu a MagnelAssy The slot in the housing allows the sensor to magnet distance to be adjusted
169. ata If this value is not available temporarily set it for the value calculated by the following formula No Slip Motor RPM X 98 The final setting can be calculated by the drive by performing an adaptive tune This value must be less than 900 RPM on 8 pole motors 1200 RPM on 6 pole motors and 1800 RPM on 4 pole motors or a drive set up fault will occur Reuland motors have the synchronous speed on the motor nameplate Setting this parameter to synchronous speed will result in a set up fault The correct value is approximately synchronous speed times 0 9833 9 99 NOLOAD CURR Tells the drive what current is required to turn the motor at rated speed with no load This can be determined from the motor manufacturer data sheets on new motors If itis not available temporarily set it to 50 The final setting can be calculated by the drive during adaptive tuning The remaining parameters in the Motor A5 sub menu do not need to be modified from their default values 3 44 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive Configure CO Menu 1 Access the User Switches C1 sub menu SPEED COMMAND SRC Set to MULTI STEP RUN COMMAND SRC Set to EXTERNAL TB1 SPD REF RELEASE Set to REG RELEASE CONT CONFIRM SRC Set to EXTERNAL TBL The remaining parameters in the User Switches C1 sub menu do not need to be modified from their default values Oe WN 1 Access the Logic Inputs C2 sub menu The first par
170. ble contains entries designated CB for front and rear doors at every floor For every entry marked Y a Code Blue call will be allocated The first Code Blue call defined will always be located at the first input of a hall call panel group Hall calls and code blue calls will never share the same hall card group panel Riser Number Floor Number Values Parameter Code Blue Override Fire Recall will enable the dispatcher to select a car for Code Blue recall when it is on Fire Recall mode Parameter Code Blue Wait Time will determine how long a car will sit at the Code Blue recall floor waiting for the operator to activate the Hospital Emergency key switch The time is in seconds Parameter Code Blue Override Independent and Attendant will enable the dispatcher to select cars for Code Blue recall even when they are on Independent or Attendant service 1 20 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Operating Modes Seismic Operation A ringon a string circuit is used to detect displacement of the counterweight caused by seis mic activity input CWS The car position in the hoistway in relationship to the counterweight is reported by a switch mounted on the car and positioned such that it is always closed when the car is above the counterweight input POS The seismic switch is a manually activated switch or an external seismic detection device input SAS Car Setup Parameter 168 enable
171. bmenu Dispatcher setup for example it will move to the top line of the display and its function screens will be listed one at a time on the second line Tricon Configuration Cm Making an Entry in a Function Screen With the desired function displayed press the EJ key Return to Last Menu Press the star key gl Think of this as the lt ESCAPE gt key Jumping To jump through a long list quickly you can jump four topics at a time Pressthe 3 to jump up Pressthe 3 to jump down 5 4 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web HHU Basics Navigating Suggestion Take a minute or two to experiment with moving around through the menus submenus and function screens You will pick it up quickly Menu organization is shown below If you are view ingthis on line pdf file click on a menu to jump to its description Figure 5 1 Hand Held Unit Menus and Submenus Guide Tricon Configuration Nes Main Menus Main menu titles tell you what functions they address Car Diagnostics View controller status errors and input output activity Car Setup Configure parameters and assign inputs and outputs Dispatcher Setup Configure dispatcher parameters and assign inputs and outputs Network View serial communications status Useful when working with MCE support to diagnose communications issues Car Diagnostics Under the Car Diagnostics menu are States Allows you to access and display
172. brake detection l 0 3 1 1 Flux Vector 0 Ramp to stop 2 Fast Stop only 1 Cost to stop 3 Alarm only F1 03 PG Overspeed Stopping method at OS detection 0 3 1 1 Sel 0 Ramp to stop 2 Fast Stop Flux Vector only 1 Cost to stop 3 Alarm only F1 04 PG Deviation Sel Stopping method at DEV fault detection 0 3 1 1 Flux Vector only 0 Ramp to stop 2 Fast Stop 1 Costto stop 3 Alarm only F1 05 PG Rotation Sel PG rotation 0 CCW 1 CW Flux Vector only l 0 1 0 Oor1 F1 06 PG Output Ratio PG Division Rate Flux Vector only 1 132 1 1 F1 07 Flux Vector only Set to drive defaults thru F1 13 Digital Inputs See H1 01 description in F7 Drive Manual H1 01 Terminal 3 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S3 Function 0 82 9 9 Selection 9 External Base Block N C H1 02 Terminal S4 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S4 Function 0 82 14 14 Selection14 Fault Reset H1 03 Terminal S5 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S5 Function 0 82 80 80 Selection80 Multi Step Ref 1F H1 04 Terminal S6 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S6 Function 0 82 81 81 Selection81 Multi Step Ref 2F H1 05 Terminal S7 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S7 Function 0 82 82 82 Selection82 Multi Step Ref 3F H1 06 Terminal S8 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S8 Function 0 82 6 6 Selection6 Jog Ref Inspection speed Digital Outputs H2 01 description in F7 Drive Manual H2 01 Term M1 M2 Sel Terminal M1 M2 Function Selection 0 40 40 40 40 During Run
173. c om 10 11 Go to parameter 997 Put the write enable switch up the red LED will be on Press the Function Data Key Connect the temporary jumper from L1B the Bottom of the 1st controller fuse to DE33 contact This will lift the M relay Press the enter key to begin the self tune test The M relay will pick and drop until the display says Pass or Fault Put the write enable switch down LED off Press the Function Display key 977 Use the down arrow key to access the 613 parameter use the function data key to view the value stored The value stored in 613 armature resistance should be recorded and then loaded in parameter 4 The value stored in 614 armature inductance should be recorded and then loaded in parameter 6 The value stored in 615 Field LR should be recorded and then loaded in parameter 51 On the upper right hand side of the drive you will find a small slide switch This switch is the NVRAM Protect switch S3 Flip this switch to the up position The red LED NV RAM NOT PROTECTED will illuminate Press the ENTER key on the drive The display should now read 994 Flip the NVRAM Protect switch back to the down position The values are saved After the self tune is successful the calculated values are stored in the following parameters 613 Measured Motor Resistance 614 Measured Motor Inductance 615 Measured Field L R time constant These values should then be transferred and stored to t
174. call or will keep the last direction It will always light the proper lantern 136 Normal Disable doors yes no no yes no If set to Yes closed doors will not reopen reopening with calls at due to a hall call the floor 137 Normal Car has a local yes no no yes no Set to Yes if the car has a local riser hall call riser 5 46 Manual 42 02 2T00 Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen Main Menus 138 Normal Car is part of a yes no no yes no Set to Yes if the car belongs to a group group 139 Normal Out of service 0 255 90 Sec If the car has calls away but cannot move timeout time from the floor it will be taken out of service when this time expires If the time is set to zero the car will never go out of service 140 Normal Between floors 0 255 15 sec Time to wait before starting to move while delay to start stopped between floors 141 Parking Parking floor 0 32 JO floor Set to desired parking floor for this car Ozno parking Ozno parking 142 Parking Delay before 0 255 60 sec Time to wait before moving an idle car to a moving car to parking parking floor floor 143 Parking Open door once 0 3 0 each Once parked the car will cycle the selected O no door s one time 1 front 2 rear 3 both 144 Parking Hold door open 0 3 0 each Once parked the car will open and hold O no open the selected door 1 front 2 re
175. ce drive Ground Fault Sum of all phase cur rents exceeded 5096 of rated drive amperage Disconnect motor from drive Cycle power to drive If problem clears possible bad motor or wiring If problem does not clear possible bad system ground or bad drive Hit Torque Limit The measured current is equal or greater than the torque limit setting Verify car balance correct Verify motor and drive sizing Can be delayed by increasing value of TRQ LIM MSG DLY A1 parameter Mtr id Fault Mtr Data Fault Mtr Overload Invalid motor parame ters Motor has exceeded the motor overload curve Check all drive parameters Cycle power to drive If fault recurs go to the Utility menu and select Restore Defaults f fault persists replace Control board Note The Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameter to be set to their correct values Verify correct car balance Check for dragging brake or mechanical bind in machine or hoistway Verify setting of OVLD START LEVEL A1 and OVLD TI ME OUT A1 parameters Check for bad motor Overcurr Fault Phase current exceeded 25096 of rated current Verify car balanced correctly Verify proper motor and drive siz ing Check for bad motor or motor connection Check for bad main contactor contacts Check for mechanical bind in car or machine Overspeed Fault Motor speed exceeded user entered parame ters Check parameters OVERSPEED LEVEL A1
176. cess board plugged into its C position or all expansion positions may be empty Please refer to I O 24 Board with Terminal Boards at A B and C Positions on page 1 6 Expansion boards include L Terminal board Used for car or hall calls provides 8 paired input output combina tions The input services the call button and the output enables the button lamp OTerminal board Used for general purpose I O provides 8 independent inputs and 8 independent outputs The common bus power or ground for the outputs is deter mined by a connection to the Relay board FTerminal board Used for general purpose I O provides 8 independent inputs and 8 independent outputs Each output provides two connection points The common bus power or ground for the outputs is determined by a connection to the Relay board Access board Used when top and or bottom hoistway access is provided Mounts on the I O 24 Controller only position board in the C location CE Driver board Interfaces to third party audible or visual devices The type heavy duty or standard and number of driver boards provided depends on the particular job Limit board or 2K Limit Gripper board Limit board provides car Feet Per Minute set ting limits overspeed conditions monitors speed feedback controls hoistway learn opera tions 2K Limit Gripper performs the same functions and additionally limits unintended motion and controls an external rope gripper Refer to Sec
177. chronous no slip speed of 900 or 1200 RPM set this parameter to 6 POLE DFLT If the motor has a synchronous speed of 1800 RPM set this parameter to 4 POLE DFLT 3 4 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 19 RATED MTR PWR Rated motor horsepower or kilowatts Set to the value on the motor nameplate 20 RATED MTR VOLTS Rated motor voltage Set to the value on the motor nameplate 21 RATED EXCIT FREQ Frequency at which the motor is excited to obtain motor nameplate rated RPM Typically this is 60 Hz Set to the motor nameplate or manufac turer data sheet value 22 MOTOR MID VOL TS If the motor is rated for 208 230 volts set this parameter to 14 volts If the motor is rated for 400 480 volts set it to 28 volts 23 MOTOR MID FREQ Set to 3 hz 24 MOTOR MIN VOLTS If the motor is rated for 208 230 volts set to 4 volts If the motor is rated for 400 volts set to 9 volts If the motor is rated for 480 volts set to 8 volts 25 MOTOR MIN FREQ Set to 1hz 26 RATED MOTOR CURR Current required by the motor to obtain rated power at rated speed Set this parameter to the motor nameplate value 27 MOTOR POLES parameter If the synchronous speed of the motor is 900 RPM set this parameter to 8 poles If the synchronous speed of the motor is 1200 RPM set this parameter to 6 poles If the synchronous speed of the motor is 1800 RPM set this 3 parameter to 4 poles This value must be an even nu
178. ctly MOTOR POLES A4 must be set to an even number Setup Fault 5 Rated Motor Power and Rated Motor Voltage not set correctly Check RATED MOTOR PWR A4 RATED MTR VOLTS A4 They must satisfy the formula 07184 Motor Pwr Motor Voltage Drive Current Rating Setup Fault 6 Multi Step speed refer ence exceeds contract speed Check SPEED COMMAND 1 through SPEED COMMAND 16 and CONTRACT CAR SPD parameters Setup Fault 7 Run logic inputs not cor rectly defined Check LOG IN 1 TB1 16 through LOG IN 9 TB1 24 for cor rect setting Setup Fault 8 Setup Fault 9 DIR CONFIRM C1 enabled RUN UP RUN DOWN not assigned as logic inputs SPD COM MAND SRC C1 not set to ANALOG I NPUT Incorrect setting of motor parameters Not used Motor parameters must satisfy the following formulas MOTOR MIN VOLTS lt MOTOR MID VOLTS lt RATED MTR VOLTS MOTOR MIN FREQ lt MOTOR MID FREQ lt RATED EXCIT FREQ Confirm settings of motor parameters Stall Test Fault Motor current exceeds value of STAL TEST LVL for more than time period specified by STALL FAULT TIME Confirm setting of STALL TEST LVL A1 Confirm setting of STALL FAULT TI ME A1 Check motor machine and brake for mechanical bind Check motor parameter settings Check for excessive motor current Undervolt Fault DC Bus voltage low Voltage on DC Bus dropped below user entered values of parameters I NPUT L L Volt
179. ctors 118 Yes Allow Phase 2 operation after MR smoke recall 119 No Allow Phase 2 change without open doors 120 Dispatcher 51 Flag 64 ANSI A17 1 1996 112 Yes Constant pressure DCB to close door 113 Yes Allow recall of attendant or independent cars 116 No Has a Remote recall switch requires the EXT1 board when used 117 Yes Dispatcher 46 Yes Lobby bypass input resets smoke detectors 118 Yes Allow Phase 2 operation after MR smoke recall 119 No Allow Phase 2 change without open doors 120 Dispatcher 51 Flag 0 5 88 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Fireman Operation Setup ANSI A17 1 2000 112 Yes Constant pressure DCB to close door 113 Yes Allow recall of attendant or independent cars 116 No Has a Remote recall switch requires the EXT1 board when used 117 Yes Dispatcher 46 Yes Lobby bypass input resets smoke detectors 118 Yes Allow Phase 2 operation after MR smoke recall 119 Yes Allow Phase 2 change without open doors 120 Dispatcher 51 Flag 1 ANSI A17 1a 2005 B44 04U1 112 Yes Constant pressure DCB to close door 113 Yes Allow recall of attendant or independent cars 116 No Has a Remote recall switch requires the EXT1 board when used 117 Yes Dispatcher 46 Yes Lobby bypass input resets smoke detectors 118 Yes Allow Phase 2 operation after MR smoke recall 119 Yes Allow Phase 2 change without open doors e
180. d DHALL N v6 2 Output Examples A17 1 2000 DHALL Board Outputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AO 26 A3 1 to A3 2 Fire recall switch ON indicator FONI AO 18 A2 1 to A2 2 Fire OFF switch ON indicator FOFI AO 28 A3 3 to A3 4 AO 20 A2 3 to A2 4 AO 30 A3 5 to A3 6 AO 22 A2 5 to A2 6 AO 32 A3 7 to A3 8 AO 24 A2 7 to A2 8 BL 1 B3 1 to B3 2 BL 2 B2 1 to B2 2 BL 3 B3 3 to B3 4 BL 4 B2 3 to B2 4 BL 5 B3 5 to B3 6 BL 6 B2 5 to B2 6 BL 7 B3 7 to B3 8 BL 8 B2 7 to B2 8 CL 1 C3 1 to C3 2 Hall call ack light 1 HCA1 CL 2 C2 1 to C2 2 Hall call ack light 2 HCA2 CL 3 C3 3 to C3 4 Hall call ack light 3 HCA3 CL 4 C2 3 to C2 4 Hall call ack light 4 HCA4 CL 5 C3 5 to C3 6 Hall call ack light 5 HCA5 CL 6 C2 5 to C2 6 Hall call ack light 6 HCA6 CL 7 C3 7 to C3 8 Hall call ack light 7 HCA7 CL 8 C2 7 to C2 8 Hall call ack light 8 HCA8 Contents Index _MCE Web 5 35 Tricon Configuration MeE Extension Board EXT1 N Table 5 16 Extension Board EXT1 N v6 2 Input Examples A17 1 2000 Extension Board I nputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AL 1 Al 1 Locks bypass switch LBS AL 2 A1 2 Gate bypass switch GBS AL 3 A1 3 Governor 11096 overspeed switch GOV1 AL 4 A1 4 Fire remote switch ON FRON AL 5 A1 5 Fire remote switch OFF F
181. d D11 will be on 2 After normal learn mode is entered it is necessary to run the car from the bottom land ingto the top landing If two slowdown limits are present USL and HUSL then after the top landing is reached it is necessary to move the car one floor down from the top and then run the car up to the top again After this is completed LED D10 should turn off 3 Next the car should be run to the bottom If two slowdown limits are present DSL and HDSL the car should be moved up one floor and run to the bottom again After this operation is complete LED D11 should go out and the board will enter normal opera tion 4 Whenthe normal learn trip is performed It also determines if the slowdowns are placed in the proper position The slowdown should open within 200 milliseconds of the HS or MS relay going off If it does not a learn fault will be displayed on the diagnostic LEDs D10 D17 Please refer to Limit Board Learn Mode LED Meanings on page 4 5 The fault will be displayed if the slowdown is not positioned properly Contents Index _MCE Web 4 7 Release to Normal Operation Nes Operation Normal After the normal set up has been completed the limit board goes into normal operation D25 will be on continuously In normal operation speed is checked as it reaches the limits If the speed at a limit is excessive the safety will open to prevent the car from going beyond the floor The Limit board checks if t
182. d Phase Margin Sets phase margin of speed regula o 45 90 80 80 tor only with PI speed regulator Ramped Stop Time Time to ramp torque from rated sec 0 2 50 0 20 0 20 torque to zero only with torque ramp down stop function Contact Flt Time Time before a contactor fault is sec 0 10 5 00 0 50 2 0 declared Brake Pick Time Time before a brake pick fault is sec 0 5 00 1 00 0 5 declared Brake Hold Time Time before a brake hold fault is sec 0 5 00 0 20 0 00 declared Overspeed Level Threshold for detection of overspeed 100 0 150 0 115 0 115 fault Overspeed Time Time before an overspeed fault is sec 0 9 99 1 00 1 00 declared Overspeed Mult Multiplier for overspeed test 100 150 125 125 Encoder Pulses Encoder counts per revolution ppr 600 10000 1024 1024 Spd Dev Lo Level Range around the speed reference 00 1 10 0 10 20 for speed deviation low logic output Spd Dev Time Time before speed deviation low sec 0 9 99 0 5 0 5 logic output is true Spd Dev Hi Level Level for declaring speed deviation 0 99 9 10 0 20 0 alarm Spd Command Bias Subtracts an effective voltage to volts 0 6 00 0 00 0 00 actual speed command voltage Spd Command Mult Scales analog speed command 0 90 3 00 1 00 1 00 Pre Torque Bias Subtracts an effective voltage to volts 0 6 00 0 00 0 00 actual pre torque command voltage Pre Torque Mult Scales pre torque command 10 00 10 00 1 00 1 0 3 7 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 1
183. d reference should be negative Monitor parameter Speed Feedback Run the car in the down direction The speed feedback should be negative If not reverse the A and A signals from the encoder to the drive Scaling Adjustments Using the keypad access the U1 02 Output Freq on open loop or U1 05 Motor Speed on closed loop Hold a hand tach against the governor rope and run the car in either direction while monitoring the displayed speed and the tach If the displayed speed is slower than the observed speed on the hand tach access parameter O1 03 and Raise the FPM scaling If the dis played speed is faster than the observed speed on the hand tach access O1 03 and decrease the scaling The car can now be run on inspection operation 3 76 Manual 42 02 2T00 Yaskawa F7 Drive Drive Faults When a drive fault occurs the fault message will be displayed on the keypad and the drives fault contact will cycle The Tricon controller will attempt to reset the fault automatically If the fault condition remains the reset will stop and the drive will remain in a faulted condition You can view the status of the drive at the time of the current fault by looking at the Fault Trace monitors U2 01 to 14 You can also view the last ten fault messages in the Fault History con tained in monitors U3 01 to 20 High speed stops will frequently cause a drive fault Motor Tuning Flux Vector Closed Loop Only In order for the drive to properly control t
184. des this stipulation 119 Allow Phase 2 change without open doors Default value No A17 1 2000 and some local codes require the car to leave fire Phase 2 or be set to HOLD when the doors are closed If set to a yes the car will do a Phase 1 recall when the Phase 2 switch is turned off with the car in motion or the door closed Car parameter 120 Dispatcher parameter 51 Fire flags Multiple options can be enabled by adding their flag values together and entering the sum in this parameter A value of 0 sets ANSI A17 1 1996 or NYC RS18 1996 fire operation Currently NYC requires door and gate switch monitoring to be turned off To do this set an 8 in parameter 120 Other fire parameters listed above must be set to define the door and smoke detector operation Flag 1 A17 1 2000 code car fire bypass input operation becomes fire reset operation as defined in A17 1 2000 code Setting a value of 1 enables A17 1 2000 code Flag 2 Latch Phase one fire recall operation key switch inputs Flag 4 Lobby smoke detector overrides other smoke detectors Flag 8 Removes the jumped door and gate detection operation Flag 16 Once the car is recalled to the designated level from the alternate level using the Phase 1 key switch es the designated level will remain the recall level thereafter even after the Phase 1 switch is returned to the OFF position Flag 32 Car goes on door nudging without a call demand Flag 64 Re
185. dex _MCE Web 5 79 Tricon Configuration Table 5 28 Dispatcher Parameter Screen Parameters MeE 51 Fire Flags 0 255 0 Ea 0 A17 1 NYC RS18 1 A17 1 2000 Car fire bypass input operation becomes fire reset operation as defined in code 2 Not used 4 Lobby smoke detector over rides other smoke detectors 8 Not used 16 Once the car is returned to the designated level from the alternate level using the Phase 1 switch es the designated level will remain the recall level there after even if the Phase 1 switch is returned to the OFF position ANSI A17 1a 2005 B44 04U1 Add the flag numbers of those flags you want set To set multiple flags determine and set their combined value i e 2 and 8 set to 10 5 80 Manual 42 02 2T00 Main Menus Floor Table The floor table setup screen describes the building to the dispatcher Figure 5 18 Dispatcher Floor Table Screen To move into the Floor Table screen use 8 or key To return to the previous menu use key Table 5 29 Dispatcher Floor Table Parameters Editable Fields Description Value Riser 1 32 Floor 1 33 Front up yes no Front down yes no Rear up yes no Rear down yes no CB front Code Blue yes no CB rear Code Blue yes no To view all the floors use the 20rup arrow key to move backwards one 1 floor 8 or down arro
186. dial out phone number 4 Call time 1 start hour 0 24 23 hours Enter the time at which the pri 24 off mary dial out phone should be dialed O midnight 23 11pm 5 Call time 1 end hour 0 24 23 hours Enter the time at which the pri mary dial out phone should be hung up O2midnight 23 11pm 6 Call time 2 start hour 0 24 23 hours Enter the time at which the sec 24 off ondary dial out phone should be dialed O midnight 23 11pm 7 Call time 2 end hour 0 24 23 hours Enter the time at which the sec ondary dial out phone should be hung up O2midnight 23 11pm 8 Number of cars in group 1 6 2 each Enter the number of cars in this group 1 9 Number of floors 2 32 2 floor Enter the number of floors served by this car 10 Car 1 has rear doors 1l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear 0 no 0 no openings 11 Car 2 has rear doors 1l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear 0 no 0 no openings 12 Car 3 has rear doors 1l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear 0 no 0 no openings 13 Car 4 has rear doors 1l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear 0 no 0 no openings 14 Car 5 has rear doors 1l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear 0 no 0 no openings 15 Car 6 has rear doors 1l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear 0 no 0 no openings 5 66 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Table 5 27 BMS Screen Parameters Main Menus Car 1 number of floors Enter the number of floors ser viced by this car
187. djustment Nes 6 Adjust the PWM frequency parameter 72 to a value as low as possible without generat ingtoo much audible noise The value will change from job to job Values as low as 4500 Hz are attainable Reducing the PWM frequency also reduces the heat generated in the drive and radio frequency interference 7 Runthecar with no load and verify that it still runs smoothly and evenly in up and down directions Problems Auto Tuning In MFVC Mode Ifthe auto tune fails verify all parameters and retry fthe dynamic auto tune fails you can try the auto tunein the static mode The static mode uses a 1 in parameter 96 Follow the procedure for auto tuning If any error occurred the car will stop and the display will show the error An example of this is TUNE 9 ERROR STF STOP PU Error 9 Inverter trip Check value of parameter 80 it should be set to the kilowatts capacity of the motor Example 7 horsepower motor 7 x 0 746 5 22 KW Ifthe drive does not auto tune correctly and parameters 80 and 81 are not set back to 9999 the drive will still be in advanced MFVC mode using Mitsubishi motor constants This is OK as long as peak current does not exceed twice the motor nameplate rated current If the peak currents are greater than twice the motor nameplate take the drive out of the MFVC mode Parameter 80 and 81 set to 9999 and manually adjust the torque boost Monitoring Peak Current Check the peak output current of the drive with f
188. down magnets are NORTH POLE Door Zone magnets are SOUTH POLE Down slowdown Slowdown distance minus 6 inches Front door zone Floor level Slowdown distance minus 6 inches Rear door zone Up slowdown 1 Install a door zone magnet for each door opening in its corresponding location If there are two openings at a floor install both door zone magnets Door zone magnets are SOUTH POLE These are only used for jobs with Front AND Rear door openings Contents Index _MCE Web 2 33 Installation Nes High Speed Operation Front Door ONLY High speed operation requires four slowdown magnets per floor one floor up and down magnets plus high speed up and down magnets One floor magnet slowdown distance is calculated to be the shortest floor height in the building divided by 2 5 High speed magnet slowdown distance is equal to the top speed of the car divided by 50 Speed High Speed Magnet Slowdown Minimum Floor Height 250 FPM 5 0 6 6 275 FPM 5 6 7 300 FPM 6 0 7 6 325 FPM 6 6 g 350 FPM 7 0 8 6 375 FPM 76 g 400 FPM 8 0 9 6 The slowdown distances are based on the magnets being placed as follows For Up Slowdowns Measurement is from the center of the leveling magnet to the bottom edge of the slowdown magnet For Down Slowdowns Measurement is from the center of the leveling magnet to the top edge of the slowdown magnet All magnets are NORTH
189. drive cooling fan and heatsink Replace drive if fault cannot be corrected with above measures Charge Fault DC Bus has not charged DC Bus has not reached desired stabilized voltage level within 2 seconds Check incoming AC power If OK replace drive Comm Fault Invalid Checksum The programmer received four consecu tive invalid messages Possible noise or bad programmer connector Check connector on Control board and programmer Replace Control board or programmer if fault cannot be corrected Comm Fault No Drive Handshake The programmer lost communications with the drive Control board Possible noise or bad connector for programmer Check con nector on Control board and programmer Replace Control board or programmer if fault cannot be corrected Contactor Fault Contactor state does not match the commanded state The drive has turned on the command to close the main con tactor and the Contactor Confirm signal is not present for the amount of time specified by the Contact Flt Time parameter Cube Data Fault Cube ID Fault The drive parameters are invalid The drive identification is invalid Check all drive parameters Cycle power to the drive If fault recurs go to the Utility menu and select Restore Defaults f fault persists replace Control board Note The Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameters to be set to their correct values Check all drive
190. e 1 alternate recall floor floor 110 Fire Smoke detectors yes no no yes no When set to Yes smoke detectors set to are reset by lobby recall latch parameter 117 Yes will clear when switch the lobby recall switch is operated 5 44 Manual 42 02 2T00 Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen Main Menus 111 Fire Constant pressure yes no yes yes no f set to Yes doors will open with constant on DOB to open doors pressure on DOB button If released before doors are fully open doors will reclose 112 Fire Constant pressure yes no no yes no If set to Yes doors will close with constant on DCB to close doors pressure on DCB button If released before doors are fully closed doors will reopen 113 Fire Allow recall while yes no yes yes no If set to Yes the car will auto recall while in in att or ind operation attendant or independent mode 114 Fire Recall wait time if 0 25 5 25 sec When fire recall is activated when car is in car on att or ind attendant or independent car will wait for time set here before initiating recall Inter acts with Parameter 113 115 Fire Close doors with yes no no yes no If set to Yes doors will close at nudging nudging speed during speed during fire recall fire recall 116 Fire Has remote fire yes no no yes no Set to yes to enable the input for a remote recall switch fire switch 117 Fire Lobby bypass yes no yes yes no Ca
191. e Blue Override yes no 1 0 O yes 1 If set to 1 yes a car in indepen independent and atten no 0 dent or attendant mode will close dant its doors and recall immediately to the code blue floor Code blue overrides independent and atten dant service 43 Code Blue Override Fire yes no 1 0 0 yes 1 If set to 1 yes a car in Fire Ser Recall no 0 vice will close its doors and recall immediately to the code blue floor Code blue overrides Fire Service 44 Code Blue Wait time 0 255 45 sec Determines how long a car called to a floor for emergency medical service will wait for in car activa tion before returning to normal service 45 Parameter 45 46 Fire Fire bypass resets yes no 1 0 1 yes 1 Determines whether or not the all smoke detectors no 0 primary fire switch being set to Bypass will reset all smoke detec tors 47 Fire Has remote fire yes no 1 0 O yes 1 Set to yes if there is a remote fire switch no 0 switch installed for this job Directs the dispatcher to moni tor the appropriate input 48 Fire Recall overrides yes no 1 0 1 yes 1 Determines whether or not fire code blue no 0 service operation will override emergency medical service oper ation 49 Fire Recall switch resets yes no 1 0 O yes 1 Determines whether or not the smoke detectors no 0 primary fire switch being set to the ON and then the OFF position will reset all smoke detectors 50 Parameter 50 Contents
192. e Problems Route high and low level signal wiring properly Keep low level wiring in separate conduit from high power wiring If high and low power wiring must be run in the same duct separate them by a minimum of three to four inches If one must cross the other it should be at a ninety degree angle Run low level wiring in shielded cable The shield collects any induced voltage from surround ing high power wiring The shield or drain must be connected to ground at one end only never at both ends Contents Index _MCE Web 2 5 Installation A eE Possible EMI RFI Interference Semiconductor devices that switch at high frequencies such as variable frequency drives pro duce EMI RFI To avoid EMI problems 1 Run all motor leads in a separate conduit Motor lead runs should be as short as possi ble Control cabinet entry should be as close to the final termination point as possible 2 Run main line supply leads in a separate conduit 3 Run primary isolation transformer wiring in separate conduit from main line conduc tors to the transformer 4 Run all secondary isolation transformer wiring in a separate conduit from the trans former to the drive cabinet 5 Asingle point ground should be established inside the control cabinet and a 8 AWG ground wire run directly from each of the following devices to this single point Earth Ground from running water supply hydro electric supplied ground or a ground supplied
193. e door operator does not no Close Limit Switch have a close limit The controller uses the door gate contact to detect a closed door 24 Front Door op Test yes no no yes no When set to Yes the computer will verify jumped gate and locks that gate and locks are open when the close while closing limit is made 25 Door op Flag 3 yes no no yes no 26 Front Door op Cam 0 25 5 0 sec If the cam does not drop in this time an drop timeout 0 no error will be generated If the door has no cam cam set this to zero 0 27 Front Door op Hold 0 25 5 0 Sec Extends operation of open amp close relays close and open after after limits have been reached It is used on limits opened door operators that have no hysteresis on their limits and also to ensure that the doors will make the gate and locks after the close limit has been reached 28 Rdoor Minimum reopen 0 25 5 0 5 sec After reopening door will remain open for at time least this time while in normal operation 29 Rdoor Car call mini 0 25 5 3 sec Time the door will remain fully opened due mum time if EE SE or to a car call at the floor with no Electric Eye DCB detected Safe Edge or Door Close Button detected Time cannot be reduced by electric eye or door close button 30 Rdoor Car call max 0 25 5 10 Sec Maximum time doors will remain open due time if no EE SE or DOB to a car call only with no Electric Eye Safe detected Edge or Door Open Button detected 31 Rdoor
194. e has been modified for this application Some of the parameters in this sheet are different and are not available in the drive manuals Ifa drive has been replaced in the field then all the drive parameters should be entered manually and should be verified according to this parameter sheet Startup for Flux Vector Mode Closed Loop Enable the drive for Flux Vector Mode by setting parameter A1 02 3 Remember to reset preset speed minimums back to the design settings sent with the con troller Attempt to run the elevator on inspection while in Flux Vector mode f encoder feedback is reversed the car will run at very low speed with high current Output current can be observed on Monitor U1 03 Running the car in the down direc tion monitor the Output Freq U1 02 and the Encoder Speed feedback U1 90 The two signals should be negative if the encoder polarity is correct To reverse encoder direction reverse A and A signals from the encoder to the drive If this does not resolve the problems check these possible causes 1 PPRsettingin drive is incorrect Check Parameter F1 01 2 Encoder has been damaged 3 Improper encoder wire routing shielding or connection 4 Motor Data in drive is incorrect See Motor Tuning Section Run the car again and confirm that the car runs correctly in both directions Using the keypad access the U1 90 Monitor parameter Encoder Speed Run the car in the down direction The spee
195. e in the down direction MS Indicates that the car is to move at medium speed one floor run speed if HS is used or contract speed if the car contract speed is equal to or less than 200 FPM HS Indicates that the car is to move at high speed multi floor run speed GMON2 Not currently used e GMONT Monitors the rope gripper relay If the input drops off while the rope gripper out put is on orif the input turns on when the board is not detecting a fault condition the rope gripper will trip and a gripper relay contact failure fault will be annunciated GMON There is no external connection to this input It is used internally to monitor the gripper relays during the gripper relay sequence test Contents Index _MCE Web 4 9 Release to Normal Operation MeE GOV Monitors the 11096 overspeed governor switch in the safety circuit string May be selected as the source of the rope gripper overspeed fault This input automatically resets when the detected condition clears GATE Monitors the gate switch to determine if the car door is open One of the inputs used to determine unintended movement conditions for the rope gripper LOCK Monitors the door locks to determine if the hall door is open One of the inputs used to determine unintended movement conditions for the rope gripper DZ Monitors the cars remainingin the door zone One ofthe inputs used to determine unintended movement conditions for the rope gripper
196. e made although the doors are Floor opened doors cannot close because it is presumed that the lock contacts are jumped out Locks Opened While Running Lock contacts opened while car was moving Floor Lost GL While Running GL input lost while running Floor Low Oil Low oil level hydraulic Floor MG Switch Operated The car has been stopped by either the in car MG switch Floor or the lobby MG switch Missing Down Slowdown Vane A down slowdown vane is missing below floor given Floor Missing Up Slowdown Vane An up slowdown vane is missing above floor given Floor Motor Field Fault Motor field fault Floor No Communications With No communication with a remote board Card name No Dispatcher Com The car lost communication with the dispatcher Floor No Floors Defined No floors defined No parameter Oil Buffer Switch Oil buffer switch Floor Overload Tripped Car weight limit exceeded Floor Overspeed The car overspeed the governor 11096 speed switch Floor opened Pit Stop Switch Operated Pit stop switch operated Floor Plank Switch Operated Plank switch operated Floor 5 20 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Table 5 2 Car Errors Display Table v6 282 Main Menus Position Reset Position was reset Floor Possible counterweight derailment Seismic operation possible counterweight derailment No parameter Primary Lock Lost The swing doors prima
197. e of this warranty Products that are not manufactured by MCE such as drives CRTs modems printers etc are not covered under the above warranty terms MCE however extends the same warranty terms that the original manufacturer of such equipment provide with their product refer to the warranty terms for such products in their respective manual End User License Agreement This End User License Agreement Agreement grants you the right to use the software con tained in this product the Software subject to the following restrictions You may not i copy the Software except for archive purposes consistent with your standard archive procedures ii transfer the Software to a third party apart from the entire product iii modify decompile disas semble reverse engineer or otherwise attempt to derive the source code of the Software iv export the Software or underlying technology in contravention of applicable U S and foreign export laws and regulations and v use the Software other than in connection with operation of the product LICENSOR S SUPPLI ERS DO NOT MAKE OR PASS ON TO END USER OR ANY OTHER THIRD PARTY ANY EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION ON BEHALF OF SUCH SUPPLIERS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGE MENT TITLE MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Important Precautions and Useful Information This preface contains information tha
198. e set to open immediately AFTER the US sensor comes on the top floor one floor run slowdown magnet This can be seen by monitoring the HU relay on the SET9000 sensor interface board LED D3 lights This slowdown switch opens U1S1 to U182 Bottom Switch 1 The terminal slowdown switch that is furthest from the floor should be set to open immediately AFTER the DS sensor comes on the bottom floor high speed slow down magnet This can be seen by monitoring the DS relay on the SET9000 sensor inter face board LED D4 lights This slowdown switch opens D2S1 to D282 Bottom Switch 2 The terminal slowdown switch that is closest to the floor should be set to open immediately AFTER the DS sensor comes on the bottom floor one floor run slow down magnet This can be seen by monitoring the DS relay on the SET9000 sensor inter face board LED D4 lights This slowdown switch opens D1S1 to D1S2 2 36 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Completing I nstallation Figure 2 15 Hoistway Switch Opening Electrically Correlated to Magnet Positions Final Limit Floor level 6 inches Normal Limit Floor level 1 5 inches IS Floor Level Magnet Slow Down Jone Floor Run Up Magnet CTRL No 2 Software gt 200 FPM ONLY High Speed Slowdown Hion Speed Up Magnet High Speed In between Floor Level Magnets CTRL No 2 Software High Speed Slowdown ion Speed Down Magnet High Speed gt 200 FPM ONLY Slow Down
199. e transfer LREC AO 6 A1 6 Lobby MG Stop switch LMG AO 7 A1 7 Machine Room smoke detector MSMK AO 8 A1 8 Lower hoistway smoke detector LHSM BL 1 B1 1 Hall Call button 1 HCB1 BL 2 B1 2 Hall Call button 2 HCB2 BL 3 B1 3 Hall Call button 3 HCB3 BL 4 B1 4 Hall Call button 4 HCB4 BL 5 B1 5 Hall Call button 5 HCB5 BL 6 B1 6 Hall Call button 6 HCB6 BL 7 B1 7 Hall Call button 7 HCB7 BL 8 B1 8 Hall Call button 8 HCB8 CL 1 C1 1 Hall call button 9 HCB9 CL 2 C1 2 Hall call button 10 HCB10 CL 3 C1 3 Hall call button 11 HCB11 CL 4 C1 4 Hall call button 12 HCB12 CL 5 C1 5 Hall call button 13 HCB13 CL 6 C1 6 Hall call button 14 HCB14 CL 7 C1 7 Hall call button 15 HCB15 CL 8 C1 8 Hall call button 16 HCB16 5 30 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Main Menus Table 5 11 Hall Board HALL N v6 2 Output Examples A17 1 2000 HALL N Board Outputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AO 26 A3 1 to A3 2 Position indicator 1 HP1 AO 18 A2 1to A2 2 Position indicator 2 HP2 AO 28 A3 3 to A3 4 Position indicator 3 HP3 AO 20 A2 3 to A2 4 Position indicator 4 HP4 AO 30 A3 5 to A3 6 Position indicator 5 HP5 AO 22 A2 5 to A2 6 Position indicator 6 HP6 AO 32 A3 7 to A3 8 Position indicator 7 or Up direction arrow HP7U AO 24 A2 7 to A2 8 Position indicator 8 or Down direction arrow HP8D BL 1 B3 1 to B3 2 Hall call acknowledge light 1 HCA1 BL 2 B2 1
200. e when the limit gripper board is in learn mode the UP input goes on and either the HS or MS input is on If the UP input is on but HS or MS are not on the board will default to Inspection learn mode 1 Press and hold switch S3 for 5 seconds to enter learn mode The board will enter learn mode LED DS25 will blink rapidly 8 times per second Diagnostic LEDs DS17 18 and 22 will light steadily 2 Start the learn process at the bottom floor Run the car at high speed to the top floor Ifthe car has V3 xx MPU 2 software or is low speed Parameter 107 set to No and has only one up slowdown USL the DS17 LED will turn off as the car approaches the top floor If this is the case skip to step 4 3 Ifthecaris high speed Parameter 107 set to Yes and has V2 xx MPU 2 software and two up slowdowns USL and HUSL then after the top landingis reached you must move the car one floor down from the top and then run to the top again At this point the DS17 LED will go off 4 Runthe carto the bottom floor If the car has V3 xx MPU 2 software or is low speed Parameter 107 set to No and has only one down slowdown DSL the DS18 LED will turn off as the car approaches the bottom floor If this is true the learn trip is complete and the DS25 LED will light steadily If this is a high speed car with V2 xx MPU 2 soft ware proceed to the next step 5 Iftwo down slowdown limits are present DSL and HDSL move the car up one floor and run to the bo
201. ead and followthe instructions carefully before running the car Inspection Learn Before the car can be moved on inspection a learn operation must be performed using Limit Board controls The Inspection Speed Learn operation allows the Limit board to learn the eleva tor inspection speed Once learned the Limit board can prevent the car from exceeding 150 of the learned inspection speed when the car is operating in Inspection mode Inspection Learn may be completed before the slowdown limits are wired Non 2K Compliant Cars Please refer to Operation Inspection Setup Before High Speed on page 4 7 2K Compliant Cars 2 Please refer to Inspection Learn on page 4 14 2 42 Manual 42 02 2700 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Running on Inspection Mode Brake Adjustment Two different brake circuits may be used with the Tricon system One uses the Garvac brake regulator the other does not Brake outputs are set at the factory using survey data Before adjusting brake control clean the brake assembly and all pins and make certain that brake spring tensions are set to hold 12596 of car capacity Check brake shoes to ensure at least 9596 contact with the braking surface If spring tension is changed after adjustment the adjustment procedure will have to be repeated Brake Regulator Circuit For brake circuits using the Garvac brake regulator follow these instructions e V I1adjusts Lift voltage V I 2 adjusts Releveling vo
202. earn Operation You must now perform an normal speed learn operation using controls on the Limit Board Please refer to the learn operation information for your particular Limit Board in Section 4 Please refer to Limit Board Standard on page 4 3 Please refer to 2K Limit Gripper Board on page 4 9 Contents Index _MCE Web 3 77 Startup amp Drive Adjustment PA e Mitsubishi A500 Variable Frequency Drive This section describes A500 Startup and Adjustment Open Loop Volts Hertz MFVC Mode Open Loop with Slip Compensation Closed Loop Speed Control Brake Adjustment A500 Startup and Adjustment This section describes adjusting the Mitsubishi A500 drive The instructions are not intended to replace the Mitsubishi drive manual and assume you understand how to use the drive parame ter unit to access monitor modes as well as parameters The drive can be operated in three modes Open loop volts hertz e MFVC mode open loop volts hertz with slip compensation Closed loop speed control The drive is shipped with parameters set for open loop volts hertz mode Each mode in turn in the order shown above improves the performance of the drive The highest performance mode closed loop speed control requires an encoder feedback board in the controller cabinet and a motor mounted encoder Even if you intend to run the car in closed loop mode with encoder feedback you must start adjusting from the open loop v
203. ection 5 Tricon Configuration Inihis SOC iuuenes t RERAKEARERRRERAG AX RR AU ARR REOR RR RR RO 5 1 BHU C gt gir EE ee ee ey ee 5 2 Bol E a oo Gh O61 ehhh ks I Fr ERES oS 4 ah EEE 5 2 Soc rc MTE 5 3 Moving within the Current Menu as ead aae REESE n e 5 3 Moving Between Submenus rs ao dada P qERPRRAX4AdAWERETERECEXddP TE RRARG YER Ed 5 3 Acong Podio essiri trier EAN EA REE 5 3 Making an Entry in a Function Screen cai ccces eoa RR ERRARE 5 4 Ren w Last MMi Lic cona A T UR REOR Crit rk REA RI RaR bad RR dA E 5 4 SUN a EE EAE A E IER E E E E A E EAE E E 5 4 Diy UD nk rriad eraat kben c ea i araa 55 Mn Men s 2c sd Cae KE ORES arinkiri In AAA AA REA aR RON RON ROR ORE 5 6 Cur DIGGODSDUS sc cccdecoeserdstaed gassed add beedeetass edad e Ad dad ARR EEG 5 6 States Submenu OS oid da reo 00654 red RR EGER CERE HER 5 7 ogg o MEE KT T Tre 5 19 PEE rt ecocaseti ekREAS CREE Mem End d ERA d RI Ru RaU ER Ed A 0 22 S uc 004 7 MPETI T mT 5 38 laaien E E oe E EE E E TRE E PEDE 5 38 ria OETRESTTT EL TT E ee eee E ee ry eee 5 50 CE Indicator Set Up View amp Edit Screen 0 ccc cece eee cee ce ee eee eees 5 54 Position Indicators View amp Edit Screens CTOP CSTA or HALL Board 5 57 PI Board Setup View Q Edit cc ctsiscsdnsa Pak E Xd ddat r NEETA ner ewe oe ae 5 61 PNE O r A EAER Go 6 0959 E NS 5 66 LE Ce o E E EEE T EEE E E E E EE ET 5 68 ell ELIANE EE PEI E AE TE TA EET T E O T E
204. ection arrow DDA AF 29 AF30 A3 5 to A3 6 Access inspection gate bypass rear AGBR AF 21 AF 22 A2 5 to A2 6 Rear door car lantern up RCLU AF 31 AF 32 A3 7 to A3 8 Rear door car lantern down RCLD AF 23 AF 24 A2 7 to A2 8 Access inspection gate bypass front AGBP BF 25 BF 26 B3 1 to B3 2 Door open DO BF 17 BF 18 B2 1 to B2 2 Rear door open RDO BF27 BF 28 B3 3 to B3 4 Door close DC BF 19 BF 20 B2 3to BZ24 Rear door cose gt RDO gt BF 29 BF 30 B3 5 to B3 6 Door nudging NUDG BF 21 BF 22 B2 5 to B2 6 Rear door nudging RNUD BF 31 BF 32 B3 7 to B3 8 Door cam CAM BF 23 BF 24 B2 7 to B2 8 Code blue Hosp emerg ind CBCI CO 26 C3 1 to C3 2 Position indicator 1 PI1 CO 18 C2 1 to C2 2 Position indicator 2 PI2 CO 28 C3 3 to C3 4 Position indicator 3 PI3 CO 20 C2 3 to C2 4 Position indicator 4 PI4 C0 30 C3 5toC3 6 Position indicator5 PB CO 22 C2 5 to C2 6 Position indicator 6 PI6 CO 32 C3 7 to C3 8 Position indicator 7 PI7 CO 24 C2 7 to C2 8 Position indicator 8 PI8 Contents Index _MCE Web 5 27 Tricon Configuration Car Station Board MeE The car station board can be located either in the controller cabinet or in the car All its inputs and outputs are connected to equipment generally located in the car station Table 5 8 Car Station Board CSTA N v6 2 Input Examples A17 1 2000 Car Station Board In
205. ed 4 Removethe slowdown and Limit board jumpers 5 Remove any tiedown that may have been put on the safety A Danger Before moving the car ensure that the car and compensation ropes are in proper sheave grooves Move the car on inspection up off the buffer Check for buffer return the car or counterweight being racked and damage to the equipment 4 20 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Final Test Contract Speed Buffer Test Counterweight Before performing test ensure you read and complete Limit adjustments carefully and have checked hoistway over travel clearances A Danger Before performing this test ensure that the safety will not apply by tying down the safety actuating arm Failure to prevent the safety from applying may result in the safety applying while the buffer is compressed Begin the test with Empty car at the bottom floor with one floor added to the floor table 1 Connect ajumper on the down direction high speed U2S1 to U2S2 and low speed U1S1to U1S2 slowdown 2 Jump the Limit board safety contacts J 5 1 to J 5 2 and J 6 1to J 6 2 3 Usingthe simplex parking floor parameter send the car to the top floor The counter weight will not slow down at the bottom floor and will impact the buffer at contract speed 4 Removethe slowdown and Limit board jumpers 5 Remove any tiedown that may have been placed on the safety A Danger Before moving the car ensure that the c
206. ed board output can be measured at terminals TB1 3 common and TB2 9 Ref When the caris run in the up direction the Ref terminal will be positive with respect to common Speed Pots The speed board has five adjustable speed output voltages These pots have a limited output See the table below Clockwise rotation will increase voltage The pot setting can be measured with the car stopped by measuring each of the speed input terminals TB1 1 TB1 HI to the board common TB1 3 Adjust the corresponding pot for the desired voltage speed The volt age required for a given speed can be precisely calculated using the following formula Desired Speed x 10 Reference Voltage Contract Speed FPM Speed Pot Adjustable of full speed Voltage output SP1 0 1596 0 1 5VDC SP2 0 25 0 2 5VDC SP3 SP5 0 100 0 10 0VDC HI Fixed 10 0VDC Contents Index _MCE Web 3 93 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A eE The system control uses the following speeds Speed Function Normal Setting SP1 Leveling 4 8FPM 25VDC SP2 Approach Inspection 20 30FPM LOVDC SPA One floor run or contract speed 200FPM or less 5 0 or 10VDC HI Multi floor run contract speed 2200FPM 10VDC Acceleration Deceleration Pots The speed board has two acceleration rates and three deceleration rates available Tricon uses accel 1and decel1 The range for the accel1 and decel1is 10 seconds with the potentiometer fully counterclockwise slow accel and slow decel
207. eed of the car Set to the speed in feet per minute for which the car is rated 3 CONTRACT MTR SPD Set to the motor RPM that will make the car run at contract speed This is not the data from the motor nameplate This parameter sets the speed at which the drive will run the motor when the car is commanded to run at contract speed 4 Skipdowntothe ENCODER PULSES parameter Set to the number of pulses per rev olution PPR from the encoder nameplate Contents Index _MCE Web 3 23 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Nes Go to the S Curves A2 sub menu ACCEL RATE 0 Acceleration rate of speed curve function Set to 2 5 ft s DECEL RATE 0 Deceleration rate of speed curve function Set to 4 0 ft s ACCEL J ERK IN 0 Initial jerk rate of speed curve function Set to 3 0 ft s ACCEL J ERK OUT 0 J erk rate when transitioning from acceleration to contract speed Set to 3 0 ft s 10 DECEL J ERK IN 0 J erk rate when transitioning from contract speed to deceleration Set to 4 0 ft s 11 DECEL J ERK OUT 0 J erk rate when transitioning from deceleration to leveling speed Set to 4 0 ft s Remaining S Curves A2 parameters are not used POND Access the Multistep Ref A3 sub menu SPEED COMMAND 1 Leveling speed of the car Set to 3 5 ft min SPEED COMMAND 2 Approach speed of the car Set to 12 0 ft min SPEED COMMAND 3 Inspection speed of the car Set to 45 0 ft min SPEED COMMAND 4 Contract speed of the car
208. ek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive eeeeeee nnn 3 41 PEY IOO NN ges EP kes pee eerie F doe HEC d 3 41 System li TEFEETTIT t 3 41 Dove PROG ua LedERS RSS QEEPP RA ad PT A ERRARE RE RR AERE RA 3 41 Divo Pd MITT 3 42 Parameter SOUS dassusaaxeseidikisRidAQQAEGd Add RERRRESEETEEAS SEARS pad 3 43 RO De UE uad epe a a ERE ae DA 3 46 Drive Parameter Reference os sessasasrkakii re RERRRERRARERPPRPERAGd A d REPR d ka 3 46 lac cio id rrr 3 54 HPV 900 High Speed Adjustment 2 csc ies eadesceeneveeseeseav eases RR n 3 57 LOUP Ee as 24g GOES hE SORE ERE 9 HD HP 3 57 Motor Parameter Adjustments 0c c cee cece cee cece eee e ene orrn 3 58 Speed Curve Setting and Adjustment 0 c cece cee eee cee e ee eaes 3 58 HPV 900 Adaptive Tuning bisa nkevev aad t E ERXRV ETE WEPERPdX XE QEREF ERR dd b a qud Ra 3 60 Normal Speed Learn Ca oo eq xx KE RS Eee eC RE ER P DESEE ERA AA 3 61 iv Manual 42 02 2T00 F4 10 6 09 index Yaskawa ET Dre i e 4 65s RARO RR ACE Aw OES HES COR CC REOR ROC NCC NCC ER 3 62 TODO OPIDO UB esae exdd Va i eee E CLP EpRRR TEA EEE IE EE PET ES 3 63 Dita ioe ee en Tt I err eee ee eres ree 3 63 D DcLES 05 NNNM 3 64 clie PTT TTEP 3 64 Scaling Car Speed t PONES iS ERA d tondris tiretti a NILI eran re ria 3 64 Parameter 01 03 Display Scaling o n AXE RAE EYE 3 64 Maximum motor speed E1 04 Default 60Hz Setting 0 cee eee eee ee 3 65 De so
209. ent is at line voltage when AC power is connected Never operate Tricon controls with covers removed from drive or brake controls After AC power has been removed internal capacitors can remain charged for up to 5 min utes Wait at least 5 minutes after power down before touching any internal components To lessen the risk of shock all equipment must be securely grounded to earth ground with a minimum of 8 AWG wire as outlined in the National Electrical Code Failure to obtain an actual earth ground may result in electrical shock to personnel When using test equipment oscilloscopes etc with a power cord that electrically ties probe common to earth ground an isolation transformer should be used to isolate the instrument common from earth ground Stay clear of all rotating equipment while working on the controls Equipment Safety All equipment must be securely grounded to earth ground with a minimum of 8 AWG wire as outlined in the National Electrical Code Failure to obtain a true earth ground may result in electrical shock and is the most common cause of electrical component failure and noise induced problems Replace components only with main line power off Damage to equipment or unexpected operation of the elevator may occur if this precaution is not observed Substitution of parts or unauthorized modifications should not be attempted before first contacting Motion Control Engineering to ensure all safety features are maintained MCE
210. er BMS Parameters This screen allows you to reset dispatcher BMS modem parameters to their default values Network The Network screen allows you to view parameters for serial communication between system components To move into the edit screen use 8 or key To return to the previous menu use key Figure 5 21 Network Screen 5 85 Tricon Configuration Nes Fireman Operation Setup Fireman operation can be configured to comply with various national and local codes NYC A17 1 1996 and A17 1 2000 fire operation can be obtained by adjusting these parameters Dif ferent codes have different names for the fire devices The following table correlates code nomenclature with this documentation Table 5 31 Code Nomenclature Correlation ASME A17 1 2000 ASME A17 1 1996 NYC Lobby Phase 1 Recall Switch Lobby Phase 1 Recall Switch Lobby Phasel Recall Switch Reset Off On Bypass Off On Normal Fireman Service Car Phase 2 Switch Car Phase 2 Switch Car Phase 2 Switch Off Hold On Off Hold On Normal Hold Fireman Service Operation The car and dispatcher parameters listed below must be set to the proper values in order to comply with different codes and regulations The dispatcher parameters are applicable where a dispatcher is provided and the hall Phase 1 fire service is controlled from this dispatcher When a dispatcher is used the car fire service parameters must be set the same as the dispatche
211. erence for speed 00 1 10 0 10 20 deviation low logic output Spd Dev Time Time before speed deviation low logic out sec 0 9 99 0 5 0 5 put is true Spd Dev Hi Level Level to declare speed deviation alarm 96 0 99 9 10 0 20 0 Spd Command Subtracts an effective voltage to actual volts 0 6 00 0 00 0 00 Bias speed command voltage Spd Command Scales analog speed command 0 90 3 00 1 00 1 00 Mult Pre Torque Bias Subtracts an effective voltage to actual volts 0 6 00 0 00 0 00 pre torque command voltage Pre Torque Mult Scales pre torque command 10 00 10 00 1 00 1 0 Zero Speed Level Threshold for zero speed logic output 96 0 99 99 25 00 1 00 Zero Speed Time Time before zero speed logic output is Sec 0 9 99 0 10 0 10 declared true Up Dwn Threshold Threshold for detection of up or down 96 0 9 99 1 00 1 00 direction Mtr Torque Limit Motoring torque limit 96 0 250 0 200 0 200 0 Regen Torq Limit Regenerating torque limit 96 0 250 0 200 0 200 0 3 27 Startup amp Drive Adjustment MeE Table 3 3 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Closed Loop Decel Rate when decreasing elevator speed Flux Wkn Factor Defines the torque limit at higher speeds 60 0 100 0 100 0 100 Ana Out 1 Offset Subtracts an effective voltage to actual 96 99 9 99 9 0 00 0 00 analog output 1 Ana Out 2 Offset Subtracts an effective voltage to ac
212. erform properly the car needs to be properly balanced Geared cars are typically balanced with 40 50 of the cars rated capacity To confirm this the following procedure must be followed 1 Access the car top Run the car on inspection to the center of the hoistway Stop the car so the crosshead on the counterweight is exactly adjacent the crosshead on the car 2 Placea chalk mark on the cables in the machine room and mark the hoist motor so that while the car is run from the machine room you will be able to tell when the car passes through the center of the hoistway Move the car to a convenient floor Place 40 of the car s rated capacity in the car On inspection run the car so it about 10 feet above the center of the hoistway Place an Amprobe on one of the leads to the hoist motor While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car down on inspection operation through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary 7 Place the car about 10 feet below the center of the hoistway o etw 3 82 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Mitsubishi A500 Variable Frequency Drive 8 While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car up through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary s
213. error LOW OIL 9 Low oil sensor LOW OIL SW activated 10 State 10 STATE 10 11 Drive fault DRIVE FAULT tripped 12 Drive fault FLT DETECTD detected 13 Fault resetting FLT RESETNG 14 Fault resetting off FLT RES WAIT 15 Too many drive TOO MANY FLTS faults 16 Up relevel time UP RELEV T O out 17 Down relevel tim DN REVEL TO eout 18 Up run timeout UP RUN T O 19 Down run time DN RUN T O out 20 Up slowdown UP SLDN T O timeout 21 Down slowdown DN SLDN T O timeout 22 Up normal termi UP NORM TERM nal Contents Index _MCE Web 5 17 Tricon Configuration MeE Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 282 and HHU Version 6 262 03 07 23 Down normal ter DN NORM TERM minal 25 Drive Control O No error Error 1 Safety line open SAFETY LINE 2 Drive cannot run CANNOT RUN UP up 3 Drive cannot run CANNOT RUN DN down 4 Drive cannot run DRIVE FAILURE 5 Rope gripper ROPE GRIPPER activated 6 Door failure DOOR FAILURE 7 Relevel oscillation RELEVEL OSC 8 State 8 STATE 8 5 18 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index__ _MCE Web Car Errors Main Menus This screen shows the last 50 errors that occurred on the controller The first error listed Error number 1 is the last error that occurred on the controller As a new error occurs the oldest error drops off the list if there are over 50 errors Following is a list of possible errors Note that erro
214. est Recall Procedure Upon activation of a Code Blue call input the dispatcher will send the closest car available for recall to the floor where the call was made The dispatcher will select cars in the following order Carson normal group operation Cars on Simplex operation Cars on Independent Attendant if enabled Carson Fire Recall Phase I if enabled Once selected a car will flash the Code Blue Indicator cancel all car and hall calls and proceed non stop to the Code Blue recall floor Once at the floor the corresponding door will open and remain open for as long as the Code Blue button is activated plus the Code Blue wait time set See Dispatcher Parameters Description below Dispatcher I O All Code Blue call inputs and outputs are located on the dispatcher They start at the next 8 call group after the last hall call and are located in order of bottom floor to top floor front door first then rear door Car 1 O An indicator light must be connected to the Code Blue Indicator output This light will turn ON when the car is in Code Blue Recall operation or in Hospital Emergency oper ation Car Parameters Description The car group assignments table must be filled with a Y for every floor and door where the car will answer Code Blue calls Floor Number 1 32 Floor Designation Contents Index _MCE Web 1 19 Tricon General I nformation Mek Dispatcher Parameters Description The dispatcher floor ta
215. etect a closed door 49 Rdoor op Test jumped yes no no yes no When set to Yes computer will verify that gate and locks while gate and locks are open when close limit is closing made 50 Rdoor op Flag 3 yes no no yes no 51 Rdoor op cam drop tim O 25 5 JO sec If the cam does not drop within this time an eout 0 no cam error will be generated If the door has no cam set this to zero 0 52 Rdoor op Hold close 0 25 5 JO Sec Extends operation of open and close relays and open limits opened after limits have been reached Used on door operators that have no hysteresis on their limits and also to ensure that the doors will make the gate and locks after the close limit has been reached 53 Signals Advanced posi yes no no yes no If set to Yes position indicator and lantern tion indicator enable signals are advanced 54 Signals Use last two yes no no yes no Set to Yes to convert the last two hall posi pos outputs as direction tion indicator outputs into direction arrows arrows 55 Signals Flash PI on yes no no yes no If setto yes car PI will flash if the door is on nudging or out of ser nudging or the car is out of service vice 56 Signals Pulse buzzer yes no no yes no Pulse buzzer when on nudging when on nudging 5 41 Tricon Configuration Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen MeE faults count 57 Signals Flash and pulse O
216. eted at the factory In order to program car speed settings and drive readouts car speed is scaled to motor speed using parameters O1 03 and E1 04 adjusts range setting for all preset speeds This scaling was completed at the factory using survey information Verify that this information matches the specifications of the elevator Parameter O1 03 Display Scaling Display scaling has been fixed at Feet Per Minute and may not be changed to use other units The followingis an explanation of the scaling process DO NOT make changes at this time The first digit defines the number of decimal places Thenext four define the speed in feet minute at maximum motor speed speed of motor elevator at 60Hz 3 64 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Yaskawa F7 Drive Default Setup Unless your elevator is 100FPM this value will be different in your control ler 100FPM Table 3 10 Yaskawa F7 Speed Scaling 100 FPM 11000 1 1000 100 0FPM Parameter Display First Digit Next Four Display Result at a motor speed of 60Hz Number of Decimal Speed of Car at Maxi Places mum Motor Speed 150FPM Table 3 11 Yaskawa F7 Speed Scaling 150 FPM 11500 1 1500 150 0FPM Parameter Display First Digit Next Display Result at a Four motor speed of 60Hz Number of Decimal Speed of Car at Maxi Places mum Motor Speed 200FPM Table 3 12 Yaskawa F7 Speed Scaling 200 FPM 12000 1 2000 2
217. ets front and rear door zone magnets Door zone magnets are placed to the left front door zone and right rear door zone of the lev eling magnet Consistent measurement is the key to good installation Cut a stick to the slowdown distance required for the job and use it to install all one floor run magnets For three speed jobs cut a second stick for the high speed magnets This will ensure consistent slowdown targets Even if the targets are installed at an incorrect distance by up to 2 inches the speed board in most cases may be adjusted to accommodate Floor leveling magnets are placed in the center of the tape Up slowdown magnets are placed on the left side of the tape Down slowdown magnets are placed on the right side of the tape One floor only One floor only Selective Three speed Two speed Three speed Front and Rear doors High speed down magnetic strip One floor run down magnetic strip Rear door zone South pole magnet Floor level Floor level magnetic strip magnetic strip Front door zone South pole magnet Distance determined by tables One floor runup magnetic strip High speed up magnetic strip Contents Index _MCE Web 2 29 Installation Nes Leveling Magnet I nstallation A row guide and a level guide are provided to help with magnet installation Therowguideis a five inch long by 2 inch wide ma
218. exhibits poor final leveling the dead zone should be opened so that you can adjust the stop without overshooting the floor To open the dead zone move the LU and LD in the leveling stick closer together Always adjust the car for a proper stop then adjust the leveling switches for a level floor stop Adding torque boost will help low leveling speed regulation but you may raise the current to a point that will cause the drive to trip on overcurrent or even be damaged Always mon itor drive current at low speed to ensure torque boost is no higher than needed Mitsubishi Open Loop Volts Hertz Parameters The drive is shipped with the following parameters The parameters listed are those which have been adjusted differently than Mitsubishi factory drive defaults Table 3 15 Mitsubishi Open Loop Drive Parameters Par number Parameter name Parameter function Default value 0 Torque boost Greater torque at low speed 696 or less 1 Maximum frequency Maximum frequency limit 60 Hz 2 Minimum frequency Minimum frequency limit 2 5 Hz 3 Base frequency Motor nominal operating frequency 60 Hz 4 High speed High speed setting 60 Hz 5 Int speed Approach and low inspection speed setting 12 Hz 6 Int speed Leveling speed setting 8Hz 7 Acceleration time 1 7 Sec 8 Deceleration time 2 Sec 9 Thermal overload relay Adjust to the motor nameplate Motor nominal current 10 DC Injection brake Adjusts
219. g 1200 as our synchronous speed we find the setting of O1 03 with the following formula 1 Synchronous RPM x Contract Speed Rated RPM 2 1200RPM x 150FPM 1100RPM Car Speed at Synchronous RPM Car Speed at Synchronous RPM 3 163 6 FPM Car Speed at Synchronous RPM 4 11636 01 03 Setting Speed Set Up Now that scaling is set you can set the preset speeds of the elevator If you attempt to adjust the preset speeds before adjusting the scaling you will be limited to the maximum default speed of 100FPM There are four speeds that can be set Table 3 13 Yaskawa F7 Speed Set Up Parameter Name Rule Range Default Setting D1 02 High Must be gt D1 07 0 0 Max Scale 100 0 FPM D1 03 High Level Must be gt D1 05 amp D1 07 0 0 30 0 13 0 FPM D1 05 Level Must be D1 03 0 0 15 0 2 5 FPM D1 07 Combination Must be gt D1 03 amp D1 02 0 0 Max Scale 42 0 FPM Inspection D1 17 Jog Overrides all speeds 0 0 Max Scale 42 0 FPM Intermediate The actual minimum speed available in volts per hertz V f mode open loop will be 1 5Hz of motor speed The minimum speed in FPM will change with changes to scaling The actual minimum setting will automatically change with changes in scaling Example at the default scaling of 100 FPM the minimum speed in V f mode is 2 5 FPM Example at 300 FPM the minimum speed in V f mode is 7 5 FPM This
220. g motor data into the drive Motor HP or kW from nameplate into RATED MTR POWER Motor AC voltage from nameplate into RATED MTR VOLTS Motor AC frequency usually 60 cycles into RATED EXCIT FREQ Motor nameplate full load amps into RATED MTR CURR The number of motor poles into MOTOR POLES Motor RPM with full load at the correct frequency into RATED MTR SPEED 3 Placea balanced load into the car Reduce the car speed to 7096 of contract speed by changingthe value of SPEED COMMAND 8 A3 4 Runthe car from top to bottom and back While the car is running monitor the motor torque found under Display Power Data D2 The torque should be between 15 If not verify that the car is balanced correctly Ifthe car does not have compensation the motor torque will vary depending on car hoistway position Verify that the motor torque is between 1596 as the car passes through the center of the hoistway 5 Verify that the flux reference found under Display Power Data D2 is 100 If not reduce the car speed until it is 6 With the car running from top to bottom and back observe EST NO LOAD CURR found under Display Power Data D2 Enter this estimated value into the parameter 90 NO LOAD CURR 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 until the value of the EST NO LOAD CURR and the NO LOAD CURR are equal 8 Verify that the motor torque is still 15 and flux reference is still 100 If not adjust the NO LOAD CURR as needed
221. gnetic block with markings indicating mag net row location on the 2 inch Row guide tape The level guide is a nine inch long magnetic strip used to position the floor level magnets vertically 1 Bringthe carto floor level Place the row guide across the top of the sensor head i 2 Move the elevator down Place the 9 inch level guide strip vertically under the cen ter of the row guide I 2 30 Manual 42 02 2100 Row 3 Down slowdown or rear door zone Row 1 Up slowdown or front door zone Row 2 Leveling Steel GPS NO Completing I nstallation 3 Usethe row guide to locate the leveling row typically row 2 center row but check your job prints to be certain Remove the backing from a leveling magnet strip and place it carefully in the correct row just under the level guide magnet AN 4 Repeat these steps for each floor in the building Installation Slowdown Magnets guidelines only No High Speed Operation Front Doors ONLY MeE One floor run up and down magnets are required on all jobs The distance from floor level cen ter of the leveling magnet to the top of a down slowdown magnet or to the bottom of an up slowdown magnet is called the slowdown distance Magnet placement instructions for your particular job are in the job print package provided The following descriptions are general Forjobs not requiring high speed operation slowdown distance is typica
222. gripper fault is detected If the detected fault is a rope gripper fault rope gripper contacts GOUT 1A 1B and GOUT 2A 2B are also opened Board monitoring inputs are Motor Shaft Speed and Position A speed position monitoring sensor is installed on the elevator motor Please refer to T Limit 2K Motor Speed Position Sensor on page 2 13 The cable connecting the sensor to the limit board incorporates single ended to differen tial signal conversion circuitry for improved immunity to electrical noise USL Up Slow Down Input from the last up slowdown to open before the car reaches the top landing HUSL Up High Speed Slow Down Input from the first up slowdown to open before the 4 car reaches the top landing HDSL Down High Speed Slow Down Input from the first down slowdown to open before the car reaches the bottom landing DSL Down Slow Down Input from the last down slowdown to open before the car reaches the bottom landing The terminal hoistway slowdown switches must be set to open at the same time the normal selector slowdown magnet comes on The high speed slowdowns HUSL and HDSL are used for contract speeds greater than 200 FPM DZBP Door Zone Bypass Input indicates that the door locks are being bypassed When this input is on car speed should not exceed 125 FPM after the high speed learn trip has been performed UP Indicates that the car is to move in the up direction DN Indicates that the caris to mov
223. gripper board enters nor mal operation DS25 is on continuously In normal operation the board checks and responds to the following Car speed at limit switches If excessive the safety will open to prevent the car from going beyond the floor Car speed above contract speed Car direction If the car is commanded to move in one direction and its speed exceeds 62 FPM in the other direction for greater than 1 second the safety circuit will open In this event the board will automatically reset after the car has halted for longer than 2 seconds If a run has begun and speed remains at zero but a slowdown is broken the safety circuit will open and a tach failure fault will be detected UP and DN inputs are both off indicatingthat the car is not in motion and the limit board senses speed Safety will be opened Car speed on inspection exceeds 125 FPM DZBP Door Zone Bypass is on and car speed exceeds 125 FPM Relay sequencing test fails Each time the car comes to a halt the board sequentially one at a time tests three relays for the gripper and monitors the result Relays are tested individually to prevent the gripper from applying and opening the safety circuit Contents Index _MCE Web 4 17 Release to Normal Operation Mek Fault Operation Sum of lighted LEDs Fault ID Misi oo O Tz AN w TN NWN N 0o o o nD WN Qo A A A 2 4 8 16 32 EM NN 1 4 7 5 Overspeed at HDSL Table 4 3 When a fault occurs
224. h write The display should say clear all parameters You will have to change all factory default parameters values to the ones shown in the table for open loop operation It is best to start by running the car in the open loop mode as you have done to ensure you have entered all of the parameters properly The auto tune without the encoder board installed will have to be redone as well as the 300 parameters to run with the encoder and the higher performance modes Table 3 17 A500 Parameters Closed Loop Speed Control Par Parameter name Parameter function number 29 Accel Decel Profile 0 Linear Accel decel ramp 1 S shaped Accel decel ramp A 2 S shaped Accel decel ramp B 4 S shaped Accel decel Ratio 144 Motor Poles Motor Poles 120 frequency RPM 900 RPM 8 but use 4 to auto tune 1200 RPM 6 1800 RPM 4 359 Encoder rotation Looking at the motor shaft if forward rotation UP direction is clockwise set to 0 otherwise set to 1 367 Speed feedback range This parameter is used in mode 0 and not in mode 1 or 2 Sync Speed Full load speed of poles 120 Example 1800 RPM 1750 X 4 poles 1 67HZ 120 368 Feed back Gain Suggested setting 1 369 Encoder Pulses rev Typically 1024 check your encoder 3 86 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Mitsubishi A500 Variable Frequency Drive Table 3 17 A500 Parameters Closed Loop Speed Control 370 Control Mode 0
225. he car is going too fast beyond contract speed The Limit board checks if the car is moving in the proper direction If the car is told to go in one direction and its speed exceeds 2096 of contract speed in the opposite direction for greater than 1 2 second it will also cause a trip After the board trips it will automatically reset after the car has halted for more than 2 seconds Tachometer disconnected faults will be detected if a run has begun detected speed remains 0 and a slowdown is broken Atrip will occur when the UP and DN inputs are both off indicating that the car is not in motion but the Limit board detects an active speed signal The safety will open A trip will occur if the speed of the car on inspection is greater than 125 FPM A trip will occur if DZBP is on and the car exceeds 125 FPM 4 8 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Limit Board Adjustment 2K Limit Gripper Board The 2K Limit Gripper board is used if the controller is A17 1 2000 CSA B44 00 compliant Through an input from a quadrature speed position sensor on the elevator motor and 16 dis crete inputs from hoistway switches and monitoring relays the board monitors car speed direction position and status Refer to the drawings package for connection information The board incorporates both speed limiting and rope gripper control functions The board opens three safety contacts SAF 1A 1B SAF 2A 2B SAF 3A 3B if a limit or a rope
226. he drive default settings Refer to the HPV 900 manual for a full parameter description Using the HPV900 Drive Programmer The drive programmer is used to program the drive and display drive data There are three menu levels in the drive They are the Menu level the Sub menu level and the Entry level There are five keys on the front of the program mer These keys perform different functions depending upon the active menu level When the programmer is at the Main Menu level the left and right arrows move the program mer between the Main Menu selections The up and down keys move the programmer into the various Sub Menus at each Main Menu selection Pressing the Enter key will move the pro grammer into the Sub Menu currently displayed on the programmer When the programmer is at the Sub Menu level the up and down arrows display various param eters in the Sub Menu Pressing the Escape key will move the programmer back to the Main Menu level Pressing the Enter key while at the Sub Menu level moves the programmer into the Entry level to modify the displayed parameter At the Entry level the left and right arrows move a cursor to highlight data When a digit is highlighted pressing the up arrow will increase the value and pressing the down arrow will decrease it Pressing the Enter key will save the value displayed on the programmer Pressing the Escape key will move the programmer back to the Sub Menu level 3 42 Manual 42 02 2T00 Conten
227. he motor it is necessary to program motor character istics into the drive This can be done in a couple of ways however for elevator applications the simplest method is to use the drives Static Auto Tune feature In order for auto tune to complete it is necessary to force close the output contactor Press the Menu key until the Auto Tune menu appears Press Data Enter Enter the following data Parameter Data Description T1 01 1 Auto tune no rotate T1 02 Motor rated power If motor data is in horse power multiply HP 0 746 in Kw T1 03 Rated Voltage Enter 9096 of line voltage Line Voltage x 0 90 i e 230VAC x 0 90 207VAC or 208 VAC x 0 90 187VAC T1 04 Motor Rated Cur Full load amperage rating of the motor rent T1 05 Motor Rated Fre Generally 60Hz quency T1 06 Number of Poles Check the list of motor speeds in the section on scaling Find the number of poles for your motor speed T1 07 Rated Motor Speed Speed of the motor in RPM at Rated Frequency This will be the synchro nous speed minus the slip percentage T1 08 Encoder PPR Encoder pulses per revolution Once the above data is entered a keypad message should appear press the run key to start auto tune The drive will send current to the motor the process will take up to 1 minute The keypad display will advise if the tune was successful The drive will automatically load data to the proper parameters Normal Speed L
228. he proper locations 613 value transferred to Function 4 Arm Ohms 614 value transferred to Function 5 Arm L 615 value transferred to Function 51 Field L R 3 90 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Magnetek DSD 412 DC Drive I nspection Start Up 1 Ifthecardoes not run up at a controlled speed when pressing the Up button take the actions listed in this chart IF THI S HAPPENS DO THIS Car runs up very fast until drive trips Swap wires TB1 4 B and TB1 5 B Car runs down very fast until drive trips Turn off main line power and wait 60 seconds Swap motor field connections F1 amp F2 Car runs down at a controlled speed Turn off main line power and wait 60 seconds Swap motor field connections F1 amp F2 Swap wires TB1 4 B and TB1 5 B 2 While runningthe car on inspection vary the inspection pot and observe the car to make sure car speed varies 3 Connectthe red meter lead to the TB1 68 drive terminal Connect the black meter lead to the TB1 63 drive terminal As the car runs adjust the inspection pot until 0 7 volts appears on the meter If the car is running down the polarity will be negative If the car is running up the polarity will be positive 4 Handtachthe car It should be running at 1096 of contract speed If not modify drive 3 parameter 11 Motor RPM to achieve the correct speed Drive Faults Drive faults will be indicated on the display as an
229. her devices that are wired in at this time will open the safety circuit Physically verify that all hoistway doors are closed and locked Controller Power Up After powering up the controller check the following Power LEDs on Relay Board ON If not verify all Hey PEG transformer and power supply voltage levels are TORET OEN correct per the prints xp We TS parte E SAF LED on relay board ON If not refer to the m m T onr ux job prints and check that all safety string connec 2899s t tions are correct Locks LED ON If not find the open door lock Gate LED ON If not adjust the gate so it is closed when the doors are fully closed Limit board relay should be energized Temporarily jump the SF1 and SF2 contacts on the limit board until the board can be set up properly UNT DNT LED ON Up normal limit Down normal limit If not troubleshoot the nor mal directional limits Contents Index _MCE Web 2 41 I nstallation ek 1 024 CAR Boards are Communicating with the MPU Board To ver ify check the status of the three 3 LEDs on the top left hand of the I O24 labeled CTRL x boards To proceed the green LED on the boards must be blinking If the LED indication is e Solid Red The I O24 CTRL board has not started up properly This may indicate that the I O24 board is bad Solid Amber The T O24 CTRL board has not finished initializing Solid Green TheT O24 CTRL bo
230. id red Board has not started up properly May indicate a bad board Solid amber Board has not completed initializing 2 Solid green Board has started properly and is sending data to MPU LED should start ing blinking after about 15 seconds Solid green with solid amber Board has incorrect system configuration All other boards will probably be indicating normal operation No LEDs Check that the four pin power cable from the PW5 board is properly con nected Check that 5 volt DC power is at all red and black power connections on PW5 board Check that 110 volt power is present at IP1 and IP2 fuses on Relay Board 7 After verifying that the green LED on each I O 24 board is blinking or correcting the problem if they are not shut down the controller before continuing with field connec tions uF WN Installation A eE Motor Brake and Encoder Connection A Danger Verify that power to the controller has been shut off at the main disconnect before proceed ing with connections Motor Connection If you are reusing an existing hoist motor you must check it for insulation breakdown before proceeding Insulation Breakdown Test 1 Disconnect all motor and brake wiring 2 Perform an insulation test between motor and brake connection points and the body of the motor Use a Megohm meter to subject the insulation to the same high voltage that would be present during elevator operation A minimum insulation resistance of 100k Ohm
231. if the car speed is 200 feet per minute or less Keep the elevator away from the terminal floors at this time 3 While the car is running monitor speed with a hand tach The car should be running at contract speed 5 If not adjust CONTRACT MTR SPEED A to obtain the cor rect speed Observe deceleration as the car approaches the floor The car should decelerate rapidly and there should be two noticeable steps of speed prior to stopping at the floor If there are not confirm that the tape reader is properly installed and the slowdown magnets are placed the correct distance from the floor Change DECEL RATE 0 A2 to 3 5 ft 2 This will yield a slower rate of deceleration and less approach distance to the floor Again run the car and observe approach into the floor If the car still has too much slow down distance decrease DECEL RATE 0 A2 to 0 1ft s less than the present rate Repeat until the car is cominginto the floor with about 3 to 6 inches of approach Modify the DECEL J ERK IN 0 A2 and DECEL J ERK OUT 0 A2 parameters for a smooth approach to the floor with 1 to 2 inches of sustained leveling If there is not enough sustained leveling the car may overshoot intermittently and relevel 3 38 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 9 Modify the ACCEL J ERK OUT 0 A2 rate to the same value that was entered into the DECEL J ERK IN 0 A2 parameter 10 If the rated speed of the car
232. in parameters are used to smooth the ride of the car Parameter 372 is the proportional speed loop gain Its starting point is 150 You need to have this high enough to handle the loads but not so high that the car is unstable Parameter 373 is the integral gain of the speed loop A lower number will increase the time the drive will take to respond to a speed variation Its starting point is 5 S Curve Adjustments When the encoder board is installed S curve rounding can be adjusted by doing the following 1 The accel and decel ramp time set in parameter 7 and 8 function normally 2 Rounding can be adjusted when you have set parameter 29 to a 4 3 The accel rounding is parameter 380 The decel rounding is parameter 381 4 Each rounding parameter is normally set to 50 Unusual Operation in Mode 1 or 2 When the drive is run in mode 10r 2 and you encounter unusual performance high current with no motor speed unusual motor noise not present in mode 0 see the section below on clearing all of the parameters to factory setting Clearing the Drive Parameters to Factory Default Ifthe drive performs unusually in mode 1 or 2 of closed loop operation you will have to clear the drive to the factory default values You should clear all of the parameters with the encoder board installed 1 From the PU mode push help 2 times 2 Movethe cursor with the arrow keys to 4 Pr Clear then push read 3 Moveto 2 clear all then push read 4 Pus
233. ing Dropping Dropping of brake sequence 10 Lift error LIFT ERROR 11 Drop error DROP ERROR 12 State 12 State 12 22 Field 0 I nit 1 Economy Economy Economy field 2 Forcing Forcing Transition from economy to full field 3 Full Field Full Field Full field 4 Acceleration Acceleration Field from start of run until transition to run field 5 Run Run field Running field 6 Wait Wait Time after a stop that the fields remain at full field setting 5 16 Manual 42 02 2T00 Main Menus Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 282 and HHU Version 6 262 03 07 7 State 7 STATE 7 8 State 8 State 8 23 Pattern 0 init 1 Off Off Pattern is off zero speed 2 Start delay Start delay Delay after run start for pattern start 3 Leveling Leveling Pattern set for leveling speed 4 Approach Approach Pattern set for approach speed 5 Medium speed Medium speed Pattern set for medium speed 6 High speed High speed Pattern set for high speed 7 Inspection speed Insp speed Pattern set for inspection speed 8 Restart speed Restart The car restarted from between floors 9 State 9 State 9 24 Drive Error 0 No error 1 Up slowdown UP SLDN T O timeout 2 Down slowdown DN SLDN T O timeout 3 Relays pick error PICK ERROR 4 Relays drop error DROP ERROR 5 Brake pick error BRK PICK ERR 6 Brake drop error BRK DROP ERR 7 Overload error OVERLOAD 8 Low oil
234. ircuit output stopping the car if any of the following conditions are detected Thecarruns at 15096 of the learned inspection speed after the inspection speed has been learned This is used for inspection operation before the limit board speed feedback has been scaled at high speed Please refer to Operation Inspection Setup Before High Speed on page 4 7 Thecarruns at 1096 above contract speed or one floor run speed This allows detection of an overspeed of the one floor run learned speed as well as high speed multi floor run overspeeds The car exceeds 30 of contract speed in the opposite direction from the intended direc tion Direction slowdown inputs operate without any tach feedback This allows a tach loss to be detected Thecaris moved on inspection or with doors open at a speed greater than 125 FPM Contents Index _MCE Web 4 3 Release to Normal Operation Mek Input Definitions Limit board connections and features are shown below and described on the following pages Figure 4 2 Limit Board Diagram To Motor Encoder if used Common To RB Board ACTIVE INPUTS FAULTS USL io USL OD Lenio HUSL LeD2 HUSA ryan es HDSL LED3 BTIHDSL OEO LED 12 Analog Tachometer IN if used DSL uos IDSL rar us Ge Tach Common DZBP ups DIFTUP CN eon N SEE TABLE amp Tach Input UP upo MIDN e genus FOR LED 10 D
235. is made up LGATE Lights green when gate contacts are all closed LDGP Gate Lock Bypass lights green when either bypass switch is enabled 110VDC Lights red when 110VDC power is present 24VDC Lights red when 24VDC power is present LDFZ Lights red when the car is in a front door zone LDRZ Lights red when the car is in a rear door zone Relay Sequence The car is not allowed to start if the Relay Sequence input to the Control ler board is OFF The seven LEDs below are associated with the relays in the sequence The relays monitor various inputs If the monitored input is active the relay will change state the associated LED will light red LPR1 LPR2 LEDs for Potential relays 1 and 2 respectively LUR LED for Up Run relay LDR LED for Down Run relay LMSR LED for Medium Speed relay LHSR LED for High Speed relay LBKR LED for Brake relay Additional circuit boards may be used including EXT 1 board Used for additional input output capability BMS board Used to interface to a modem for central monitoring Door board s Used if required for specific door operators HHSW board Modem interface for monitoring applications SLH board Fuse board for specific applications CE Fixture boards with LON interface Used when extensive external fixtures are required 1 8 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Cartop Station Cartop Station The standard cartop station provides both
236. ist sent with the controller by viewing the modified parameter section on the drive keypad in comparison to settings on the list sent with the controller If your system was programmed to Flux Vector mode at the factory changing to V f may alter some preset speeds that are set to minimum speeds These will have to be manually repro grammed when the drive is switched back to Flux Vector mode later in this procedure e Verify that the line voltage in parameter E1 01 is set correctly to actual line voltage Set the motors name plate full load amps in parameter E2 0 1 Using the Up Down toggle on the Relay Board attempt to run the car fthe motor moves in the opposite direction stop the car and Reverse any two of the hoist motor wires Verify that elevator operates in the proper direction Run elevator up and down to check the hoistway Please refer to Scaling Car Speed to Motor on page 3 64 for V f Open Loop controls Contents Index _MCE Web 3 67 3 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 14 Yaskawa F7 Drive Parameters MeE Field Adjustable Parameter cells are shaded All other parameters should be set to the values shown in the Field MCE Set column WARNING Parameters with an asterisk must be set correctly for your motor machine job 3 68 Manual 42 02 2T00 Digital Operator em z Setting MCE Field No
237. itches Spd Command Src Speed Command Source Analog input Multi step Multi step Multi step Serial Run Command Src Run Command Source External TB 1 External External TB Serial TB1 Serial extern Hi Lo Gain Src High low gain change switch source External TB 1 Internal Internal Serial Internal Speed Reg Type Chooses speed regulator Elev spd reg Elev spd Elev spd reg Pi speed reg reg Motor Rotation Allows user to reverse direction of Forward Forward Forward or motor rotation Reverse Reverse Spd Ref Release Determines when speed reference Reg release Reg Reg release release is asserted Brake picked release Cont Confirm Src Determines if an external logic input None None External TB is used for contactor confirmation External TB 1 Pre Torque Source Determines if a pre torque command None None None is used and if used determines the Analog input source of the pre torque command Serial Pre Torque Latch Chooses if analog pre torque com Not latched Not Not latched mand is latched Latched latched Ptorq Latch Clck Determines source of pre torque External TB 1 External External TB latch control if used Serial tbl Fault Reset Src Fault reset source External TB 1 External External TB Serial tbl Automatic Overspd Test Src Determines external logic source to External TB 1 External External TB trigger overspeed test Serial tb1 Brake Pick Src If drive controls mechanical brake l Internal Internal Internal determine
238. ive is trying to regulate speed too closely Too small a number may cause to car to overshoot the floor due to poor tracking 41 System Inertia This parameter is the inertia of the elevator system It is the time in seconds it takes to accelerate the motor to base speed Typical values are from 0 5 to 2 5 Too large a number may cause vibration and too small a number will cause the speed regulator to become sluggish 42 Stability This parameter adjusts the amount of speed regulator damping This value is usually left at the default of 1 0 8 Current Regulator Crossover Adjusts the bandwidth of the current regulator This value is typically left at the default of 500 Too small a number will cause vibration in the car usually at full speed or going into or out of full speed Too large a number will cause the motor to become sluggish S Curve Pattern Adjustments The Tricon control generates an S shape speed pattern The output provides a step less 0 10VDC bipolar speed reference to the speed reference input of the DSD 412 drive The drive is configured to use this voltage and polarity to run 0 to contract speed in a forward or reverse direction The S curve and speed pots have been set at the factory Only minor adjustment will be required The accel rate has been set to a slow rate full counterclockwise The decel rate has been set to a fast rate full dockwise These settings will help with your first high speed runs The spe
239. ixtures are being driven Heavy Duty CE Driver Board Connection to Tricon serial network HHU programming jack A er gag E Light Duty CE Driver Board 5 t A 7 Please refer to Position Indicators View amp Edit Screens CTOP CSTA or HALL Board on page 5 57 if your system uses the CE light duty a3 Each system is factory configured according to particular job requirements before shipment Typically you will not need to program position indicator outputs but will only need to connect them as shown in the prints for the particular job 5 54 Manual 42 02 2T00 _Contents Index _MCE Web Main Menus When the screen is selected from the menu the first floor is displayed However the first car floor may not be the cars bottom floor since in a group not all cars may go to the bottom floor Figure 5 7 CEIndicator Screen Table 5 22 CE Indicator Set Up Parameters Editable v Explanation Value Floor Number Floor Number See note above 1 32 Indicator Key in what is to be displayed Use key to start Use keypad to enter a name up to five entry characters The characters can be let ters digits or punctuation marks The Hand Held Unit lists floors in groups of three upper right hand corner of display Use the up down arrow keys or 2 or 8 keys to move the cursor to the floor you want to set up To select a floor to view 20rup arrow key to move backwards one
240. l Conditions Empty Floors If a floor table entry has all flags off a No entered under each variable that floor becomes an empty floor The car will not stop at this floor It will not change the posi tion indicator or light the lanterns The car position indicator will skip this floor The floor will not exist as far as the car is concerned Setting Openings Rear Doors All existing openings must be set in the floor table The setting of at least one rear opening in the floor table will activate the rear door control soft ware If a rear door openingis set by mistake in a car that does not have rear openings the rear door opening should be cleared and then the car should be reset by switching off power This will disable the rear door control software e Setting Hall Calls If the car is a group car with no local hall riser no hall calls need be set in the floor table If the car does have a conspicuous riser simplex riser then the hall calls for that riser should be set If a hall call is not set in the floor table its corresponding input will not be allocated maginary floors An imaginary floor is a floor that has no openings and where the car does not stop but that has a position in the position indicator It could be described as a chalk mark in the elevator hatch The slowdown vanes or magnets for this floor must be installed like any other floor but no leveling vane or magnet is needed since the car will not stop at this
241. ld be positive In the Display D1 menu monitor the Speed Feedback parameter Run the car in the down direction The speed feedback should be negative If not reverse the A and A sig nals from the encoder to the drive While using the inspection up down buttons to run the car use a hand tach to check car speed It should be moving at approximately the same speed as that displayed on the drive If not using the drive programmer access the Adjust AO menu Access User Switches AL Adjust the Contract Motor Spd parameter until the car is running at exactly the same speed as displayed by Speed Feedback Drive Parameter Reference The following table describes drive parameters and provides a recommended setting for each Refer to the previous section for initial programming Please refer to HPV 900 Startup on page 3 41 Table 3 5 HPV 900 Drive Parameters MCE Field MCE No Parameter Description Unit Range Defaults Set Adjust AO A1 Drive Contract Car Spd Elevator Contract Speed fom 0 3000 0 1 Contract Mtr Spd Motor Speed at contract speed rpm 50 3000 1130 Response Speed regulator sensitivity rad 1 0 20 0 10 10 sec Inertia System inertia sec 0 25 50 00 2 0 2 0 Inner Loop Xover Inner speed loop crossover frequency rad 0 1 20 0 2 0 2 0 with Ereg speed regulator sec Gain Reduce Mult Speed regulator response in low gain 10 100 100 100 mode G
242. leration to level ing speed Set to 4 0 ft s The remaining parameters in the S Curves A2 sub menu are not used 1 w 5 6 Access the Multistep Ref A3 sub menu The first parameter is SPEED COMMAND L Sets the leveling speed of the car Set to 3 5 ft min SPEED COMMAND 2 Sets approach speed of the car Set to 12 0 ft min SPEED COMMAND 3 Sets inspection speed of the car Set to 45 0 ft min SPEED COMMAND 4 Sets contract speed of the car if the car speed is 200 ft min or less Set to the cars rated speed If the car is rated for a speed greater than 200 ft min set to 200 ft min If the cars rated speed is greater than 200 ft min go to the SPEED COMMAND 8 parameter otherwise go to step 7 Set SPEED COMMAND 8 to the contract speed of the car The remaining parameters in the Multistep Ref A3 sub menu are not used L 2 Access the Power Convert A4 sub menu Go to the INPUT L L VOLTS parameter This parameter tells the drive what the input line to line voltage is This value is used by the drive to declare a low line voltage fault Set to the nominal AC voltage at the input to the drive Contents Index _MCE Web 3 43 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Nes 3 GototheAdjust AO sub menu Motor A5 The first parameter is MOTOR ID To obtain this value determine the motor speed at the rated excitation frequency without any slip The formula is 120 Rated Frequency No Slip Motor RPM If yo
243. lightly so average the value if necessary 9 Ignoring whether the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running up was greater than the value running down the car is too heavy Remove 100 pounds of weight from the car and repeat steps 8 through 10 until the recorded values are equal but have opposite polarity 10 Ignoring whether the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running down was greater than the value running up the car is too light Add 100 pounds of weight from the car and repeat steps 7 and 8 until the recorded values are equal but have opposite polarity When the values are equal but have opposite polarity the car is balanced Check how much weight is in the car It should be between 40 and 5096 of rated capacity If not the counter weighting needs to be adjusted If the car is too heavy weight needs to be added to the counter weight to get the car balanced between 40 and 5096 of rated capacity If the car is too light weight needs to be removed from the counterweight to get it balanced between 40 and 50 of rated capacity Do not proceed with the adjustment process until the car is properly balanced High Speed Adjustment and Gain Adjustment Thedrivehas slip compensation to allow it to compensate for motor slip at high speed as well as leveling speed The drive will regulate high speed if you set high speed parameter 4 to less than 60
244. limit section automatic resets 4 10 Manual 42 02 2T00 Limit Board Adjustment Press and hold S2 for 5 seconds to enter parameter mode DS25 will blink rapidly 16 times per second Parameter 1 car speed FPM value will be displayed on LEDs DS17 through DS22 Sum of lighted LEDs Value of parameter N oo o eo m N m y N N N o oo o0 Oo A QA A A A A 10 20 40 80 160 320 L 20 320 340 Press S1 to change the displayed parameter Press S2 to move to the next parameter Press S3 to exit parameter mode S3 Resets rope gripper Enters Exits Learn mode If board is in Parameter mode exits Parameter mode In Learn mode DS25 will blink 8 times per second and DS17 18 and 22 will be on steadily Please refer to Inspection Learn on page 4 14 Contents Index _MCE Web 411 Release to Normal Operation Nes Figure 4 4 2K Limit Gripper Board Refer to Rope Gripper Drawing for Connections O O Co Relay Board Quad Sensor Motor Shaft Speed amp Position Sensor GOUT 1A GOUT 1B GOUT 2A GOUT 2B GMON 2 110V OUT A KN T QAB Relay Board Relay to Relays page for connection VPPA 5 GND PGDA PGCA PGMA ROPE GRIPPER RESET A gagggmgmumu a e CEXIELIJ o Oo Oo OQ O O OQ O O0 alm aaa gaaAaAAaA A sl lig Yn GND Edn CAN GND m 9js z O azv z 2 0 2 0 o E a 3 oar Hoa Input Indicators
245. lly one foot of slowdown for every 50 FPM of contract speed OR the shortest floor height divided by 2 5 whichever is smaller The table below pro vides slowdown distances for non high speed operation This distance may need to be adjusted depending on the rotating equipment used One floor run speeds are typically under 200 FPM with 8 6 floors Speed Slowdown Distance Min Floor Height 50 FPM 1 0 2 6 100 FPM 2 0 4 6 125 FPM 2 6 5 6 150 FPM 3 0 6 6 175 FPM 3 6 7 6 200 FPM 4 0 8 6 Magnet placement For Up Slowdowns Measurement is from the cen ter of the leveling magnet to the bottom edge of the slowdown magnet For Down Slowdowns Measurement is from the center of the leveling magnet to the top edge of the slowdown magnet 2 32 Manual 42 02 2T00 All magnets are NORTH POLE Down slowdown Slowdown distance minus 6 inches Floor level Slowdown distance minus 6 inches Up slowdown Completing I nstallation No High Speed Operation Front amp Rear Doors When a car has both front and rear doors two additional magnets are required per floor Front door zone magnet For each floor a front door zone magnet is placed in tape row 1 immediately to the left of the floor level magnet Rear door zone magnet For each floor a rear door zone magnet is placed in tape row 3 immediately to the right of the floor level magnet Leveling and Slow
246. low voltage is declared Run Delay Timer Delays drive recognition of RUN sig sec 0 00 0 99 0 00 0 00 nal AB Zero Spd Lev Auto Brake Function N A to MCE 96 0 00 2 00 0 00 0 00 products AB Off Delay N A to MCE products sec 0 00 9 99 0 00 0 00 Contactor DO Dly N A to MCE products sec 0 00 5 00 0 00 0 00 TRQ Lim Msg Dly Amount of time drive is in torque sec 0 50 10 00 0 50 0 5 limit before Hit Torque Limit mes sage is displayed SER2 INSP SPD Defines serial mode 2 Inspection ft 0 100 30 30 only serial mode 2 min SER2 RS CRP SPD Defines creep speed used in rescue ft 0 100 10 10 mode min SER2 RS CPR Time Defines maximum time drive will ft 0 100 180 180 continue to run at rescue creep min speed only serial mode 2 SER2 FLT TOL Defines maximum time that may sec 0 0 2 0 0 04 0 04 elapse between valid run time mes sages before a serial fault is declared only serial mode 2 Rollback Gain Anti rollback gain 1 99 1 1 Notch Filter Frq Notch Filter Center Frequency Hz 5 60 20 20 Notch Filt Depth Notch filter maximum attenuation 0 100 0 0 MSPD Delay 1 4 Determines recognition time delay sec 0 00 10 0 10 00 0 00 3 8 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Table 3 1 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open Loop Magnetek HPV 600 zero when approaching contract ele vator speed A2 S Curves Accel Rate
247. lt 2 input is Not used activated Extrn Fault 3 External Fault 3 input is Not used activated Extrn Fault 4 External Fault 4 input is Not used activated Fan Alarm The heatsink cooling fan Check fan and connections Clean heatsink is not operating Fuse Fault The DC Bus fuse on the Check fuse If OK check motor connections Check motor for drive is open continuity from windings to ground If OK replace drive Ground Fault The sum of all phase currents has exceeded 5096 of the rated amper age of the drive Disconnect motor from drive Cycle power to drive If problem clears possible bad motor or wiring If problem does not clear possible bad system ground or bad drive Hit Torque Limit The measured current is equal or greater than the torque limit setting Verify car is balanced correctly Verify motor and drive sizing Can be delayed by increasing the value of the TRQ LIM MSG DLY A1 parameter Mtr id Fault Mtr Data Fault Invalid motor parame ters Check all drive parameters Cycle power to the drive If fault recurs go to the Utility menu and select Restore Defaults f fault persists replace Control board Note The Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameters to be set to their correct values Mtr Overload Motor has exceeded the motor overload curve Verify correct balancing of car Check for dragging brake or mechanical bind in machine or hoistway
248. ltage e V 13 adjusts Hold or Running voltage ACC 1adjusts ramp up rate C W faster DEC 1agjusts ramp down rate C W faster DEC2 and ACC2 are not used Figure 2 19 Brake Regulator Circuit P11 110 VDC 7 wh blue CTRL C2 RB C2 RB BK 1109 exyeJlg vl ACC DEC 123 4 1 2 1 2 0000 J1 1 V I 1 Brake Lift Voltage C W increases voltage J1 2 V I 2 Brake Releveling Voltage C W increases voltage J1 3 V I 3 Brake Hold Voltage C W increases voltage 1 GND ACC 1 Ramp Up Rate C W faster DEC 1 Ramp Down Rate C W faster Cawag Brake control unit Contents Index _MCE Web 2 43 Installation A eE If the sample brake resistor locations do not match your system consult your job prints for the correct location 1 Check that the brake coil has been properly connected to the controller 2 Connect a meter across the F and F terminals of the brake regulator Set the meter range high enough to measure the brake lifting voltage level for the job 3 With no inputs on at the 1 terminal of the regulator the V I 4 pot will be selected LED on Adjust the V 1 4 pot fully counterclockwise The meter should read approximately 30 volts 4 Turn the main line power OFF TEMPORARILY jump from P11 110VDC on the Relay Board to J 1 1 on the driver 5 Turn the main line power ON Run the car on inspection and adjust V T 1 pot until the b
249. lted ACTIVE FAULTS will display the present fault FAULT HIS TORY will display faults that have occurred previously Followingis a list of detected drive faults Listed after each fault is a description of what the fault is and suggested corrective action Table 3 4 HPV 600 Drive Faults Closed Loop Fault Description Corrective Action AtoD Fault Analog to digital con Cycle power to controller and see if fault clears If not replace verter on control board Control board not responding Brake Alarm Dynamic brake resistor Confirm motor data is correctly entered braking resistance is overcurrent connected and sized correctly and car is balanced correctly NOTE After drive stops alarm becomes a Brake IGBT Fault Brk Hold Fault Brake hold state does not match the com manded state Disabled Brk IGBT Fault Brake IGBT overcurrent Overcurrent of braking IGBT Fault latches but does not shut car down until it stops to allow passengers to safely exit Con firm motor data correctly entered into drive braking resistance connected and sized correctly car balanced correctly Brk Pick Fault Brake pick state does not match the com manded state Disabled Bridge Fault The power module is detecting an overcur rent or over tempera ture condition Overcurrent Check sizing and connection of dynamic braking resistor Check for short in motor wiring or windings Over temperature Check
250. lue i e 2 and 8 set to 10 121 Fire Open rear door yes no no yes no If set to Yes open rear instead of front door when at recall floor at fire Phase recall floor If set to no front door will open 5 45 Tricon Configuration MeE Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen yes no If set to Yes open rear instead of front door at fire Phase alternate recall floor If set to no front door will open 122 Fire Open the rear door yes no no when at alt recall floor 123 Independent Electric yes no no yes no If set to Yes electric eye will reopen doors eye will reopen doors on independent operation 124 Independent Allow yes no no yes no If Yes allow doors to close when no calls doors to close with no registered If OFF doors will not close if calls registered there are no car calls registered 125 Enable gate and locks yes no no yes no When set to yes gate and lock bypass bypass switches switches on RB board will be operational 126 Rope gripper 0 2 0 each No rope gripper gt 0 O none GAL rope gripper gt 1 1 GAL When set the 110 overspeed input is acti vated If not connected to the governor must be wired to 110VDC Changing this parameter requires a controller powerdown afterwards 127 Insp Open door if level yes no no yes no If set to Yes and on in car inspection doors at a floor and on IN CAR will open automatically if car is leveled at a insp floor
251. lue set by parameter 108 0 Zero speed 1 0 100 of contract speed 107 Tach Rate Gain Helps rope response in gearless elevators 96 0 30 0 0 0 0 0 Should not be adjusted from its default 0 0 unless required then in increments of 0 1 Higher values cause jittery ride 108 Gain Reduce Multiplier applied to parameter 40 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 Response when in low gain mode 110 Multistep Enable Allows enabling drive internal S curve func 0 Off OFF OFF tions 1 ON 150 Preset Speed S Used with internal S Curve functions FPM 0 1000 0 0 0 0 164 Curve 170 Accel Decel S Used for Acc Dec when internal S Curve is Sec 0 25 0 5 0 5 0 173 Curve used 174 Jerk S Curve Percent Jerk of S Curve 96 0 100 30 0 30 0 177 Motor machine job dependent Actual speed value entered in FPM However speed range maximum value is described as percentage of contract speed Speeds in excess of defined maximum will cause drive to generate fault 450 Encoder PPR P10 must be set correctly Incorrect value will cause under or over speed condition Note 1 Parameter 9 is equal to isolation transformer secondary voltage Note 2 Only entries in Field MCE column are changed after drive Note 3 When Filling P 52 job entry verify that 1 25 P 9 P 52 3 Otherwise a separate transformer for motor field supply is needed Note 4 Installer Verify parameter 10 and 16 for correct values They vary according to the installed encoder and
252. m Output Frequency Hz 40 0 80 0 60 0 i E1 05 Max Voltage Maximum Output Voltage Motor Voltage V 0 0 460 0 230 460 E1 06 Base Frequency Maximum voltage output frequency Hz 0 0 72 0 60 0 a E1 07 Mid Frequency A Mid Output Frequency A N A to Flux Vector Hz 0 0 72 0 3 0 3 0 E1 08 Mid Voltage A Mid Output Voltage N A to Flux Vector V 0 0 255 0 16 1 32 2 E1 09 Min Frequency Minimum Output Frequency N A to Flux Vector Hz 0 0 72 0 0 5 0 5 E1 10 Min Voltage Minimum Output Voltage N A to Flux Vector V 0 0 255 0 10 0 20 0 3 70 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Yaskawa F7 Drive Motor Setup Field Adjustable Parameters are shaded F Not Used E2 01 Motor Rated FLA Set to motor nameplate full load amps This value A 0 00 Motor is automatically set during Auto Tuning 1500 0 rated FLA E2 02 Motor Rated Slip Motor rated slip frequency Note Refer to the Hz JO 15 0 kVA attached table to calculate the slip frequency dependent E2 03 No Load Current Motor No Load Current A 0 150 30 50 Motor FLA E2 04 Number of Poles Number of Motor Poles Flux Vector only 2 48 6 PG Option Setup Flux Vector only Field Adjustable Parameters are shaded F1 01 PG Pulse Rev Encoder pulses per revolution Flux Vector only 0 60000 1024 1024 F1 02 PG Fdbk Loss Sel Stopping method at PG line
253. m loss 14 Hall board comm HALL COMM LOSS Lost contact with HALL board Error 15 Gate bypass Gate Bypass Sw Gate bypass switch activated switch 16 Locks bypass Locks Bypass Sw Locks bypass switch activated switch 17 Gate locks G Locks Bypass Gate locks bypassed bypass 18 Weight overload Weight Overload Weight Overload 19 Weight bypass Weight Bypass Weight Bypass 20 Stop switch mon STOP SW MON Car stopped due to stop switch monitor itor error 4 Fire 1 0 nit 1 No fire operation 2 Lobby recall Lobby Recall Phase 1 lobby recall 3 Smoke detectors Smoke recall Lobby recall due to smoke detector activa tion on non lobby floor 4 Lobby smk det SmokeAlt Rec Phase 1 alternate recall due to smoke detector activation on lobby floor 5 Lobby rec MR det Lob Rec amp MR Phase 1 lobby recall and machine room low hoistway smoke detector activated 6 Machine Room Mach Room Machine room smoke detector activated 7 Smoke amp MR det Smoke rec amp MR Lobby recall due to smoke detector activa tion on non lobby floor amp machine room low hoistway smoke detector activated 8 Lower hoistway Low hoistway Hoistway smoke det below recall floor 9 Lob smk MR det SmokeAIt amp MR Phase 1 alternate recall due to smoke detector activation on lobby floor amp machine room low hoistway smoke detector acti vated 5 Services 2 0 I nit 1 Normal Group oper 2 Simplex Simplex Simplex operation 3 Independent Independent Car is i
254. mand to None None None recognition delay timer 4 mspd1 mspd15 C2 Logic Inputs Log In 1 TB1 1 Terminal 1 Selection DRIVE DRIVE ENABLE ENABLE Log In 2 TB1 2 Terminal 2 Selection RUN UP RUN Log In 3 TB1 3 Terminal 3 Selection RUN DOWN FAULT RESET Log In 4 TB1 4 Terminal 4 Selection FAULT STEP REF BO RESET Log In 5 TB1 5 Terminal 5 Selection STEP REF STEP REF B1 BO Log In 6 TB1 6 Terminal 6 Selection STEP REF STEP REF B2 B1 Log In 7 TB1 7 Terminal 7 Selection STEP REF STEP REF B3 B2 Log In 8 TB1 8 Terminal 8 Selection STEP REF UP DN B3 Log In 9 TB1 9 Terminal 9 Selection S CURVE CONTACT SEL 0 CFIRM 3 52 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive Table 3 5 HPV 900 Drive Parameters Figure 3 1 HPV 900 Parameter Menu Trees C3 Logic Outputs Log Out 1 tb1 14 Terminal 14 Selection SPEED DEV RUN COM LOW MANDED Log Out 2 tb1 15 Terminal 15 Selection RUN COM SPEED REG MAND RLS Log Out 3 tb1 16 Terminal 16 Selection MTR OVER NO FUNC LOAD TION Log Out 4 tb1 17 Terminal 17 Selection ENCODER NO FUNC FAULT TION Relay Coil 1 Relay 1 Function Selection FAULT READY TO RUN Relay Coil 2 Relay 2 Function Selection SPEED REG SPEED REG RLS RLS C4 Analog Outputs Ana Out 1 tb1 33 Terminal 33 Selection SPEED CMD TORQUE REF Ana Out 2 tb1 35 Terminal 35 Selection SPEED SPEED F
255. mber or a Setup Fault will occur 28 RATED MTR SPEED Speed the motor should be turning when it is excited at its rated frequency and producing rated power Set to the value from the motor nameplate or manufacturer data sheet The final setting can be calculated by performing an adap tive tune This value must be less than 900 RPM on 8 pole motors 1200 RPM on 6 pole motors and 1800 RPM on 4 pole motors or a drive set up fault will occur Reuland motors have the synchro nous speed on the motor nameplate Setting this parameter to synchronous speed will result in a set up fault The correct value is approximately synchronous speed times 0 9833 29 NO LOAD CURR Current required to turn the motor at rated speed with no load This can be determined from the motor manufacturer data sheets on new motors If it is not available temporarily set it to 5096 The final setting can be calculated during adaptive tuning Remaining Motor A5 sub menu parameters remain at their default values Contents Index _MCE Web 35 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Nes Configure CO Menu 1 Access the User Switches C1 sub menu 2 SPEED COMMAND SRC Set to MULTISTEP 3 RUN COMMAND SRC Set to EXTERNAL TBL 4 Skipdownto SPD REF RELEASE Set to REG RELEASE 5 CONT CONFIRM SRC Set to EXTERNAL TB1 Remaining User Switches C1 sub menu parameters remain at their default values 6 Accessthe Logic Inputs C2 sub menu 7 LOGIN 1TB1 16 Set to DRIVE
256. ments In order to perform correctly the drive needs to be programmed for correct motor values and volts hertz ratio so the motor will not stall with a load or at slow speed The following procedure establishes volts hertz ratio L 2 3 Place full load into the car Run the car up and down on inspection speed Using a hand tach monitor the speed of the car If the car is moving at less than the inspection speed programmed at SPEED COMMAND 3 A3 increase CONTRACT MTR SPD AD Ifthe car is moving faster than the inspection speed programmed at SPEED COMMAND 3 A3 decrease CONTRACT MTR SPD A1 Repeat until the car is moving at exactly the speed programmed at SPEED COM MAND 3 A3 Speed Curve Setting and Adjustment The Magnetek HPV 600 drive has an internal speed curve algorithm that controls acceleration deceleration and jerk rates There are four independently selectable speed curves This system uses only the first Preliminary setting of speed curve parameters was done in the drive programming section The values entered at that time are designed to be somewhat aggressive to ensure that the car does not overshoot the floors but rather comes in slow This will prevent the car from running into the pit or the overhead until the final values for the speed curve are entered 1 Place a balanced load in the car 2 Disable the doors and place a car call two floors away from the present position of the car one floor away
257. minal Board L Type Terminal Board F Type Terminal Board The F Type Terminal board provides 8 single wire inputs and 8 two wire V GND outputs The wiring prints for the job will detail how each input and output must be connected Figure 2 7 F Type Terminal Board Connections F TYPE TERMINAL BOARD 8 Inputs A1 1 through A1 8 23 4 5 6 7 8 4 Outputs A2 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4 Outputs A3 CONNECTION EXAMPLE ONLY Contents inde _MCE Web Installation Nes O Type Terminal Board The O Type Terminal board provides 8 single wire inputs and 8 single wire outputs that share a common voltage connection The common voltage is determined by a connection to a voltage source on the Relay Board Figure 2 8 O Type Terminal Board Connections O TYPE TERMINAL BOARD 8 Inputs A1 1 through A1 8 123 4 5 6 7 8 To positive voltage on Relay Board A2 CONNECTION EXAMPLE ONLY 2 22 Manual 42 02 2T00 _Contents Index _MCE Web Completing I nstallation L Type Terminal Board The L Type Terminal board provides 8 inputs and 8 outputs working together For example af
258. motor machine or other grounds if the encoder is manufactured by BEI An insulated encoder mount has been furnished with the BEI encoder However this type of mounting may not be practical for all applications therefore the best method for mounting the encoder and coupling it to the motor must be determined at the job site Encoder Isolation The encoder housing must be electrically isolated from the machine ground To check this 1 Measure the resistance between the encoder case and the frame of the motor The measured value must be infinite for complete isolation Encoder Wiring A shielded cable with an appropriate connector at the encoder end is provided The controller end of the cable exposes trimmed and tinned individual conductors The encoder cable must be routed into the controller cabinet in a separate conduit Connect the cable to the encoder using the cable connector provided 1 Route the cable through a separate conduit to the controller cabinet 2 Connect the controller end of the cable as shown on the Drive Interface sheet of the job prints 3 Verify that the encoder shield is soldered to the drain wire wire without insulation Keep the cable shield connection as short as possible A Caution Do not coil excess Encoder cable near high voltage components noise may be induced If the cable must be shortened trim it at the controller end Do not cut and re splice in the middle of the cable or shorten
259. mounting procedure see MagneTek manual CS0601 for an explanation of these parameters Contents dex _MCE Web 3 97 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek Normal Speed Learn Operation You must now perform a normal operating speed learn operation using controls on the Limit Board Please refer to learn operation information specific to your Limit Board in Section 4 of this guide Please refer to Limit Board Standard on page 4 3 Please refer to 2K Limit Gripper Board on page 4 9 3 98 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web T T Quick Topics his Section Limit Board Adjustment al Test wes Release to Normal Operation 4 I n this Section Before the car can be released to inspection or normal operation speed and position related parameters need to be adjusted on the controller Limit board hoistway learn operations must be completed and code mandated testing must be completed and approved This section describes Limit Board Adjustment Final Test 4 1 Release to Normal Operation Cm Limit Board Adjustment Depending upon whether or not the controller must meet A17 1 2000 CSA B44 00 require ments one of two limit boards may be used Please refer to Limit Board Standard on page 4 3 for systems not required to meet A17 1 2000 CSA B44 00 requirements Please refer to 2K Limit Gripper Board on page 4 9 for systems required to meet A17 1 2000 CSA B44 00 requirements
260. moves the jumped door and gate detection operation on fire Phase 2 only Flag 128 Currently not used 121 Open rear door when at recall floor f set to Yes open the rear door instead of the front when at the recall floor 122 Open rear door when at alternate recall floor f set to Yes open the rear door instead of the front when at the alternate recall floor Contents Index _MCE Web 5 87 Tricon Configuration Nes Code Differences The following are parameter settings for various codes You may requires changes if rear doors are at the recall floor or due to local codes addenda New York City prior to ANSI A17 1b 2003 with Appendix K Modifications 112 No Constant pressure DCB to close door 113 Yes Allow recall of attendant or independent cars 116 No Has a Remote recall switch 117 No Dispatcher 46 No Lobby bypass input resets smoke detectors 118 Yes Allow Phase 2 operation after MR smoke recall 119 No Allow Phase 2 change without open doors 120 Dispatcher 51 Flag 8 New York City ANSI A17 1b 2003 with Appendix K Modifications NYC still requires their traditional NYC fire code modifications to the A17 1 Code under the new Appendix K modifications 112 No Constant pressure DCB to close door 113 Yes Allow recall of attendant or independent cars 116 No Has a Remote recall switch 117 No Dispatcher 46 No Lobby bypass input resets smoke dete
261. moving at approximately the same speed as that displayed by the drive If not access the Adjust AO menu User Switches AL Adjust Contract Motor Spd until the car is running at the same speed displayed by Speed Reference 3 6 Manual 42 02 2100 Contents Index _MCE Web Drive Parameter Reference Open Loop Magnetek HPV 600 Following is a list of drive parameters with an explanation and setting for each Refer to the pre vious section for initial programming Please refer to HPV 600 AC Drive Start Up Open Loop on page 3 2 Table 3 1 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open Loop WARNING Parameters with an asterisk must be set correctly for your specific job Parameter Description Unit Range Default E Adjust AO A1 Drive Contract Car Spd Elevator Contract Speed fom 0 3000 400 Contract Mtr Spd Motor Speed at contract speed rpm 150 3000 1130 Response Sensitivity of speed regulator rad 1 0 20 0 10 10 sec Inertia System inertia sec 0 25 50 00 2 0 2 0 Inner Loop Xover Inner speed loop crossover fre rad 0 1 20 0 2 0 2 0 quency with Ereg speed regulator sec Gain Reduce Mult Percent of speed regulator response 96 10 100 100 100 in low gain Mode Gain Chng Level Speed level to change to low gain 96 0 100 0 100 0 mode with internal gain switch Tach Rate Gain Helps with effects of rope resonance 0 30 0 0 0 Sp
262. n point on the cab to the controller ground 6 An uninterrupted ground wire should be run from the cab enclosure to the ground ter minal on the cab to protect passengers and personnel from electrical shock 7 An uninterrupted ground wire should be run from each car operating panel to the ground terminal on the cab to protect passengers and personnel from electrical shock 8 An uninterrupted ground wire should be run from the dispatch cabinet chassis or back plate to earth ground The connection at the dispatch cabinet must be free of paint so the ground connection is made to the bare metal of the enclosure 9 Acontinuous looped ground wire should be run from each hall push button station to the dispatch or controller ground Contents dex _MCE Web T Installation A eE AC Power Connections All conductors entering or leaving the controller must be through conduit High voltage high current conductors must be separated from control wires Velocity encoder or tachometer wires must be routed in a separate conduit from high voltage high current wires Incoming power to the controller and outgoing power to the motor must be through separate grounded conduits Brake Module If your job uses a brake control module your job drawings may show aux iliary power connections specific to the brake from an isolation transformer Follow the draw ings carefully 1 Check the AC input specifications on your job prints Verify that the AC sup
263. n Car has no direction preference 2 No direction CC CC Pref Car has closed doors and no direction pref preference erence 3 Up direction Up Car has an up direction preference 4 Up Direction go Up go Car is committed to start in up direction 5 Up start Up start Car is starting up 6 Up run Running up Car is running up 7 Up slowdown up Up sldn up Car is moving up in slowdown for an up call 8 Up slowdown Up sldn none Car is moving up in slowdown with no direc none tion preference 9 Up slowdown Up sldn dn Car is moving up in slowdown with a down down direction preference 10 Down direction Down Car has a down direction preference 11 Down direction Down go Car is committed to travel down go 12 Down start Down start Car is starting in down direction 13 Down run Running down Car is moving down 14 Down slowdown Dn sldn down Car is moving down in slowdown with a down direction preference Tricon Configuration MeE Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 282 and HHU Version 6 262 03 07 15 Down slowdown Dn sldn none Car is moving down in slowdown with no none direction preference 16 Down slowdown Dn sldn up Car is moving down in slowdown with an up up direction preference 17 Stopping Stopping Car is stopping with no direction preference 18 Up stopping Up stopping Car is stopping with an up direction prefer ence 19 Down stopping Dn stopping C
264. n independent service 4 State 4 State 4 5 Dispatcher loss No dispatcher Car has lost communications with the group dispatcher 6 State 6 State 6 7 State 7 State 7 5 8 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Main Menus Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 282 and HHU Version 6 262 03 07 down 6 Services 3 0 I nit 1 Normal 2 State 2 State 2 3 State 3 State 3 4 Lobby Recall Lobby Recall Lobby Recall 5 State 5 State 5 6 Attendant Attendant Car is in attendant service 7 State 7 State 7 State 7 8 State 8 State 8 State 8 7 Motion Control O Init 1 Normal 2 Position lost Lost Posit n Loss of car position Car will search for ter minal landing 3 Between floors Between fl W Car is between floors and in a waiting state wait 4 Between floors Between Firs 5 Drive failure DRIVE FAIL Drive failure 6 Car out of service OUT OF SERV The car cannot respond to calls 7 Low oil LOW OIL The car tried to run up and it could not Applies only to hydraulic elevators 8 State 8 STATE 8 9 Overload OVERL RESC The overload popped or in hydros the res rescuvator cuvator is feeding the car power 10 LU sensor failure LU FAILURE The LU sensor is stuck on 11 LD sensor failure LD FAILURE The LD sensor is stuck on 12 DZ sensor failure DZ FAILURE The DZ sensor is stuck on 8 Direction 0 Init 1 No direction No directio
265. n run the motor Confirm that the motor turns in the correct direction to move the car up or down 3 Usingthe programmer access Display D1 Monitor Speed Reference Run the carin the down direction The speed reference displayed on the drive should be negative Using the inspection up button on the Relay board run the car in the up direction The speed reference should be positive 4 IntheDisplay D1menu monitor Speed Feedback Run the car in the down direc tion The speed feedback should be negative If not reverse the A and A signals from the encoder to the drive 5 While usingthe inspection up down buttons to run the car use a hand tach to check car speed It should be moving at approximately the same speed as that displayed on the drive If not access Adjust AO User Switches A1 Adjust Contract Motor Spd until the car is running at exactly the same speed as displayed by Speed Feedback 3 26 Manual 42 02 2100 Contents Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 HPV 600 Drive Parameter Reference Closed Loop Followingis a list of drive parameters with explanations and setting recommendations Refer to the previous section for initial programming Please refer to HPV 600 AC Drive Start Up Closed Loop on page 3 22 Table 3 3 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Closed Loop Parameter Description Unit Range Defaults he Adjust AO A1 Drive
266. nal TB trigger overspeed test Serial TB Brake Pick Src If drive controls mechanical brake Internal Internal Internal determines source of brake pick com Serial mand Brake Pick Cnfrm Determines if a logic input is used for None None None brake pick confirm External TB Brake Hold Src If drive controls mechanical brake Internal Internal Internal determines source of brake hold com Serial mand Ramped Stop Sel Chooses between normal stop and None None None torque ramp down stop Ramp on stop Ramp Down En Src Determines source that signals torque External TB External External TB ramp down stop if used Run logic TB Serial Brk Pick Flt Ena Brake pick fault enable Enable Disable Disable Disable Brk Hold Flt Ena Brake hold fault enable Enable Disable Disable Disable Ext Torq Cmd Src When Speed Reg Type External None None None Reg sets source of torque command Serial Dir Confirm Confirms proper analog signal polarity Enabled Disabled Disable when set to Enable and a logic input is Disabled programmed to Run Up and Run Down S Curve Abort Addresses how S Curve Speed Refer Enabled Disabled Disable ence Generator handles a reduction in Disabled speed command before S Curve Gen erator has reached target speed Fast Flux Reduces starting takeoff time by Enabled Enabled Enable reducing motor fluxing time Disabled Main DIP Ena Enables Mains DIP Speed A1 param Enabled Disabled Disable eter which reduces speed
267. nd excessive moisture A NEMA 4 or NEMA 12 enclosure can help meet these requirements if machine room conditions are inadequate If the machine room has open or unglazed win dows or other direct outside openings place equipment cabinets far enough from them so that severe weather does not damage the equipment Very high levels of radio frequency RF radiation from nearby sources should be avoided RFI may interfere with controller components degrading elevator performance Using hand held communication devices close to the controller may also cause interference Interference from permanently installed radio transmitting antennas is not common Power line fluctuation should not be greater than 10 Piping and Wiring Proper routing of signal and power wires is essential to microprocessor based equipment Low and high voltage wiring cannot be run in the same conduit duct or tray How Electrical Noise Occurs Electrical noise may be induced when a high power conductor and a low signal level conductor run alongside one another As current flows through the high power wire magnetic lines of flux voltage expand outward and voltage is induced in the low level conductor The low level conductor in the case of Tricon may be a 24 volt input that really only needs to see 12 volts to turn on If the voltage induced from the high power conductor is large enough to induce a 12 volt spike the input can falsely turn on How to Avoid Electrical Nois
268. nd the door zone This is designed to reduce the number of relevels the car will make when at rest for a long period 165 Normal Non directional yes no no yes no Setting to yes makes hall calls non direc hall calls tional The car will stop for either up or down hall calls on arriving at the floor from either direction and will cancel both once it stops When this parameter is set to Yes there is no need to define both an up and a down button per floor because both up and down buttons will operate identically To save inputs only one button per floor may be set in the floor table 166 Fire service from local yes no no yes no When set to yes the car will read the fire hall board inputs from its own hall board instead of the group dispatcher If the car is simplex this flag has no effect 167 Set to yes to reset fire yes no yes yes no When set to yes the car will reset its mem low oil etc orized fire state position low oil condition etc After reset the parameter will automat ically reset to no 5 48 Manual 42 02 2T00 Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen Main Menus 168 Seismic flags Add the 0 255 O each 1 Enable seismic operation numbers of those condi 2 Do not allow reduced speed run with tions you want to set counterweight displacement switch on and enter that number 4 Allow fire phase 1 reduced speed run Example Enable the when counterweight displacement s
269. ndicators menu select the Cartop Hall or Car Station board From the selected board menu select the floor to be programmed 5 58 Manual 42 02 2T00 Main Menus Floors are typically programmed according to the following table Table 5 23 PI Programming Using One Output per Lamp Floor Car top board Hall board Car station board Floor Entry Floor Entry Floor Entry 1 1 9 1 17 1 2 2 10 2 18 2 3 4 11 4 19 4 4 8 12 8 20 8 5 16 13 16 21 16 6 32 14 32 22 32 7 64 15 64 23 64 8 128 16 128 24 128 9 32 0 1 8 17 32 0 1 8 9 16 0 Contents Index _MCE Web 5 59 Tricon Configuration Cm Light Duty CE Fixture Drivers The light duty CE driver board may be used to drive up to three CE digital position indicators In this configuration the outputs of an O type Terminal board on the Hall board for Simplex cars or on the Car Top board for Group cars are used to control the CE driver board The CE driver board in turn drives a three wire serial bus supporting up to three CE digital position indicators To program O type Terminal boards to directly drive indicators From the Position Indicators menu select the Hall or Cartop Sta tion board as appropriate From the selected board menu select the floor to be pro grammed Position Indicators Car top position ind SENE wm 77 Car top ind Floor 1 Light duty CE driver P board inputs driven by i H
270. nfigured according to particular job requirements before shipment Typically you will not need to program position indicator outputs but will only need to connect them as shown in the prints for the particular job When configuring a PI board the serial communication to any other PI board on the system MUST be disconnected If this is not done information on the other boards will be cor rupted To disconnect boards not to be programmed unplug the communication connector from the PI boards that you are not configuring The PI Board Setup menu consists of three 3 sub menus Floor Setup There is a Floor Setup menu for each floor served by the car You scroll through the floors to the floor you want to program select it then set up position indicator outputs and make settings that tell the controller if there are lanterns gongs associated with the opening If lantern gong outputs are indicated they are automatically assigned to outputs not used for position indicators or directional arrows Indicator Parameters Per floor this menu allows you to set up blink times for the position indicator outputs if desired and also to make a setting that tells the controller if directional arrows are associated with the opening If so two directional arrow outputs are automati cally assigned to outputs not used for position indicators Lantern Parameters Per floor this menu allows you to set up blink sound times for hall lanterns and or gongs
271. ng 0 I nit 1 Off Nudging is off 2 Timing Timing Nudging time is running 3 Ready Ready Nudging timer has expired but there is no demand for the car 4 On On Nudging is active 5 State 5 State 5 17 Fire 2 0 I nit 1 Off 2 Indep recall Indep recall Phase 1 recall while car is on Independent service 3 Attendant recall Att recall Phase 1 recall while car is on Attendant ser vice 4 Recall Recall Car is in Phase 1 recall 5 Recalled Recalled Car has completed Phase 1 recall 6 Phase II Phase II Car is in Phase II fire operation 7 Car to hold glitch Hold wait Waiting for either fire door hold input on filter or timer expiration after in car fire input goes off 8 Hold Hold Phase II fire door hold service 9 Soft hold Soft hold Car is away from recall floor doors are open in car fire input is off and timer for fire door hold has expired 10 Start recall Start recall Transition stage from Phase II to Phase fire recall 11 State 11 State 11 12 State 12 State 12 13 State 13 State 13 18 Emerg Power 0 Init 1 Off Line pwr 2 Normal Em pwr Car is operating in normal state selected car 3 Stopping Stopping Car is stopping at first available floor 4 State 4 State 4 5 Stopped Stopped Car is stopped 6 Recalling Recalling Car is recalling to designated floor on emer gency power 7 Recalled Recalled Car is recalled to designated floor 5 15 Tricon Configuration MeE Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 282 and HHU Version 6 262 03 07
272. ning down the car is too heavy Remove 100 pounds of weight from the car and repeat steps 8 through 10 until the recorded values are equal but have opposite polarity Ignoring whether the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running down was greater than the value running up the car is too light Add 100 pounds of weight from the car and repeat steps 7 and 8 until the recorded values are equal but have opposite polarity When the values are equal but have opposite polarity the car is balanced Check how much weight is in the car It should be between 40 and 50 of the rated capacity If not the counter weight needs to be adjusted If the caris too heavy weight needs to be added to the counter weight to get the car balanced between 40 and 5096 of the rated capacity If the car is too light weight needs to be removed from the counterweight to get it balanced between 40 and 50 of the rated capacity Do not proceed with the adjustment process until the car is prop erly balanced 3 92 Manual 42 02 2T00 Magnetek DSD 412 DC Drive Drive Parameters There are four 4 primary parameters used in high speed adjustment of the DSD 412 drive 40 Response This parameter adjusts how closely the drive tracks the speed pattern Typical values are from 5 to 8 The higher the number the closer the tracking Too high a number will cause vibration in the car mostly noticed at slowdown because the dr
273. nt being applied to the motor L 2 Temporarily increase the DC injection time to 3 seconds and controller drive hold time parameter 77 to 5 seconds Monitor the drive hold current at the stop of the car While adjusting final stop 3 4 Set holding current as low as possible There is a point at which no matter how much current is applied to the motor it will not stop the load Adjust the brake to drop as quickly as possible because it may not be possible to stop the motor rotation with DC injection Brake drop time can be decreased by lowering the brake holding voltage and increasing the resistance in parallel with the brake coil This resistor can be found on the job prints It has a diode in series with it and is in parallel with the brake coil Contents Index _MCE Web 3 79 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Nes Problems Adjusting Open Loop Volts Hertz This mode provides adequate per formance if the motor is sized correctly for the load If you see a large speed difference when lift ingthe load as compared to lowering the load at high speed and leveling speed as well as the motor not slowing the load equally in each direction the motor is too small for the job If this is the case avoid the following mistakes Do not lower the final leveling speed too low as this will push the motor closer to a stall condition Increasing final leveling speed will reduce the up down speed difference If the car
274. ntermittently and cause relevel ing 9 Modify the ACCEL J ERK OUT 0 A2 rate to the same value that was entered into the DECEL J ERK IN O0 parameter 10 If the rated speed of the car is greater than 200 feet per minute make a one floor run Observe the approach into the floor on single floor runs If the approach is longer than the multi floor runs increase the SPEED COMMAND 4 A3 parameter until the approach on a one floor run is the same as the multi floor run If the approach is quicker decrease the SPEED COMMAND 4 A3 parameter until the approach on a one floor run is the same as the multi floor run 11 Thespeed curve parameters have been set up Ride the car and observe the acceleration deceleration and jerk rates If any rate seems too sharp make that value smaller Note that changing values in the deceleration profile will result in a different approach into the floor You may need to modify other deceleration parameters to get the desired ride 12 Observe the floor stops Make multi floor runs and one floor runs into a floor at the cen ter of the hoistway If the car is stopping short of the floor too high in the down and too lowin the up increase the SPEED COMMAND 1 A3 parameter This will result in a faster leveling speed and cause the car to travel farther before stopping 13 If the car is stopping past the floor too high in the up and too low in the down decrease the SPEED COMMAND 1 A3 parameter This will result
275. nthecaron inspection and adjust resistor RBL until the brake pick voltage required for the job is obtained 3 Adjust RBR until approximately 60 brake lifting voltage is obtained or the brake hold ing voltage from the manufacturer Check that the brake settles from full pick but does not touch the machine braking surface 4 Stopthe car and check that the brake drops just as motor rotation is stopping brake does not drop on a rotating machine 5 Adjust resistor RBD to coordinate brake drop with motor rotation as needed Less resistance will cause the brake to drop more slowly Settings of the following controller parameters can be used to delay brake lift if required Parameter 81 for normal operation starts Parameter 84 for Inspection starts Parameter 86 for releveling starts 2 46 Manual 42 02 2T00 Hi T Quick Topics In this Section Magnetek HPV 600 Magnetek HPV 900 Yaskawa F7 Mitsubishi A500 Magnetek DSD 412 he Startup amp Drive Adjustment In this Section This section provides startup tuning high speed adjustment and running instructions for the Tricon controller as used with various drives Magnetek HPV 600 Magnetek HPV 900 Yaskawa F7 Mitsubishi A500 Magnetek DSD 412 Complete instructions in Sections 1 and 2 before beginning procedures described in this sec tion 31 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Neo Magnetek HPV 600 This section describes Start Up Procedures O
276. nual contains parameter descriptions for all user programmable system ele ments The manual is intended to provide general knowledge of system components system operation and supporting information for the controller drive Section 3 Please contact MCE support with any questions you have while installing and adjusting the Tri con system If you discover errors omissions or incomplete information in this manual or in the drawings package please report them to MCE so that we can correct them 2 2 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Safety Safety Keep safety in mind at all times to avoid injury or equipment damage Personal Safety Tricon controls should only be installed or maintained by qualified licensed elevator per sonnel familiar with the operation of microprocessor based elevator controls Verify that all safety devices limits governors hoistway locks car gate etc are fully functional before attempting to run the elevator Never operate Tricon controls with any safety device inoperative Theuser is responsible for complying with current National Electrical Code with respect to overall installation and for proper sizing of electrical conductors The user is responsible for understanding and applying all current local state provincial and federal codes that govern controller placement applicability wiring protection dis connections over current protection and grounding Controller equipm
277. o decrease one increment When satisfied press the key to start clock Press the key to abort change You will move back to the Clock screen To return to the Car Setup menu use the key Figure 5 13 Car Clock Screen 5 70 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Reset Errors This screen resets the error log An entry to show time of reset will be displayed To move into the Reset Error edit screen use 8 or key To return to the previous menu use key To answer reset press Yes or No key on the keypad Press key to update Press to return to Car Setup menu Press key to abort change will return to Car Setup screen Figure 5 14 Car Reset Errors Screen Reset Parameters This screen resets car parameters to their default values Figure 5 15 Car Reset Parameters Screen Main Menus 5 71 Tricon Configuration Nem Reset Floor Table This screen resets car floor tables to their default values Figure 5 16 Car Reset Floor Table Parameters Screen Reset BMS This screen resets car modem dial out properties to their default values Figure 5 17 Car Reset BMS Parameters Screen 5 72 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Main Menus Dispatcher Setup The Dispatcher Setup menu includes Parameters Floor table Disp Inputs amp Outputs Clock BMS Setup Parameters The dispatcher setup screen allows viewing and modification of ca
278. oard Connector numbering 20 Imaginary floors 51 Independent Service 28 79 Door Operation 46 Indicator Parameters screen 65 Initial power up 9 Input Mapping 17 Inputs amp Outputs 6 Inspection learn 2K 14 Inspection Learn 2K Limit Gripper 14 Inspection Speed Learn standard 7 Installation sequence 2 Installing hoistway tape 25 J Jumpers for Construction operation 15 L L Terminal board 5 23 L Type Terminal board wiring 23 Lantern Parameters screen 65 Limit board 5 3 Limit board connections 2K 12 Limit board connections standard 4 Limit Board description 2K 9 Limit board description standard 3 Limit board diagnostic LEDs 2K 10 Limit board diagnostic LEDs standard 5 Limit board operating examples 2K 16 Limit board operating examples standard 8 Limit fault reset 10 Limit functionality 2K Limit Gripper 16 Limit section overspeed in FPM 2K Limit Gripper 13 Limit Switches 36 Limit trips not auto resetting 10 Limit Gripper board 2K 9 Lobby Parameters 48 LOCK 10 Lockouts 68 Low voltage signal wiring 20 M MAC board 8 Magnetek manual 2 22 Modem Car 66 Dispatcher 84 Motor insulation test 10 MS 5 9 N NEMA 4 12 enclosures 5 Network screen 85 Normal Learn 2K Limit Gripper 15 Normal operation 2K Limit Gripper 17 Number of cars in Group 74 NYCHA Car Group comm 40 oO O Terminal board 5 22 O Type Terminal board wiring 22 Opening doors on Inspection Mode 14 16 P Parameter Ex
279. obs 13 Speed sensor gap adjustment 14 SRE 22 State machines 7 Status LEDs I O 24 boards 9 T Temporary controller box 15 Temporary Run Box Hookup 17 Temporary run box wiring 17 Testing motor insulation 10 Third priority floor parking Group 75 Tricon controller cabinet 9 Tricon Quick Start Up 1 Index 4 Manual 42 02 2T00 U UP 5 9 Up slowdown magnets 29 USL 5 9 Vv V 1143 V I 2 43 V 1 343 Velocity Encoder Connections 12 Velocity Encoder Installation 20 Y Yaskawa F7 Drive drive parameters table 68 Yaskawa F7 drive 62 Index 5
280. oder feedback Tachome ter loss will be detected Caris moved on inspection or with the doors open at a speed greater than 125 FPM Alimit rope gripper board relay malfunction is detected Rope Gripper Functionality The rope gripper provides overspeed and unintended movement protection Rope gripper parameters are adjusted as described in this section Please refer to Parameter Entry on page 4 13 The rope gripper will open the safety circuit and rope gripper contacts if any of the following conditions are detected Carruns at a speed above the rope gripper overspeed parameter value This speed is detected from the limit board encoder input The following flags need to be enabled DS17 On Rope gripper enabled DS18 On Rope gripper overspeed from overspeed parameter Alternately or along with DS18 Flag DS19 Rope gripper overspeed from governor input may also be enabled Car moves away from a floor out of the door zone with doors and gate open Relay sequencing test fails Each time the car comes to a halt the board sequentially one at a time tests three relays for the gripper and monitors the result Relays are tested individually to prevent the gripper from applying and opening the safety circuit The gripper output and gripper relay states do not correspond 4 16 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Limit Board Adjustment Normal Operation After normal learn is complete the limit
281. of floors ser viced by this car 19 Car 4 number of floors 2 32 2 floor Enter the number of floors ser viced by this car 20 Car 5 number of floors 2 32 2 floor Enter the number of floors ser viced by this car 5 84 Manual 42 02 2100 _Contents Index _MCEWeb Main Menus Table 5 30 BMS Screen Parameters 21 Car 6 number of floors 2 32 2 floor Enter the number of floors ser viced by this car 22 Car 1 lobby floor number 1 32 1 floor Enter the lobby floor for this car 23 Car 2 lobby floor number 1 32 1 floor Enter the lobby floor for this car 24 Car 3 lobby floor number 1 32 1 floor Enter the lobby floor for this car 25 Car 4 lobby floor number 1 32 1 floor Enter the lobby floor for this car 26 Car 5 lobby floor number 1 32 1 floor Enter the lobby floor for this car 27 Car 6 lobby floor number 1 32 1 floor Enter the lobby floor for this car 28 Modem initialization Enter the initialization string for string 1 the modem used for the primary dial out line See modem docu mentation 29 Modem initialization Enter the initialization string for string 2 the modem used for the second ary dial out line See modem documentation Reset Dispatcher Parameters This screen allows you to reset dispatcher parameters to their default values Reset Dispatcher Floor Table This screen allows you to reset dispatcher floor tables to their default values Reset Dispatch
282. ogrammer Check connec tor on Control board and programmer Replace Control board or programmer if fault cannot be corrected Contactor Fault Contactor state does not match the commanded state The drive has turned on the command to close the main contac tor and the Contactor Confirm signal is not present for the amount of time specified by the Contact Flt Time parameter Cube Data Fault Cube ID Fault The drive parameters are invalid The drive identification is invalid Check all drive parameters Cycle power to drive If fault recurs go to Utility menu and select Restore Defaults If fault per sists replace Control board Note Restore Defaults will require all drive parameters be set to their correct values Check all drive parameters Cycle drive power If fault recurs go to Utility menu and select Restore Defaults If fault per sists replace Control board Note Restore Defaults will require all drive parameters be set to their correct values Curr Reg Fault Actual current does not match the commanded current Check incoming power Check motor parameters Check motor connections windings for open circuit Check main contactor for bad contact If OK bad current sensor or bad drive 3 54 Manual 42 02 2T00 Table 3 6 HPV 900 Drive Faults Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive DCU Data Fault The DCU parameters are not set correctly Check all drive parameters Cycle power
283. old doors open at eighth parking floor see Help column After parking at this floor the car will hold the indicated doors open 0 2 Do not open doors 1 2 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter overrides the Open doors once parameter for this floor pars 18 25 34 35 Parameter 34 Em Power Recall time out time 0 255 sec Determines the length of time the dispatcher will attempt to recall a non responding car dur ing emergency power operation before declaring it out of service 36 Em Power Manual oper ation Phases 1 and 2 yes no 1 0 yes 1 no 0 When set to 1 yes emergency power selection for recall or run ning under emergency power will be by manual switch only 37 Em Power Manual Phase 2 select yes no 1 0 yes 1 no 0 When set to 1 yes emergency power recall will be performed by the dispatcher but car may be selected to run under emergency power by manual switch only 5 78 Manual 42 02 2T00 Table 5 28 Dispatcher Parameter Screen Parameters Main Menus 38 Em Power Maximum 1 8 1 each Determines the maximum num number of cars auto ber of cars that will be allowed to Phase 2 run simultaneously during emer gency power operation 39 Parameter 39 40 Cross cancellation yes no 1 0 0 yes 1 enabled no 0 41 Parameter 41 42 Cod
284. olts hertz mode and move up one mode at a time This is required because the motor self tune must be done without the encoder board plugged into the drive The A500 drive is shipped with a FR DU04 parameter unit An optional full size parameter unit FRPUO4 with the extension cable FR CB203 is available Open Loop Volts Hertz These instructions are for open loop volts hertz adjustment A500 Inspection Startup Open Loop Volts Hertz After verifying all controller motor and brake connections try moving the car on controller inspection If the direction of the motor is reversed reverse any two of the hoist motor wires The torque boost parameter may require some adjustment for low speed torque If set too high the final leveling speed current on automatic as well as low inspection speed will be very high This should be adjusted as lowas possible while still able to move full load at the final leveling speed The inspection speed may be low inspection speed parameter 5 or high inspection speed parameter 24 To run at high inspection speed set car parameter 132 to yes 3 78 Manual 42 02 2100 Contents Index _MCE Web Mitsubishi A500 Variable Frequency Drive High Speed Adjustment Open Loop Volts Hertz This mode of operation uses torque boost at low speed to increase motor torque to keep the full load up and full load down leveling speeds approximately equal Final leveling speed parameter 6 can be reduced only if
285. on The dispatcher uses three parameters for emergency power Parameter 20 emergency power recall time out Parameter 21 emergency power manual operation phase 1 and phase 2 Parameter 22 emergency power manual phase 2 select Parameter 20 sets the time the dispatcher will wait before aborting a phase 1 recall if a car is being held or cannot run If a car is passed over the dispatcher will try again after returning all of the other cars A carthat has not returned can be manually selected at any time with the man ual selection switch If the manual switches have not been provided you can force the dis patcher to try another phase 1 return sequence by putting the phase 2 car in inspection operation A second function of parameter 20 is to turn off emergency power operation If the time is set to 0 emergency power operation will be disabled and the inputs will be remapped as described above Parameters 21 and 22 Limit Phase 1 and Phase 2 Operation Operation Mode 1 Auto recall Auto phase 2 Manual override Parameters 21 and 22 are set to No The emergency power will operate as follows All cars will sequentially return to the lobby phase 1 operation After the cars have returned or have been bypassed the first car will return to service The car select switches will allow you to select another car Selecting another car will start a phase 1 recall operation of the car in service Operation Mode 2 Auto recall
286. on Control Engineering for assistance Refer to the Magnetek HPV 900 Vector Elevator Drive Technical Manual for detailed explana tion of drive features The HPV 900 is fully digital with configurable inputs outputs and modes of operation This procedure describes configuring the HPV 900 for the Tricon controller Due to the complexity of drive systems it is not possible to cover all potential problems or possibili ties If you encounter any difficulties please contact Engineering Use the Magnetek manual as a reference but follow the start up and adjusting procedures described here Before the controller and drive were shipped the entire system was tested at the factory AII drive parameters were preset based on information provided in the controller order form The drive should run on inspection operation with very little effort If not verify that the informa tion given to MCE was oorrect If not contact Engineering for assistance System Overview The control system uses the internal speed algorithm of the Magnetek HPV 900 drive Adjust ments to the accel rate jerk rates and decel rates are made through the drive Drive Programming The drive has been modified to meet MCE specifications If replacement of the drive is ever required please contact MCE Technical Support MCE will not accept any drive for repair under warranty without a Return Material Authorization RMA number issued by Technical Sup port Removing boards from the d
287. one floor run logic typically 200 feet per minute or greater place a jumper from terminal TB1 55 to terminal TB1 7 on the drive 3 Fordrives not using one floor run logic typically under 200 feet per minute place a jumper from terminal TB1 55 to terminal TB1 6 on the drive The drive jumper will create a failure of the speed control system that will cause the drive not to initiate a slowdown at any floor Mitsubishi A500 Drive 1 Refer to the job prints wiring diagrams Locate the sheet that shows the drive inter face 2 Placeajumper from terminal SD to terminal RH on the drive The drive jumper will create a failure of the speed control system that will cause the drive not to initiate a slowdown at any floor Top Floor Test Procedure A Danger If the car has a counterweight safety ensure that the safety will not apply by tying down the safety actuating arm prior to performing this test Failure to prevent the safety from apply ing may result in the safety applying while the buffer is compressed 1 Access the Parking Floor parameter 141 in the Setup Parameters menu 2 Change this parameter to the top floor Step 2 commands the car to run to the top floor When the car reaches the top terminal floor it will not slow down The ETS system will trip stopping the car 3 After completing the test remove the drive jumper and any tiedown that may have been placed on a safety 4 24 Manual 42 02 2100 Contents Inde
288. only affects minimum speeds in V f mode Zero is the minimum in Flux Vector mode closed loop 3 66 Manual 42 02 2T00 Yaskawa F7 Drive Inspection Startup V f mode Open Loop Closed Loop Before applying power to the controller confirm that the incoming three phase AC voltage at the main line matches the value on the power section of the wiring diagrams Confirm that the three leads from the controller to the motor are connected If there are more than three leads coming out of the motor make sure that the motor is wired in a delta configuration with correct field rotation or follow the motor manufacturer recom mendation Confirm that the encoder is connected correctly Refer to the Yaskawa F7 Users Manual for wiring diagrams Referto the parameters table shipped with the controller or to the parameters table in this manual section The parameters table shipped with the controller has the specific drive parameters programmed for your installation Make sure the controller is on inspection operation Verify that the hoistway is clear and that the car is ready to be moved Apply power to the controller For inspection purposes even if your controller operates in Flux Vector mode closed loop ini tially set the drive to run in V f mode open loop to check elevator mechanical characteristics Set drive parameter A1 02 0 Before attempting to run confirm that the modified parameters of the drive match the l
289. oor pars 18 25 29 Hold doors open at fourth 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car parking floor column will hold the indicated doors open 0 2 Do not open doors 1 2 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 2 Open both doors This parameter overrides the Open doors once parameter for this floor pars 18 25 5 77 Tricon Configuration MeE Table 5 28 Dispatcher Parameter Screen Parameters 30 Hold doors open at fifth parking floor 0 3 0 see Help column After parking at this floor the car will hold the indicated doors open 0 2 Do not open doors 1 2 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 2 Open both doors This parameter overrides the Open doors once parameter for this floor pars 18 25 31 Hold doors open at sixth parking floor see Help column After parking at this floor the car will hold the indicated doors open 0 2 Do not open doors 1 2 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter overrides the Open doors once parameter for this floor pars 18 25 32 Hold doors open at sev enth parking floor 0 3 see Help column After parking at this floor the car will hold the indicated doors open 0 2 Do not open doors 1 2 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 2 Open both doors This parameter overrides the Open doors once parameter for this floor pars 18 25 33 H
290. oors and place a car call two floors away from the present position of the car one floor away if the car speed is 200 feet per minute or less Keep the elevator away from the terminal floors at this time 3 Whilethe caris running monitorthe car speed with a hand tach It should be running at contract speed 5 If not adjust the CONTRACT MTR SPEED A1 parameter to obtain the correct speed 4 Observe the deceleration of the car as it approaches the floor The car should decelerate rapidly and there should be two noticeable steps of speed prior to stopping at the floor If there are not confirm that the tape reader is properly installed and the slowdown magnets are placed the correct distance from the floor 5 Change the DECEL RATE 0 A2 parameter to 3 5 ft s2 This will yield a slower rate of deceleration and less approach distance to the floor 6 Again run the car and observe the approach into the floor If the car still has too much slow down distance decrease the DECEL RATE 0 A2 parameter to 0 1 ft s less than the present rate 7 Repeat until the car is coming into the floor with about 3 to 6 inches of approach 3 58 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive 8 Modify the DECEL J ERK IN 0 A2 and DECEL J ERK OUT 0 A2 parameters to get a smooth approach into the floor with 1 to 2 inches of sustained leveling If there is not enough sustained leveling the car may overshoot i
291. or and wait for transfer of emergency power to normal power This input should be active at least fifteen seconds before the emergency power is transferred to normal power All power transfers should allow a complete power down of the equipment before the new power source is switched on All cars and the dispatcher should have power provided at the same time Software Required The controller provides emergency power when used with dispatcher version 6 and above soft ware The car requires version 6 software for MPU CTRL 1 or 2 and CTOP boards The dis patcher requires version 6 software for the MPU Other car and dispatcher system boards may be version 5 software 1 16 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Operating Modes Input Mapping When emergency power is enabled the dispatcher will require six inputs for the lobby selection switches and two inputs for emergency power and emergency power off Emergency power operation is enabled by setting dispatcher parameter 20 Emergency Power Recall Timeout time to a value other than zero Assuming you want emergency power operation you should set a minimum of 45 seconds for this parameter This will cause the dispatcher to provide the inputs for emergency power as described above The inputs used for emergency power will be located on the DHALL board B location This is the second group of 8 inputs on this board They were previously used for the first 8 hall calls All hall
292. osing error 17 Lost gate error LOST GL ERR Gate opened while car was moving 18 Lost locks error LOST LockERR Looks opened while car was moving 19 Lost CL error LOST CL ERR Lost CL input off while car was moving 20 Lost GL input LOST GL ERR Lost GL input off while car was moving while doors were closed 21 Cam drop error CAM DROP ERR The cam did not drop in the time allotted 22 Gate jumped GATE JUMPED The gate contact is made although the doors are opened doors cannot close because it is presumed that the gate con tact is jumpered out 23 Locks jumped LOCKS JUMPED The lock contacts are made although the doors are opened doors cannot close because it is presumed that the lock con tacts are jumpered out 24 Gate and locks G amp LJUMPED The gate and lock contacts are made jumped although the doors are opened doors can not close because it is presumed that the gate and lock contacts are jumpered out 25 State 25 STATE 25 12 Drive Control O Init 1 Disabled Disabled Drive is disabled 2 Stopped Stopped Drive is stopped 3 Stopped not yet Stop relevel Drive is stopped but not level at floor leveled 4 Up relevel start Up relevel Drive start for relevel up not used 5 Releveling up RelevelingUp Drive is releveling up 6 Dn relevel start Dn relevel start Drive start for relevel down not used 7 Releveling down RevelingDn Drive is releveling down 8 Up run start Up run start Up run start 9 Up run first Up
293. ou start the car The car will automatically slow down for hall calls if it is traveling in the proper direction To stop for a hall call in the opposite direction release the car switch to stop at the floor When you stop at a floor up and down calls at the floor are cancelled To bypass hall calls you can wire a bypass button to the bypass input on the CSTA board When this input is on the car will not slow down for calls as you pass them Emergency Power Operation Tricon provides the following types of emergency power operations The desired operation requires setting car and dispatcher parameters and operation of the car select inputs to the dis patcher In the description that follows emergency power operation is described as Phase I and Phase 2 operation Phase I recalls the cars to the recall floor Phase 2 is operating the car from the car station while on emergency power Operation Modes e 1 Automatic sequential phase 1 recall with automatic phase 2 car selection 2 Automatic sequential phase 1 recall with manual phase 2 car selection e 3 Manual phase I recall with manual phase 2 car selection All the operations above allow the car selection switches to override automatic operation and select the car manually for phase 1 recall or phase 2 operation The dispatcher provides pre transfer operation when changing to and from normal power When the pre transfer input is activated all running cars will stop at the next available flo
294. ould be ignored at this time 1 To use the keypad press the up arrow The display should change to a 0 Press the up arrow again and it should change to a 1 Press the DATA FCTN key and the value pro grammed into parameter one will be displayed Parameter 1 Current Limit should be set to 275 If itis not press the up or down arrow until 275 is reached Press enter to save this value Saved values are only held in the drive volatile RAM at this time Powering down the drive or pressing the reset button will cause this data to be lost For the data to become permanent it must be saved to the drive non volatile RAM If you wish to save any value at this time follow the procedure in Step 20 below or refer to the Quick Start Up and Reference Guide which was shipped with the controller 3 4 3 88 Manual 42 02 2T00 Access parameter 3 Enter the motor nameplate rated armature current in amps Press enter to save Access parameter 7 Enter the motor nameplate rated armature voltage in volts Press enter to save Access parameter 9 Enter the nominal AC input voltage to the drive found on termi nals L1 L2 and L3 Press enter to save Access parameter 10 Enter the pulses per revolution PPR of the motor encoder This data can usually be found on the sticker attached to the encoder Press enter to save Access parameter 11 Enter the motor nameplate RPM Press enter to save Access parameter 16 This parameter
295. ould be on when the car is above it and the DN input is on UP This input indicates that the car is to move in the up direction DN This input indicates that the car is to move in the down direction MS This input indicates that the car is to move at medium speed one floor run speed if HS is used or contract speed if contract speed is equal to or less than 200FPM HS This input indicates that the car is to move at high speed multi floor run speed DZBP Door Zone Bypass This input indicates that the door locks are being bypassed When this input is on car speed should not exceed 100 FPM Diagnostic and Mode LEDs LEDs D10 through D16 have two functions When the Limit board is in learn mode these LEDs provide feedback as learn progress is made In normal mode each LED has a numeric value and the sum of lighted LED values is the numeric indicator of a particular fault Table 4 1 Limit Board Learn Mode LED Meanings LED Meaning LED 10 Learn up limits LED 11 Learn down limits LED 12 Learn tach reverse LED 13 Learn slowdown setup fault LED 14 Learn slowdown missing fault LED 15 Learn pulse tach LED 16 Learn speed clamp Contents inde _MCE Web 45 Release to Normal Operation Mek In normal mode the sum of the value of lighted LEDs indicates a fault For example if LEDs 10 1 and 12 4 were lighted in the illustration below their sum would be 5 5 indicates an Over speed at HDSL fault
296. ower parameters Group 78 Emergency power recall time out 18 Emergency Power Recall Timeout 17 Emergency power Pre transfer 17 EMI RFI 6 Empty Floors 51 Encoder installation 11 Encoder Isolation 12 Encoder Mounting 11 Encoder Parameters 47 Encoder Wiring 12 Environmental Considerations 5 F F Terminal board 5 21 F Type Terminal board wiring 21 False Floors 50 51 Fault display 6 Final limits 36 Fire Operation flags 45 Fire Operation 28 32 34 48 Code Blue 79 Doors 45 Fire parameters Group 79 Flags 2K Limit Gripper 13 Floor leveling magnets 29 Floor Setup screen 62 Floor Table 50 Floor Table screen 81 G Gap adjust speed sensor 14 Garvac brake regulator 43 GATE 10 Gate 36 Gate and Door Bypass switch buzzer volume 7 Gate and door bypass switch enable disable 7 GMON 9 GMONI 9 GMON 2 9 GOV 10 Governor safety test 22 Group Considerations Empty floors 51 Group Dispatcher Connections 39 Group Dispatcher Parameters 52 Group Hall Board I O 82 Index 2 Manual 42 02 2T00 H Hall Call Operation 16 Hall Calls 30 31 32 38 40 51 Hand Held Unit 12 2 HDSL 5 9 HHSW board 8 HHU plugin 12 HHUJ Dispatcher connection 13 Hoistway tape 25 Hospital Emergency Phase I 19 HPV 600 Drive Faults 15 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Closed Loop 23 HPV 600 Parameters Open Loop 3 HPV 900 Drive Faults 54 HPV600 Drive Programmer 3 23 HS5 9 HUSL 5 9 l I O 24 Board 5 I O 24 LEDs 42 I O24 B
297. ower up due to incorrectly set parameters This is normal and may be ignored at this time Verify that the voltage on the motor nameplate matches the voltage input to the drive If not contact MCE Technical Support before proceeding Confirm that the three leads from the controller to the motor are connected If there are more than three motor leads make sure that the motor is wired in a wye configuration with correct field rotation or follow motor manufacturer recommendations Locate the test sheets shipped with the controller These sheets list the drive parameters calculated for your installation 3 22 Manual 42 02 2100 Contents Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 Drive Parameters Closed Loop The following procedures are used to adjust the HPV 600 drive with optional dosed loop soft ware This software allows the drive to operate with encoder feedback If the drive you are work ingon will not be using encoder feedback please refer to the earlier open loop discussion Please refer to HPV 600 AC Drive Start Up Open Loop on page 3 2 Before attempting to run the drive confirm that the parameters are set correctly Verify that parameters in the drive match those in the Test sheets For detailed information about the pro gramming unit please refer to the Magnetek HPV 600 manual Using the HPV600 Drive Programmer The HPV 600 programmer is used to pro gram the drive and to display drive data The programmer has th
298. p RMS A5 Motor Motor ID Motor Identification 4 PoleDFLT 6 MCE Test Pole DFLT MCE Test Rated Mtr Power Rated motor output power HP 1 0 500 5 0 Rated Mtr Volts Rated motor terminal RMS voltage volts 190 0 575 0 460 Rated Excit Freq Rated excitation frequency Hz 5 0 400 0 60 Rated Motor Curr Rated motor current amps 1 00 800 00 6 8 2 Motor Poles Motor poles 2 32 6 Rated Mtr Speed Rated motor speed at full load RPM 150 0 3000 0 1130 96 No Load Curr Percent no load current 96 10 0 60 0 50 Stator Leakage X Stator leakage reactance 96 0 20 0 9 0 9 0 3 10 Manual 42 02 2100 Contents Index _MCE Web Table 3 1 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open Loop Magnetek HPV 600 Rotor Leakage X Rotor leakage reactance 96 0 20 0 9 0 9 0 Stator Resist Stator resistance 96 0 20 0 1 5 1 5 Motor Iron Loss Iron loss at rated frequency 96 0 15 0 0 5 0 5 Motor Mech Loss Mechanical loss at rated frequency 0 15 0 1 0 1 0 Ovid Start Level Maximum continuous motor current 100 150 110 110 Ovid Time Out Time that defines motor overload sec 5 0 120 0 60 0 60 0 curve Flux Sat Break Flux saturation curve slope change 0 100 75 75 point Flux Sat Slope 1 Flux saturation curve slope for low 0 200 0 0 0 fluxes Flux Sat Slope 2 Flux saturation curve slope for high 0 200 0 50 50 fluxes Configure CO C1 User Sw
299. p Multi step Multi step Serial Run Command Src Run Command Source External TB External External TB Serial TB1 Serial extern Hi Lo Gain Src High low gain change switch source External TB 1 Internal Internal Serial Internal Speed Reg Type Chooses speed regulator Elev spd reg Elev sod Elev spd Pi speed reg reg reg 3 50 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive Table 3 5 HPV 900 Drive Parameters Motor Rotation Allows user to reverse direction of Forward Forward Forward or motor rotation Reverse Reverse Spd Ref Release Determines when speed reference Reg release Reg Reg release release is asserted Brake picked release Cont Confirm Src Determines if an external logic input is None None External TB used for contactor confirmation External TB Pre Torque Source Determines if a pre torque command None None None is used and if used determines source Analog input of pre torque command Serial Pre Torque Latch Chooses if analog pre torque com Not latched Not Not latched mand is latched Latched latched Pretorque Latch Determines source of pre torque latch External TB External External TB Clock control if used Serial TB Fault Reset Src Fault reset source External TB External External TB Serial TB Automatic Overspd Test Src Determines external logic source to External TB External Exter
300. p through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary Ignoring whether the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running up was greater than the value running down the car is too heavy Remove 100 pounds of weight from the car and repeat previous steps until the recorded values are equal but of opposite polarity Ignoring whether the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running down was greater than the value running up the car is too light Add 100 pounds of weight to the car and repeat preceding steps until the recorded values are equal but of opposite polarity When the values are equal but of opposite polarity the car is balanced Check how much weight is in the car It should be between 40 and 5096 of the cars rated capacity If not the counterweighting needs to be adjusted If the car is too heavy weight needs to be added to the counterweight to get the car balanced between 40 and 50 of rated capac ity If the car is too light weight needs to be removed from the counterweight to get it balanced between 40 and 50 of rated capacity Do not proceed with the adjust ment process until the car is properly balanced Contents Index _MCE Web 3 37 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Nes Motor Parameter Adjust
301. parameter Escape Hatch Open Escape hatch open Floor Gate and Locks Jumped The gate and lock contacts are made although the doors Floor are opened doors cannot close because it is presumed that the gate and lock contacts are jumped out Gate Jumped The gate contact is made although the doors are opened Floor doors cannot close because it is presumed that the gate contact is jumped out Gate Opened While Running Gate contact opened while the car was running Floor Governor Operated Governor operated Floor Hall Ack Indicators Fuse Car Hall ack lights fuse on the car local hall board is open Floor Hall Ack Indicators Fuse Disp Hall acknowledgement indicators fuse on the dispatcher Floor is open Hall Call Buttons Fuse Car Hall buttons fuse on the car local hall board is open Floor Hall Call Buttons Fuse Disp Hall buttons fuse on the dispatcher is open Floor Invalid IDZ Magnet The car is lost or the zone magnet for this floor is not Floor here or there should be no zone magnet at this floor and one is installed Invalid Rear IDZ Magnet The car is lost or the rear zone magnet for this floor is Floor not here or there should be no rear zone magnet at this floor and one is installed Lobby Fuse Car Lobby button fuse on the car local hall board is open Floor Lobby Fuse Disp Lobby up button fuse on the dispatcher is open Floor Locks Jumped The lock contacts ar
302. parameters Cycle power to the drive If fault recurs go to the Utility menu and select Restore Defaults f fault persists replace Control board Note The Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameters to be set to their correct values 3 34 Manual 42 02 2T00 Magnetek HPV 600 Table 3 4 HPV 600 Drive Faults Closed Loop Curr Reg Fault Actual current does not match the commanded current Check incoming power Check motor parameters and verify proper setting Check motor connections and motor windings for open circuit Check main contactor for bad contact If OK bad current sensor or bad drive DCU Data Fault The DCU parameters are not set correctly Check all drive parameters Cycle power to the drive If fault recurs go to the Utility menu and select Restore Defaults f fault persists replace Control board Note The Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameters to be set to their correct values Dir Conflict The commanded direc tion from the analog input does not match the polarity of the Up Dwn input Not used Drv Overload The drive has exceeded the overload curve Check motor connections main contactor contacts and motor windings Make sure the brake is lifting Verify encoder is prop erly connected and feedback matches motor speed Extrn Fault 1 External Fault 1 input is activated Not used Extrn Fault 2 External Fau
303. peed curve algorithm Adjustments to the accel rate jerk rates and decel rate are done through drive parameters Drive Programming The drive has been modified to meet MCE specifications If replacement of the drive is ever required please contact MCE Technical Support MCE will not accept any drive for warranty repair without a Return Material Authorization RMA number issued by Technical Support Removing boards from the drive without authorization may void the manufacturer warranty 3 2 Manual 42 02 2100 Contents Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 Once the controller has been powered up the drive must be programmed to operate correctly with the equipment at the job site The drive was pre programmed based on the information provided in the electrical survey but it is important to confirm ALL parameters before attempt ingto run the car The drive may fault on initial power up due to incorrectly set parameters This is normal and may be ignored at this time Verify that the voltage on the motor nameplate matches the voltage input to the drive If not contact MCE Technical Support before proceeding Confirm that the three leads from the controller to the motor are connected If there are more than three motor leads make sure the motor is wired in a wye configuration with correct field rotation or follow the motor manufacturer recommendations Locate the test sheets shipped with the controller These sheets lis
304. peed in FPM Blinking Off On 2 Limit section overspeed in FPM Blinking On Off 3 Rope gripper overspeed in FPM Blinking On On 4 Flags DS17 On rope gripper enabled DS18 On rope gripper overspeed from overspeed parameter enabled DS19 On rope gripper overspeed from governor input enabled Contents Index _MCE Web 4 13 Release to Normal Operation ek Entering Parameters 1 Press and hold S2 for 5 seconds to enter parameter mode DS25 will blink rapidly 16 times per second Parameter 1 car speed FPM value will be dis played on LEDs DS17 through DS22 2 Press S2 repeatedly to move to the desired parameter See indications table above 3 Press S1 repeatedly to change the displayed value DS17 DS22 see examples Speed in FPM Sum of lighted LEDs Value of parameter Flags enabled DS22 N n a DS22 DS18 DS19 DS20 N I a 20 40 80 160 320 be 20 320 340 4 Press S3 to exit parameter mode DS18 DS19 DS20 Ig ps17 On Function enabled ZN O A ZN J IS ps When the limit board is in parameter mode the limit section is disabled and the safety circuit is opened Parameter mode times out after 5 minutes if no buttons are pressed After time out return to normal operation is indicated by LED DS25 which will stop blinking and light steadily Inspection Learn Before the car can be moved on Inspection you must perform an inspection learn
305. pen Loop High Speed Adjustment Open Loop Start Up Procedures Closed Loop High Speed Adjustment Closed Loop Adaptive Tuning Brake Adjustment HPV 600 AC Drive Start Up Open Loop To obtain optimal ride quality and performance the drive must be tuned to the motor Tuning requires you to be familiar with the drive and AC motors If you are unfamiliar with drives of this type please contact MCE Engineering for assistance Refer to the Magnetek HPV 600 Elevator Drive Technical Manual for detailed explanation of drive features The HPV 600 drive is fully digital with configurable inputs outputs and modes of operation This section describes configuring the HPV 600 for the Tricon controller Due to the complexity of drive systems it is not possible to cover all potential problems or possibilities If you encounter difficulties please contact MCE Technical Support Use the Magnetek manual as a reference Follow the start up and adjusting procedures from this manual not the procedures from the Magnetek manual Before the controller and drive were shipped the entire system was tested at the factory All drive parameters were preset based on the information provided in the controller order form The drive should run on inspection operation with very little effort If not verify that the motor information given to MCE was correct If not contact Engineering for assistance System Overview The control system uses the HPV 600 internal s
306. pen Loop cassis paces duweiwsdvaneed DE ARTAA Sena REA 3 15 HPV 600 High Speed Adjustment Open Loop 0 cece cece eee ee aes 3 18 Car POI OL o s in ik vor GEAR EROR a CRURA RO FERRE AR eR C C 3 18 Motor Parameter Adjustments sad ese ex er XR ROERER RA ERR 3 19 Speed Curve Setting and Adjustment 0 ccc ccc cee eee cece e ee eee 3 20 Hoistway Learn for Normal Operation 0c cee c cece neces nn 3 21 HPV 600 AC Drive Start Up Closed Loop ice che he neh cu possi bo deed ees 3 22 VOI od och ccdbeeh ceandotndahssd saukeanidetet ears eceneaded 3 22 HPV 600 Drive Programming Closed Loop i suse sacrae kar rtr aan 3 22 Drive Parameters Closed Loop 4x22 54 dE RRARRARARARXEQEXFRRE AXEA a E ERRG RE 3 23 Faraor UMS esserne ndr idare eens been LEM IE EEPUSPANERKA AE AE S 3 23 dada cis TT nrETMM 3 26 HPV 600 Drive Parameter Reference Closed Loop 0c ccc nunun 3 27 HPV 600 Drive Faults Closed Loop ci n nnaou nenun vows 4x bk d REX 3 34 HPV 600 High Speed Adjustment Closed Loop 00 cece cece cece aes 3 37 Car SN oe suceso ibn CRGO IDA REEIAREDELAR A CARERE CROP de dal ice ERD 3 37 Motor Parameter AOIUSUNXICULS s sd Rr oe 099d REERPR K REP SW RR bb RR E RR eS 3 38 Speed Curve Setting and Adjustment 0 0 ccc cee cee cee eee e ee eee 3 38 HEY COU Aa TUNG oed aia as edP oh kh di ded KC a 3 39 Normal Speed Learn Operation quad ke ERRIVEXAKRTA TER EESEXREA RE ET RPAA 3 40 Magnet
307. pen both doors This parameter is overridden by the Hold door open parameter for this floor pars 26 33 21 Open doors once at 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car fourth parking floor column will cycle open close indicated doors 0 2 Do not open doors 1 2 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 2 Open both doors This parameter is overridden by the Hold door open parameter for this floor pars 26 33 22 Open doors once at fifth 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car parking floor column will cycle open close indicated doors 0 2 Do not open doors 1 2 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 2 Open both doors This parameter is overridden by the Hold door open parameter for this floor pars 26 33 23 Open doors once at sixth 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car parking floor column will cycle open close indicated doors 0 2 Do not open doors 1 2 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 2 Open both doors This parameter is overridden by the Hold door open parameter for this floor pars 26 33 24 Open doors once at sev 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car enth parking floor column will cycle open close indicated doors 0 2 Do not open doors 1 2 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 2 Open both doors This parameter is overridden by the Hold door open parameter for this floor pa
308. pensation ropes or chains to insure they are of a proper length to overtravel without causing damage Check all rope guards car and counterweight to ensure they are tight and will prevent the cables from jumping off the sheave Ensurethat the car and the counterweight have proper overhead clearance when the buffers are fully compressed Contents Index _MCE Web 4 19 Release to Normal Operation Nes Contract Speed Buffer Test Car Before performing test ensure you read and complete Limit adjustments carefully and have checked hoistway over travel clearances A Danger If the car has a counterweight safety ensure that the safety will not apply by tying down the safety actuating arm prior to performing this test Failure to prevent the safety from apply ing may result in the safety applying while the buffer is compressed Begin the test with Fully loaded car at the top floor with one floor added to the floor table The car should be level at the top floor The car should be on door disable The hand held must be displaying a position one floor above the actual top floor 1 Connectajumper on the down direction high speed D2S1 to D2S2 and low speed D1S1to D1S2 slowdown 2 Jump the Limit board safety contacts J 5 1 to J 5 2 and J 6 1to J 6 2 3 Usingthe simplex parking parameter send the car to floor 1 The car will not slow down at the bottom floor and will impact the car buffer at contract spe
309. peration You must now perform a normal operating speed learn operation using controls on the Limit Board Please refer to the learn operation information for your particular Limit Board in Section 4 of this guide Please refer to Limit Board Standard on page 4 3 Please refer to 2K Limit Gripper Board on page 4 9 Contents Index _MCE Web 3 61 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Bof ee Yaskawa F7 Drive The Yaskawa F7 drive is capable of open and closed loop operation For closed loop Flux Vector mode operation the optional encoder PG card must be installed If purchased the PG card was installed and tested at the factory Contact MCE Engineering if you require closed loop operation and do not have a PG option card installed PG Option Card PG Connection Terminals For MCE control application custom software provides added control over the sequence of operations Additionally the software provides ride tuning features and speed display in feet minute display and entry To understand and access these features make sure you have a copy of the supplemental instructions for software VSF110 12 This supplement describes features in addition to or alterations of standard drive software Check monitor U1 14 to verify that the correct software is loaded on to the drive If the software is not VSF11012 contact MCE Technical Support Refe
310. ply is as specified Proper motor branch circuit protection in the form of a fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker must be provided for each elevator according to applicable electrical code Each discon nect or breaker must be clearly labeled with the elevator number The electrical contractor must determine the wire size for the main AC power supply and for the wiring from the disconnect or breaker to the controller or isolation transformer 2 Connect AC supply wiring as shown in the job prints 2 8 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web AC Power Connections I nitial Power Up After connecting power it is a good practice to temporarily power up the control to check func tionality before connecting any field wiring 1 Verify that the Inspection switch on the Relay Board is in the Inspection position Verify that the Run Stop switch is in the Stop position Visually check for loose connections or components Power up the controller Check that the 24VDC and 110VDC LEDs on the Relay Board are on f not verify all transformer and power supply voltage levels are correct per the job prints Verify all fuses are intact Check phase to phase input voltage If necessary shut off main power and swap two of the incoming feeds at the controller main terminal 6 Checkthe status of the three LEDs on the top left of the I O 24 boards The green LED on each board should be blinking See below if otherwise Sol
311. pment from its factory to be free from defects in workmanship and materials Any defect appearing more than 15 months from the date of shipment from the factory shall be deemed to be due to ordinary wear and tear Manufacturer however assumes no risk or liability for results of the use of the products purchased from it including but without limiting the generality of the forgoing 1 The use in combination with any electrical or electronic components circuits systems assemblies or any other material or equipment 2 Unsuitability of this product for use in any circuit assembly or environment Purchasers rights under this warranty shall consist solely of requiring the manufacturer to repair or in manufacturer s sole discretion replace free of charge F O B factory any defective items received at said factory within the said 15 months and determined by manufacturer to be defective The giving of or failure to give any advice or recommendation by manufacturer shall not constitute any warranty by or impose any liability upon the manufacturer This warranty constitutes the sole and exclusive remedy of the purchaser and the exclusive liability of the manufacturer AND IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTI ES EXPRESSED IMPLIED OR STATUTORY AS TO MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR PURPOSE SOLD DESCRIPTION QUALITY PRODUCTIVENESS OR ANY OTHER MATTER In no event will the manufacturer be liable for special or consequential damages or for delay in performanc
312. puts Terminals Connectors Name Label AF 1 A1 1 In car inspection switch CINS AF 2 A1 2 Access inspection switch AINS AF 3 A1 3 Fire car switch FCAR AF 4 A1 4 Fire hold switch FHLD AF 5 A1 5 Calls reset button RES AF 6 A1 6 Independent switch IND AF 7 A1 7 Door open button DOB AF 8 A1 8 Door close button DCB BO 1 B1 1 Handicap chime enable Attendant hall bypass HEN BO 2 B1 2 Top of car insp 2 TIN2 BO 3 B1 3 Attendant up button front door hold ATTU BO 4 B1 4 Attendant down button rear door hold ATID BO 5 B1 5 Car MG switch CMG BO 6 B1 6 Rear door open button RDOB BO 7 B1 7 Rear door close button RDCB BO 8 B1 8 Stop switch monitor SSM CL 1 C1 1 Car call button for floor 1 CC1 CL 2 C1 2 Car call button for floor 2 CC2 CL 3 C1 3 Car call button for floor 3 CC3 CL 4 C1 4 Car call button for floor 4 CCA4 CL 5 C1 5 Car call button for floor 5 CC5 CL 6 C1 6 Car call button for floor 6 CC6 CL 7 C1 7 Car call button for floor 7 CC7 CL 8 C1 8 Car call button for floor 8 CC8 5 28 Manual 42 02 2100 Contents index MCE Web Table 5 9 Car Station Board CSTA N v6 2 Output Examples A17 1 2000 Main Menus Car Station Board Outputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AF 25 AF26 A3 1to A3 2 Fire lock bypass FBP AF 17 AF 18 A2 1to A2 2 Stop switch fire bypass 2 SBY2 AF 27 AF 28 A3 3 to A3 4 Stop switch fire bypass SBYP AF 19 AF20 A2 3to A2 4
313. r Parameters 108 Main recall floor Default value 2 Settothe Fire Phase 1recall floor 109 Alternate recall floor Default value 3 Set to the Fire Phase 1 alternate recall floor 110 Dispatcher parameter 49 Smoke detectors are reset by lobby recall switch Default value No When this parameter is set to Yes fire smoke detectors that are set to latch on the controller 117 set to yes can be cleared when the lobby recall switch is operated 111 Constant pressure on DOB to open doors Default value Yes When set to Yes the doors will open only with constant pressure on the open button When the doors are fully opened they will remain open If the open button is released before the doors are fully open they will close If set to No a single operation of the open button will open the doors 112 Constant pressure on DCB to close doors Default value No When set to Yes the doors will close only with constant pressure on the door close button If set to No a single operation of the close button will close the doors 113 Allow recall while in attendant or independent operation Default value Yes When set to Yes if a caris in attendant or independent mode it will be forcibly recalled to the Fire recall floor after a timer has elapsed 114 Recall wait time if car on attendant or independent Default value 25 0 sec Setsthe timer for parameter 114 115 Close doors
314. r If the frequency was less than 3 hertz increase the inspection speed If the frequency was greater than 3 hertz decrease the inspection speed Repeat until the output of the drive is exactly 3 hertz Using a hand tach monitor the speed of the car If the car is moving at less than the inspection speed programmed increase the MOTOR MID VOLTS parameter in the Motor A5 menu Ifthe caris moving faster decrease the parameter Repeat until the car is running at the speed programmed This is the final setting for the MOTOR MID VOLTS parameter Change inspection speed parameter SPEED COMMAND 3 A3 so it is 1 7 of con tract speed Using the programmer display motor frequency This can be found under Display DO Power Data D2 MOTOR FREQUENCY Monitor the output frequency of the drive while running the car up on inspection If the frequency is not exactly 1 hertz stop the car If the frequency was less than 1 hertz increase inspection speed If the frequency was greater than 1 hertz decrease inspection speed The motor may stall at this low frequency Ignore this for now 10 IL Repeat until the output of the drive is exactly 1 hertz Using a hand tach monitor car speed If the car is moving at less than the inspection speed programmed increase the MOTOR MIN VOLTS Motor A5 menu If the car is moving faster decrease the parameter Repeat until the car is running at the speed programmed This is the final setting for MOTOR M
315. r to section 3 of the F7 Users Manual for keypad instructions A Caution Elevator control products must be installed by experienced field personnel This manual does not address code requirements The field personnel must know all the rules and regulations pertaining to the safe installation and running of elevators 3 62 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Yaskawa F7 Drive Yaskawa Programmer A Caution Read and observe all warnings listed in the F7 User Manual Program the F7 using the drive keypad For a complete description of keypad use refer to Section 3 of the F7 Users Manual The following parameter description is for information and reference only All necessary parameter settings were made at the factory using the information supplied in the field survey No changes should be made until the system is powered up and verified later in this proce dure L Js Digital I nputs Iva Yaskawa F7 Drive output is controlled via programmable digital inputs preset and checked at the factory for your application Ifyou believe any of these to be in error call MCE technical assistance me RUN STOP Table 3 7 Yaskawa F7 Drive Inputs Terminal Function Parameter Setting 3 Base Block used for emergency stops H1 01 9 S4 Fault Reset H1 02 14 S5 Digital Speed Input 1 H1 03 80 S6 Digital Speed Input 2 H1 04 81 S7 Digital Speed Input 3 H1 05 82 S8 Jog Reference H
316. r controller parameters To move into the Parameter screen use 8 or key To return to the previous menu use key To view all the parameters use the 2 or up arrow key to move backwards one 1 parame ter 7 amp 1 keys together to move backwards ten 10 parameters 9 amp 3 keys together to move backwards twenty 20 parameters 8 or down arrow key to move forward one 1 parameter 7 amp 1 keys together to move forward ten 10 parameters 9 amp 3 keys together to move forward twenty 20 parameters 5 To change a numeric parameter Press the key You will see a blinking cursor Enter the value using the numbers on the key pad Press the key to accept You will move back to a view screen Pressthe key to abort change You will move back to a view screen To change a Yes No flag Pressthe key You will see a blinking cursor Press the Yes or 2 key for yes Press the No or 8 key for no Press the key to accept You will move back to a view screen Pressthe key to abort change You will move back to a view screen To return to the Parameters menu must be at a view screen use the key Contents Index _MCE Web 5 73 Tricon Configuration MeE The following table provides a list of parameters Table 5 28 Dispatcher Parameter Screen Parameters Version 6 2 HHU Display Value Range Default Value Units Help Maximum number of cars 1 8 2
317. r sized in conformance to all applicable national state and local electrical codes in order to provide the necessary motor branch circuit protection for the Drive Unit and motor Incorrect motor branch circuit protection will void the warranty and may create a hazardous condition Proper grounding is vitally important to safe and successful operation Bring your ground wire to the system subplate You must choose the proper conductor size and minimize the resistance to ground by using the shortest possible routing See National Electrical Code Article 250 95 or the applicable local electrical code Before applying power to the controller physically check all the power resistors and other compo nents located in the resistor cabinet and inside the controller Components loosened during ship ment may cause damage For proper operation of the AC Drive Unit in your controller you must make sure that 1 A direct solid ground is provided in the machine room to properly ground the controller and motor Indirect grounds such as the building structure or a water pipe may not provide proper grounding and could act as an antenna to radiate RFI noise thus disturbing sensitive equipment in the building Improper grounding may also render any RFI filter ineffective 2 The incoming power to the controller and the outgoing power wires to the motor are in their respective separate grounded conduits This equipment may contain voltages as high as 1000 volts
318. rake pick voltage required for the job is obtained 6 Turn the main line power OFF Remove thejumper between P11 and regulator J 1 1 7 Turn the main line power ON Run the car on inspection and wait until the LED over the V I 3 pot lights 8 Adjust V I 3 until approximately 60 brake lifting voltage is obtained or the brake holding voltage previously measured in Step 2 If the brake drops at this level stop the car turn the pot clockwise 1 full turn and attempt to run the car again 9 Jump 13 toJ 1 2 releveling input 10 Adjust V1 2 to approximately 80 of brake hold voltage This is the releveling brake voltage and may be adjusted higher or lower for a drag brake 11 The brake shoes should not lift completely off the drum If they do stop the car Turn the V I 2 pot counterclockwise a couple of turns and repeat step 11 If the brake shoes lift completely on relevel there may be insufficient torque in the hoist motor to assure adequate leveling control Remove the jumper between J 1 3 and J 1 2 Turn the ACCI pot fully clockwise This will allow a rapid response of the brake regulator from a lower voltage level to a higher voltage level 14 Turn the DEC1 pot fully clockwise This will allow rapid response of the brake regulator from a higher voltage level to a lower voltage level This will also help prevent excessive arcing on the contacts of the B relay After all drive adjustments have been made a ramped release of the br
319. rded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running down was greater than the value running up the car is too light Add 100 pounds of weight to the car and repeat preceding steps until the recorded values are equal but of opposite polarity When the values are equal but of opposite polarity the car is balanced Check how much weight is in the car It should be between 40 and 5096 of the cars rated capacity If not the counterweighting needs to be adjusted If the car is too heavy weight needs to be added to the counterweight to get the car balanced between 40 and 50 of rated capac ity If the car is too light weight needs to be removed from the counterweight to get it balanced between 40 and 50 of rated capacity Do not proceed with the adjust ment process until the car is properly balanced Magnetek HPV 600 Motor Parameter Adjustments In order to perform correctly the drive needs to be programmed for the correct motor values Volts hertz ratio must be correctly set or the motor may stall with a load or at slow speed L 2 3 Place a full load into the car Change inspection speed parameter SPEED COMMAND 3 A3 so it is 596 of con tract speed Using the programmer display motor frequency This can be found under Display DO Power Data D2 MOTOR FREQUENCY Monitor the output frequency of the drive while runningthe car up on inspection If the frequency is not exactly 3 hertz stop the ca
320. ree menu levels Menu level Sub menu level Entry level There are five keys on the front of the programmer These keys perform different functions depending on which menu level is active At the Main Menu level the left and right arrows move the programmer between Main Menu 3 selections The up and down keys move the programmer into the various Sub Menus at each Main Menu selection Pressing the Enter key will move the programmer into the Sub Menu cur rently displayed At the Sub Menu level the up and down arrows display various parameters in the Sub Menu Pressing the Escape key will move the programmer back to the Main Menu level Pressing the Enter key while at the Sub Menu level moves the programmer into the Entry level to modify the displayed parameter At the Entry level the left and right arrows move a cursor to highlight data When a digit is highlighted pressing the up arrow will increase the value and pressing the down arrow will decrease it Pressing the Enter key will save the value displayed on the programmer Pressing the Escape key will move the programmer back to the Sub Menu level Parameter Settings Check the following parameters to confirm they are set correctly for your application Note that many parameters are not listed because their default values will not need to be modified or they are not used in this application Adjust AO menu 1 Goto sub menu Drive A1 2 CONTRACT CAR SPD Rated contract sp
321. reinstall the clamp to hold the tape in position Tighten the clamp bolts ONLY LIGHTLY 6 Cutthe steel tape one foot below the clamp bottom 7 Loopthe steel tape and insert the end through the clamp so that about 1 inch protrudes from the clamp bottom Tighten the clamp bolts securely 8 Adjustthe spring tensioning nut to provide adequate tensioning of the tape in the hoist way Use the second double nut to insure the first nut is unable to loosen 9 During installation the edges of the tape may be gouged After tape installation is com plete go over the tape edges with a fine file to remove any burrs or gouges This will ensure quiet operation of the SET 9000 system as the car travels at contract speed 10 After smoothing the tape edges wipe off all excess oil and dirt from the face of the tape so that the magnets will stick properly when they are installed later Do not use rags that leave lint on the tape during cleaning 2 26 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Completing I nstallation I nterconnect Box Installation The interconnect box contains the electronics that interpret the landing sensor inputs for the car controller Depending on your installation requirements you may have one of two intercon nect boxes Cartop Station Most installations use a cartop station containing not only the board that connects to the landing sensor but boards performing other functions as well Control Box In some in
322. rformance Overtemp Fault The heatsink tempera ture is too high Drive heatsink temperature exceeded 1052C 2219F Check fans on drive make sure adequate airflow is present Overvolt Fault The DC Bus voltage is too high DC bus voltage exceeded 850 volts on a 460 volt drive or 425 volts on a 230 volt drive Check braking resistance connected and sized properly Check for high AC line Confirm input volt age to drive If above OK possible bad braking IGBT Drive unit needs to be replaced Contents ide _MCE Web 3 55 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 6 HPV 900 Drive Faults MeE PCU Data Fault PCU parameters not cor rect Check all drive parameters Cycle power to drive If fault recurs go to Utility menu and select Restore Defaults If fault per sists replace Control board Note Restore Defaults will require all drive parameters be set to their correct values Phase Fault Open motor phase Check motor motor connections motor windings and main con tactor contacts Setup Fault 1 Rated motor speed poles and frequency not set correctly RATED EXCI T FREQ A5 RATED MTR SPEED A5 and MOTOR POLES A4 do not satisfy formula 9 6 120 Excit Freq Motor Poles Motor Speed 1222 3 Setup Fault 2 Encoder PPR and motor poles not set correctly Check ENCODER PULSES MOTOR POLES parameters Must sat isfy formula Encoder Pulses
323. rive is damaged Normal Speed Learn Operation You must now perform a normal speed learn operation using controls on the Limit Board Please refer to the learn operation information for your particular Limit Board in Section 4 of this guide Please refer to Limit Board Standard on page 4 3 Please refer to 2K Limit Gripper Board on page 4 9 Contents Index _MCE Web 3 87 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Nes Magnetek DSD 412 DC Drive Magnetek Drive installation instructions can be found in the separate manufacturers manual Magnetek Technical Manual CS 0274 enclosed with the project shipment The drive has been modified to meet MCE specifications The Magnetek Technical Manual shipped with the elevator control may be used with the exceptions listed below The exceptions listed below supersede those in the standard manual Hardware Modifications Typically the only hardware modification may be the occasional use of a motor field trans former You received a motor field transformer if it was dictated by the project specification data Drive Programming Once the controller is powered up the drive must be programmed to interface correctly with the equipment on the job site MCE has pre programmed the drive based on the information pro vided in the survey but it is important to confirm settings before attempting to run the car The drive may fault on initial power up due to incorrect parameters This is normal and sh
324. rive without authorization may void the manufacturer war ranty Contents Ide _MCE Web 341 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Nes Once the controller has been powered up the drive must be programmed to operate correctly with the equipment on the job site MCE has pre programmed the drive based on the informa tion provided in the electrical survey but it is important to confirm ALL parameters before attempting to run the car The drive may fault on initial power up due to incorrectly set parameters This is normal and may be ignored at this time Verify that the voltage on the motor nameplate matches the voltage input to the drive If not contact MCE Technical Support before proceeding Confirm that the three leads from the controller to the motor are connected If there are more than three motor leads make sure that the motor is wired in a wye configuration with correct field rotation or follow the motor manufacturer recommendations Locate the test sheets shipped with the controller These sheets list the drive parameters calcu lated for your installation Drive Parameters Before attempting to run the drive confirm that the parameters are set correctly Verify that the parameters in the drive match those on the Test sheets For information on using the program ming unit please refer to the Magnetek HPV 900 manual The following parameters are the HPV900 key parameters and parameters which have been changed from t
325. ront door down hall call lockouts at this Yes No floor Front CC Front Car Call lockouts Yes No Rear HU Car has rear door up hall call lockouts at this floor Yes No Rear HD Car has rear door down hall call lockouts at this floor Yes No Rear CC Rear Car Call lockouts Yes No To view all the floors use the 20rup arrow key to move backwards one 1 floor 8 or down arrow key to move forward one 1 floor To edit a floor Press the key when you are on the desired floor You will see a blinking cursor Keep pressing the key until you reach the desired field Enterthe value using the numbers on the keypad or the Yes No keys Press the key to accept You will move to the next field If you are on the last field you will move back to a view screen Pressthe key to abort change You will move back to a view screen To return to the Floor Table menu must be at a view screen use the key The car will reject up calls at the top floor and down calls at the bottom floor Therefore if you are adding floors add the top and the bottom floor first Then add all the intermediate floors 5 53 Tricon Configuration Cm CE I ndicator Set Up View amp Edit Screen This setup menu is used to program the heavy duty CE fixture driver board that has an Eche lon LON networking chip and is directly connected to the Tricon serial network This configu ration is typically used when more than four CE f
326. ror OPENING ERR Door failed to open timeout 31 State 31 State 31 32 State 32 State 32 33 State 33 State 33 34 State 34 State 34 11 Door Operator 0 Init 1 No door No door No door programmed on this riser 2 Stopped open Stopped open Door is fully open and power removed 3 Stop closed Stopped closed Door is fully closed and power removed 4 Stopped ajar Stopped ajar Door is stopped neither fully opened nor closed and power is removed 5 Opening Opening Door is opening 6 Opened Opened Door is fully opened 7 Closing Closing Door is closing 8 Closed Closed Door is fully closed door close limit is on 9 Locking Locking Door is locking closing waiting for gates and locks 10 Drop cam Drop cam Drop retiring cam 11 Locked Locked Door is locked locks and gates are made 12 Closing error CLOSE ERROR Doors did not fully close Door close limit did not open in Par 17 13 Opening error OPEN ERROR Door did not fully open 5 11 Tricon Configuration MeE Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 282 and HHU Version 6 262 03 07 5 12 Manual 42 02 2T00 outer door zone 14 Locking GL error GL INPUT OFF GL input did not make off during door closing 15 Locking lock error LOCK ERROR Lock did not make during door closing 16 Locking gate GATE ERROR Gate did not make during door cl
327. rrent regulator differential gain 0 80 1 20 1 00 1 00 Id Reg Prop Gain Flux current regulator proportional gain 0 20 0 40 0 30 0 30 Iq Reg Diff Gain Torque current regulator differential gain 0 80 1 20 1 00 1 00 Iq Reg Prop Gain Torque current regulator proportional gain 0 20 0 40 10 30 0 30 PWM Frequency Carrier frequency kHz 2 5 16 0 10 0 10 0 UV Alarm Level Voltage level for undervoltage alarm 96 80 99 90 90 UV Fault Level Voltage level for undervoltage fault 96 50 88 80 80 Extern Reactance External choke reactance 96 0 10 0 0 Input L L Volts Nominal line line AC input Voltage RMS volts 110 480 Drive dep A5 Motor Motor ID Motor Identification 4 PoleDFLT 6 MCE Test Pole DFLT MCE Test Rated Mtr Power Rated motor output power HP 1 0 500 5 0 Rated Mtr Volts Rated motor terminal RMS voltage volts 190 0 575 0 460 Rated Excit Freq Rated excitation frequency Hz 5 0 400 0 60 Rated Motor Curr Rated motor current amps 1 00 800 00 6 8 Motor Poles Motor poles 2 32 6 Rated Mtr Speed Rated motor speed at full load RPM 50 0 3000 0 1130 96 No Load Curr Percent no load current 96 10 0 60 0 450 i Stator Leakage X Stator leakage reactance 0 20 0 9 0 9 0 Rotor Leakage X Rotor leakage reactance 96 0 20 0 9 0 9 0 Stator Resist Stator resistance 96 0 20 0 1 5 1 5 Motor Iron Loss Iron loss at rated frequency 96 0 15 0 0 5 0 5 Motor Mech Loss Mechanical loss at rated frequency 96 0
328. rs 26 33 5 76 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Table 5 28 Dispatcher Parameter Screen Parameters Main Menus 25 Open doors once at 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car eighth parking floor column will cycle open close indicated doors 0 Do not open doors 1 2 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter is overridden by the Hold door open parameter for this floor pars 26 33 26 Hold doors open at first 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car parking floor column will hold the indicated doors open 0 2 Do not open doors 1 2 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter overrides the Open doors once parameter for this floor pars 18 25 27 Hold doors open at sec 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car ond parking floor column will hold the indicated doors open 0 2 Do not open doors 1 2 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 2 Open both doors This parameter overrides the Open doors once parameter for this floor pars 18 25 28 Hold doors open at third 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car parking floor column will hold the indicated doors open 0 2 Do not open doors 1 2 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 2 Open both doors This parameter overrides the Open doors once parameter for this fl
329. rs may occur in any order Order is dictated by error and time Errors that occur only on NYCHA controllers are marked with an asterisk Table 5 2 Car Errors Display Table v6 282 ERROR NAME HELP PARAMETER Between Floors Car stopped in between floors Floor Bottom Final Limit Operated Bottom final limit operated Floor Brake Drop Error Brake proving contact did not close when controller Floor dropped the brake Brake Lift Error Brake proving contact did not open when controller lifted Floor the brake Cannot Close Door Door operator cannot fully close the door Floor Cannot Close Rear Door Cannot close rear door Floor Cannot Drop Cam The cam did not drop at the indicated floor Floor Cannot Lock Gate The door operator cannot lock the door because the gate Floor contact does not close Cannot Lock GL The door operator cannot lock the door because the GL input is Floor off Cannot Lock Lock The door operator cannot lock the door because the lock con Floor tacts do not close Cannot Lock Rear Gate The door operator cannot lock the rear door because the Floor gate contact does not close Cannot Lock Rear GL The door operator cannot lock the rear door because the GL Floor input is off Cannot Lock Rear Lock The door operator cannot lock the rear door because the lock Floor contacts do not close Cannot Open Door The car was unable to open the fron
330. ry locks opened while the car was moving or while the car was halted Floor Primary Rear Lock Lost The swing doors rear primary locks opened while the Floor car was moving or while the car was halted Rear Close Limit Opened While Rear close limit opened while running Floor Running Relays Drop Error Relays failed to operate properly they did not drop Floor Relays Pick Error Relays failed to operate properly they did not pick Floor Relevel Oscillation The car tried too many times to relevel at a floor from Floor both directions Reset A hardware reset has occurred indicating that the car controller power has been cycled No parameter Rope Gripper Tripped The rope gripper was tripped due to uncontrolled move Floor ment of the car Safety Edge Obstruction Safety edge input remains on 30 seconds after the car Floor went on nudging Safety Edge Rear Obstruction Safety edge rear input remains on 30 seconds after the Floor car went on nudging Safety Line Open The safety line opened Floor Safety Line Open in Flight The safety line opened while the car was moving Floor Seismic switch activated Seismic operation seismic switch active No parameter Timed Out of Service Car was unable to respond within designated time and is now out of service Floor Up Down Slowdowns at the Same Time TOC Stop Switch Operated Car top stop switch operated Floor
331. s Contents ide _MCE Web 40 Rdoor nudging mode 0 5 0 enum 0 No nudging 0 disabled 1 Buzzer only 1 5 see manual 2 Buzz Electric Eye bypass 3 Buzz EE bypass SE stops door 4 Buzz EE bypass low pressure close 5 Buzz EE bypass low pressure close SE stops Selects one of five nudging operating modes 41 Rdoor Time after clos 0 255 20 each If the car has a direction and the doors can ing start to begin nudg not close within this time door will begin ing nudging operation 42 Rdoor op Open time 0 25 5 15 sec If doors cannot open within this time they out time will reclose then try again until the retry count is reached 43 Rdoor op Close time O 25 5 15 Sec Rear door close T O time out time 44 Rdoor op Door lock fail O 25 5 3 sec Rear door lock T O time ure timeout time 45 Rdoor op Flag 1 yes no no yes no 46 Rdoor op Open output yes no no yes no The rear door open output will be kept stays ON when door always ON while the door is opening or opened opened WARNING Some door operators could be damaged if this flag is set 47 Rdoor op Close output yes no no yes no Set this flag for door operators that do not turns OFF when door run with power Example Moline closes 48 Rdoor op No close limit yes no no yes no Set to yes if the door operator does not have a close limit The controller uses the door gate contact to d
332. s A4 and UV FAULT LEVEL A4 Check braking resistance and connections Verify proper AC input voltage to drive Possible disturbances on AC line Undervolt Alarm DC Bus voltage low dur ing run DC bus voltage dropped below user entered values of INPUT L L Volts A4 and UV ALARM LEVEL A4 Check braking resistance and connections Verify proper AC input voltage to drive Possible disturbance on AC line Contents inde _MCE Web 3 17 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Nes HPV 600 High Speed Adjustment Open Loop The drive should now be running on inspection speed When commanded to run in the up direction the car should run up and when commanded to run down the car should run down Use a hand tach to confirm that the speed displayed on the drive programmer at the parameter DISPLAY DO ELEVATOR DATA D1 SPEED REFERENCE exactly matches the speed at which the car is running While observing the hand tach run the car up and down in the middle section of the hoistway Modify the CONTRACT MTR SPEED parameter under the ADJ UST AO MOTOR A5 menu to exactly achieve the speed displayed at SPEED REFERENCE Car Balancing In order for the drive to perform properly the car must be properly balanced Geared cars are typically balanced with 40 50 of the cars rated capacity To confirm this 1 2 oO RO 10 IL 3 18 Manual 42 02 2T00 From the car top run the car on inspection to the center of
333. s and disables seismic operation and also defines how the car will operate on seismic or earthquake mode If set to zero 0 seismic operation is disabled Other operating states are enabled by entering the sum of the desired Flag numbers into the parameter For example to enable Flags 1 2 and 4 you would enter a seven 7 Table 1 2 Seismic Parameter 168 Settings Flag Enables 1 Seismic inputs and outputs on the EXT board are enabled according to ANSI A17 1 2000 code Active CWS input will cause an emergency stop after which the car will be in earth quake operation and will move to and level at the first available floor in the direc tion away from the counterweight and open its doors If CWS is off when the car is returned to a floor it will return to Automatic service at reduced speed If CWS is continuously ON the car will not return to service An active SAS input alone will cause the car to slow down and stop at the next available floor The car will then be returned to service at reduced speed A momentarily active SRE input will reset seismic operation provided both CWS and SAS inputs are inactive When set CWS or SAS inputs will return the car to a floor in a direction away from the counterweight open the doors for passenger exit and remove the car from service If the CWS input is not continuously on the following operations are allowed at reduced speed Lobby Phase 1 fire recall Code Blue recall
334. s doors and allow passengers to exit If the car is on Fire Phase 2 the doors will operate as defined for that mode When in earthquake operation the SAL Seismic Activity Light output will be enabled If on independent or attendant service the BUZ buzzer output will be enabled until the car is returned to a landing SRE Seismic Reset input Connected to momentary reset button Resets earthquake oper ation provided SAS and CWS inputs are both OFF POS Counterweight Position Switch input Connected to a switch mounted on the cartop or hoistway positioned such that its contacts will be closed when the car is above the coun terweight and open when the car is below the counterweight This switch will retain its state regardless of power status SAL Seismic Activity Light output Connected to a warning light Active when the car is on earthquake operation BUZ Buzzer output Connected to an audible signal Active during earthquake operation if the car is on independent or attendant operation until the car has been leveled to a floor for five seconds 1 22 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web T T Quick Topics Installation Install Sequence Safety Installation Considerations Equipment Grounding AC Power Connections Motor and Brake Connections Construction Operation Completing Installation Car to Group Wiring Running on Inspection Mode he Installation Installation This section contains Install Sequence
335. s is required 4 Correct any insulation problems before proceeding with installation Insulation prob lems may indicate a serious problem in the equipment w Motor Wiring Incoming power to the controller and outgoing power wires to the motor must be through sepa rate grounded conduits 1 Refer to the Power section drawing in your job prints 2 Make connections as shown Be sure to follow any notes regarding wire sizes Brake Connection 1 Referto the brake circuit drawing in your job prints to verify the configuration of the braking circuit Brake control and brake adjustment resistors vary from job to job 2 Connectthe wires from the controller to the brake as shown in the job prints Remember that brake wires must not be routed in the same conduit with motor power or velocity encoder wires Brake Mechanics Check basic brake characteristics at this time Ensurethat the brake mechanism is clean and in good condition Checkthat the brake lining makes good contact with the machine braking surface at least 9596 of the pad must be in contact with the braking surface Check that the adjustment of the brake solenoid is not preventing the brake from fully applying when it is not energized If you have the manufacturer recommended brake torque settings check to see that the spring adjustments are equal and are torqued to at least that setting 2 10 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Motor Brake and Encoder
336. s source of brake pick Serial command Brake Pick CNFM Determines if a logic input is used None None None for brake pick confirm External TB 1 Brake Hold Src If drive controls mechanical brake Internal Internal Internal determines source of brake hold Serial command 3 11 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 1 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open Loop MeE Ramped Stop Sel Chooses between normal stop and None None None torque ramp down stop Ramp on stop Ramp Down En Src Determines source that signals External TB 1 External External TB torque ramp down stop if used Run logic tbl Serial Brk Pick Flt Brake pick fault enable Enable Disable Disable Disable Brk Hold Fit Ena Brake hold fault enable Enable Disable Disable Disable Ext Torq Cmd Src When Speed Reg Type External None None None Reg sets source of torque command Serial Dir Confirm Confirms proper analog signal polar Enabled Disabled Disabled ity when set to Enable and a logic Disabled input is programmed to Run Up and Run Down S Curve Abort Addresses how S Curve Speed Ref Enabled Disabled Disabled erence Generator handles a reduc Disabled tion in speed command before S Curve Generator has reached target speed Fast Flux Reduces starting takeoff time by Enabled Enabled Enabled reducing motor fluxing time Disabled Main DIP Ena Enables Mains DIP Speed A1 Enabled Disabled
337. sabled 2 Exchange Phase change rotation direc tion DC Injection Braking B2 01 DCInj Start Freq DC Injection Braking Start Frequency speed Hz 0 0 10 0 1 5 1 5 B2 02 DCInj Current DC Injection Braking Current N A to Flux Vec 96 0 100 50 50 tor B2 03 DCInj Time Start DC Injection Braking Time at Start sec 0 00 10 00 0 00 ui V F Control open loop 0 20 Flux Vector closed loop 0 0 B2 04 DCInj TimegStop DC Injection Braking Time at Stop sec 0 00 10 000 50 0 50 Yaskawa F7 Drive Contents Index _MCE Web Accel Decel Field Adjustable Parameters are shaded C1 01 Accel Rate 1 Acceleration Rate 1 f s 0 01 8 00 3 00 C1 02 Decel Rate 1 Deceleration Rate 1 f s2 0 01 8 00 3 00 C1 03 Accel Rate 2 Acceleration Rate 2 f s2 0 01 8 00 3 00 3 00 C1 04 Decel Rate 2 Deceleration Rate 2 f s 0 01 8 00 16 00 6 00 C1 05 Accel Rate 3 Acceleration Rate 3 f s2 0 01 8 00 6 00 6 00 C1 06 Decel Rate 3 Deceleration Rate 3 f s 0 01 8 00 6 00 6 00 C1 07 Accel Rate 4 Acceleration Rate 4 f s2 0 01 8 00 3 00 d C1 08 Decel Rate 4 Deceleration Rate 4 f s2 0 01 8 00 3 00 m C1 09 Fast Stop Rate Fast Stop Rate f s 0 01 8 00 3 00 3 00 C1 11 Acc Dec SW fre Accel Decel switching level Hz 0 00 400 0 0 0 0 Motor Slip Compensation C3 01 Slip Comp Gain Slip Compensation Gain
338. se of deceleration to zero fs3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 when slowing the elevator to leveling speed A3 Multistep Ref Speed command 1 Multi Step Speed command 1 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 4 Speed command 2 Multi Step Speed command 2 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 12 Speed Command 3 Multi Step Speed command 3 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 45 Speed command 4 Multi Step Speed command 4 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 Speed Command 5 Multi Step Speed command 5 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed command 6 Multi Step Speed command 6 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed Command 7 Multi Step Speed command 7 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 3 29 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 3 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Closed Loop MeE Speed command 8 Multi Step Speed command 8 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 Speed Command 9 Multi Step Speed command 9 ft m _ 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 10 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 10 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 11 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 11 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 12 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 12 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 13 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 13 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 14 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 14 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 15 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 15 A4 Power Convert Id Reg Diff gain Flux Cu
339. se speed regulator and pick LPR relay which picks loop contactor 40 Response Tracking delay between drive commanded RAD 1 15 6 0 6 0 speed and actual motor speed Sets band width of speed regulator Tracking delay sec 1 Response Higher values result in less delay tighter control 3 95 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 18 DSD 412 Drive Parameters MeE 41 System Inertia Sets system inertia in terms of time to accel SEC 0 1 9 9 2 0 2 erate to contract motor speed at rated torque Acts as a gain multiplier internal to drive software 42 Stability Regulator damping for smoother transi 0 2 9 9 1 2 tions Modifies speed regulator response to correct system inertia mismatch Adjust only after INERTIA and RESPONSE are set If ride quality is reduced by increasing STABILTY value check system inertia 49 Weak Field AMP Sets motor field current value in weaken AMP 0 2 48 5 0 condition sets motor weaken field 50 Full Field AMP Hoist motor nameplate field current sets AMP 0 2 48 6 i motor full field 11 1 Lo 51 Field L R Motor field time constant SEC 0 1 10 0 80 0 270 52 Rated Field VDC Rated motor field voltage V 50 525 240 s Note3 p 53 Standing Field Sets standing motor field current motor field 0 2 48 22 5 AMP current when car is not running Joo J J 54 Field Response Sets mo
340. sec 0 0 2 0 0 04 0 04 between valid run time messages before a serial fault is declared only serial mode 2 Rollback Gain Ant rollback gain 1 99 1 1 Notch Filter Frq Notch Filter Center Frequency Hz 5 60 20 20 Notch Filt Depth Notch filter maximum attenuation 0 100 0 0 MSPD Delay 1 4 Determine recognition time delay for a sec 0 00 10 0 10 00 0 00 defined multistep speed command A2 S Curves Accel Rate 0 Acceleration rate 0 fus 0 7 99 3 00 3 50 Decel Rate 0 Deceleration rate 0 ftus 0 7 99 3 00 4 00 Accel Jerk in 0 Rate of increase of acceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 ACCEL Rate when increasing elevator speed Accel Jerk out 0 Rate of decrease of acceleration to zero fs3 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 when approaching contract elevator speed Decel Jerk in O Rate of increase of deceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 3 28 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Table 3 3 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Closed Loop Magnetek HPV 600 Decel Jerk out 0 Rate of decrease of deceleration to zero fs3 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 when slowing the elevator to leveling speed Accel Rate 1 Acceleration rate 1 ftus l0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Decel Rate 1 Deceleration rate 1 ftus 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Accel Jerk in 1 Rate of increase of acceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 ACCEL Rate when increasing elevator speed Accel Jerk out 1 Rate of
341. sed for more than two seconds while the car is in a door zone 2 16 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index bes _MCE Web Construction Operation Temporary Run Box Hookup The following illustration shows a temporary run box hookup Disconnect controller power before attempting to wire the run box The temporary run box must have a safety button an up button a down button and a stop switch The safety button is two pole The safety circuit must open every time the safety button is released The run box uses the same inspection direction inputs on the CTRL board as the controller inspection circuit does Figure 2 5 Temporary Construction Operation Run Circuit Car top insp safety button Car Top Insp n Stop Sw rO Oe Oma Gov Governor GOV2 TF1 Qeseeeese e ono _poovoovvvo _ ovoo0nn000 RB RB RB TB1 3 TB1 4 TB1 5 Insp up Car top insp uk UP 2 2 2 safety button ran O O O CIUB COM g RB RB CTRL RB TB5 P24B Q Q 2O Qo nepala AT Al RB n DN 3 3 Construction Su Mas Sh CTRL CIDB Inspection Terminal on RB vb V Relay Board Construction Inspection Terminal on Relay Board Comes der MCE Web 2 17 Installation A eE Running the Car 1 On the controller Relay Board Set the Inspection switch UP Set the Stop switch DOWN 2 Power up the controller 3 Attempt to run the car up using the inspection up down buttons Hold the up button until the car starts to move If
342. ser Defaults User MCE defined default value settings 0 2 0 1 see Note 1 0 No change 1 Set defaults 2 Clear all S Curva Control Field Adjustable Parameters are shaded P1 01 Jerk Change P1 Frequency reference for S curve 1 selection Hz 0 400 4 0 4 0 P1 02 erk Change P2 Frequency reference for S curve 2 selection Hz O 400 10 5 10 5 P1 03 jerk Change P3 Frequency reference for S curve 3 selecting Hz 0 400 48 0 48 0 P1 04 AccelJerkIn 1 S Curve 1 at the Start of Acceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 2 5 ha P1 05 Accel Jerk Out 1 S Curve 1 at the End of Acceleration f s 0 01 30 00 15 00 15 00 P1 06 Decel Jerk In 1 S Curve 1 at the Start of Deceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 5 00 P1 07 Decel Jerk Out 1 S Curve 1 at the End of Deceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 3 00 P1 08 AccelJerk In 2 S Curve 2 at the Start of Acceleration f s 0 01 30 00 15 00 15 00 P1 09 Accel Jerk Out 2 S Curve 2 at the End of Acceleration f s 0 01 30 00 15 00 15 00 P1 10 DecelJerkIn 2 S Curve 2 at the Start of Deceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 2 00 P1 11 Decel Jerk Out 2 S Curve 2 at the End of Deceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 3 00 P1 12 AccelJerk In 3 S Curve 3 at the Start of Acceleration f s 0 01 30 00 15 00 15 00 P1 13 Accel Jerk Out 3 S Curve 3 at the End of Acceleration f s 0 01 30 00 2 5 P1 14 Decel Jerk In 3 S Curve 3 at the Start of Deceleration f s 0 01 30 00 6 0 P1 15 Decel Jerk Out 3 S Curve 3 at the End of
343. spection Operate the car using the controller UP or DOWN inspection buttons A car running in either direction will MP NN ON automatically stop when it reaches the normal terminal e ser switch in that direction Pressingand holdingboth UP WETE ts and DOWN buttons at the same time will open the doors SIMCAN if the car is stopped at a door zone DOOR STOP DISAB Car Top Inspection In this mode the car is operated by pushing the cartop UP or DOWN and SAFETY buttons Doors will open if both UP and DOWN buttons are pressed for more than two seconds while the car is in a door zone Access Inspection To initiate access the car must be on in car inspection In access mode the car moves when a top bottom access switch is moved to the up down direction The car moves only until the hoistway mounted access switch for top bottom access is opened Pressingthe bottom floor car call will close the doors and move the car down The next car call will move the car up f car open and close buttons are operational a door will only open if the car is in a door zone 1 14 Manual 42 02 2T00 Operating Modes Car Switch Operation Tricon supports attendant mode self leveling operation when using standard or manual door operation software Standard drive software CTRL No 1 for cars 200 fpm or less or CTRL No 2 for cars above 200 fpm can be used All I O boards required for standard automatic operation are
344. speed of the car While observing the hand tach run the car up and down in the middle section of the hoistway Modify CONTRACT MTR SPEED under the ADJ UST A0 MOTOR A5 menu to exactly achieve the speed displayed at SPEED REFERENCE Car Balancing In order for the drive to perform properly the car must be properly balanced Geared cars are typically balanced with 40 50 of the cars rated capacity To confirm this 1 2 Oo ew 10 11 Access the car top Run the car on inspection to the center of the hoistway Stop the car so the crosshead on the counterweight is exactly adjacent to the crosshead on the car Place a chalk mark on the cables in the machine room and mark the hoist motor so that while the car is run from the machine room you will be able to tell when the car passes through the center of the hoistway Move the car to a convenient floor Place 4096 of the cars rated capacity in the car On inspection run the car so it is about 10 feet above the center of the hoistway Place an Amprobe on one of the leads to the hoist motor While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car down on inspection operation through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary Place the car about 10 feet below the center of the hoistway While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car u
345. sponses mean no input is required so none is reserved Lockouts are wired to the CCL I O 24 board which may be in the car station or in the controller The software identity chip in the upper left corner of the CCL board will be labeled CCL 5 68 Manual 42 02 2T00 Main Menus To select the desired floor 2 orup arrow key to move up one floor 8 or down arrow key to move down one floor To edit a floor Press the key When you are on the desired floor you will see a blinking cursor Keep pressing the key until you reach the desired field Enter the value using the Yes No keys Usethe key to accept You will move to the next field If you are on the last field you will move back to the Car Lockouts screen Usethe key to abort change You will move back to the Car Lockouts screen To retum to the Car Setup menu use the key 5 69 Tricon Configuration Mek Clock The controller contains a realtime clock that may be set from this screen To move into the Clock Setup view screen use 8 or key To return to the previous menu use key To move between the Clock Setup view and edit screen use key To return to the previous menu use key To edit Toreach the desired field 6 or right arrow key to move right one field 4 or left arrow key to move left one field When you reach the desired field 2 or up arrow to increase one increment 8 or down arrow t
346. ss the key when you are on the desired floor You will see a blinking cursor Keep pressing the key until you reach the desired field Enterthe value using the numbers on the keypad or the Yes No keys Press the key to accept You will move to the next field If you are on the last field you will move back to a view screen Pressthe key to abort change You will move back to a view screen To return to the Floor Table menu must be at a view screen use the key The car will reject up calls at the top floor and down calls at the bottom floor Therefore if you are adding floors add the top and the bottom floor first Then add all the intermediate floors 5 52 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Car Soft Lockouts View amp Edit Screen Figure 5 6 Car Soft Lockouts Screen Main Menus When the screen is selected from the menu the first floor is displayed However the first car floor may not be the cars bottom floor since in a group not all cars may go to the bottom floor Table 5 21 Simplex and Group Dispatcher Parameters Editable Fields Explanation Value Floor Number Floor Number See note above Floor Designation Use keypad to enter a name up to five characters The characters can be letters digits or punctuation marks Front HU Car has front door up hall call lockouts at this floor Yes Lockout No Nothing Out Front HD Car has f
347. stallations there is a requirement that the microprocessor and door controller electronics that are normally in the cartop station be located in the Tricon elevator control cabinet instead In these cases a smaller interconnect box the control box is used in place of the cartop station Figure 2 1 earlier in this section shows an installation using the con trol box actual unit shown to the right Regardless of the interconnect box type used mount itin a secure location on the elevator crosshead close enough to the landing sensor head to connect the two with the cable provided Sensor Head Installation Please refer to SET 9000 Landing System Components on page 2 24 Sensor head installa tion consists of installing the crosshead bracket the adaptor bracket and the sensor head assembly The sensor head assembly mounts to the adaptor bracket via a floating subassem bly that allows the sensor head to move with tape or hoistway irregularities Tape guides at each end of the sensor assembly grip the hoistway tape and keep the sensors at the correct distance from the strip magnets Figure 2 13 Sensor Head Assembly Tape guide Floating bracket subassembly Installation A ee 1 Clip the crosshead bracket to the crosshead Check that the bracket is square with the crosshead 2 Bolt the adaptor bracket to the crosshead bracket Check that the adaptor bracket is square with the crosshead bracket 3 Slide the sensor
348. summed to determine the active fault Contents Index _MCE Web Final Test Final Test Final testing must be successfully completed before the car may be released for passenger oper ation Buffer Tests Buffer tests allow the car and the counterweight to overtravel the terminals and strike the buff ers at contract speed Preparation A Danger Only qualified elevator personal skilled in final adjustments and safety testing should per form the following test The buffer tests require critical circuits to be bypassed Ensure peo ple do not ride on cars while performing tests The car can be stopped at any time Before performing the test complete all adjustments on the elevator Check the operation of the hoistway terminal slowdown switches Ensure the switches open at the same distance from the terminal floor as the position system magnets slow down Check the door locks and all other hoistway and car switches for proper operation Buffer tests require the car to over travel the terminal landing Check the following items while operating the car at inspection speed prior to high speed testing Check the over travel distance before striking the buffers e Check that when the car and counterweight buffers are fully compressed the following items have clearance and will not be damaged Positioning system will not bottom on the tape support hitch or hit structural mem bers Check the hoist rope and com
349. t Sldn Slow down in down direction due to limit caused by speed slowdown while car position is correct limit 25 Down good limit DnGoodLimSId Drive slowed down in down direction due to slowdown simultaneous position and limit slowdown inputs 26 Stopping Stopping Drive is stopping 27 Up limit slow UP LIMIT ERR Up limit slowdown while car position is down error incorrect 28 Down limit slow DN LIMIT ERR Slowdown in down direction due to limit down error slowdown while car position is incorrect 13 Drive 0 Init 1 Disabled Disabled Drive is disabled 2 Sleep Sleep Drive is stopped and waiting 3 MG start MG start Start the MG 4 State 4 State 4 5 Stopped Stopped Drive is stopped 6 Field build Field build Build up increase motor field prior to run ning drive 7 Ready Ready to Run Fields are built up and drive is ready to run 8 Stopping up Stopping up Drive is stopping in up direction 9 Stopping down Stopping Dn Drive is stopping in down direction 10 Start up relevel StartUpRelev Start up for relevel hydro only 11 Releveling up Relevel up Releveling 12 Start down StartDnRelev Start down for relevel not used relevel 13 Releveling down Relevel down Releveling down 14 Start up pump Start up P 15 Start up Start up Start for up run 16 Start down Down start Start for down run 17 Run up Running up Running up 18 Run down Running down Running down 19 Start up slow Strt Ups p pump 20 Start up slow Start UpSIdn Start up slowdown 21 Start down slow S
350. t door Floor Cannot Open or Close Door Door cannot open or close Floor Cannot Open Rear Door Cannot open the rear door Floor Car Call Ack Indicators Fuse Car call acknowledge indicators fuse is open Floor Car Call Buttons Fuse Car call buttons fuse is open Floor Car Set to Fire Ph 1 Car was set to fire phase 1 Floor Car Set to Fire Ph 2 Car was set to fire phase 2 Floor Car Set to Independent Service Car was set to independent service Floor Car Set to Inspection Car was set to inspection Floor Car Stop Switch Is Open The car stop switch is open Floor Close Limit Opened While Running Close limit opened while running Floor Comp Sheave Switch Operated Comp Sheave switch operated Floor Controller Stop Switch Is Open Controller stop switch is open Floor Door Overload Tripped Door Overload Tripped Floor Down Leveling Timeout Timed out while leveling in the down direction Floor Down Limit Slowdown Slowdown initiated by limits in the down direction Floor Down Normal Terminal Down normal terminal stopped the car Floor Down Releveling Timeout Timed out while re leveling in the down direction Floor 5 19 Tricon Configuration MeE Table 5 2 Car Errors Display Table v6 282 Down Run Timeout Down run timeout Floor Down Slowdown Timeout Down slowdown timeout Floor Drive Fault The drive faulted Floor Emerg Power Car entered emergency power operation Floor Error Log Cleared The error log has been cleared No
351. t hour 0 24 23 hours Enter the time at which the pri 24 off mary dial out phone should be dialed O midnight 23 11pm 5 Call time 1 end hour 0 24 23 hours Enter the time at which the pri mary dial out phone should be hung up O2midnight 23 11pm 6 Call time 2 start hour 0 24 23 hours Enter the time at which the sec 24 off ondary dial out phone should be dialed O midnight 23 11pm 7 Call time 2 end hour 0 24 23 hours Enter the time at which the sec ondary dial out phone should be hung up O2midnight 23 11pm 8 Number of cars in group 1 6 2 each Enter the number of cars in this group 9 Number of floors 2 32 2 floor Enter the number of floors served by this group 10 Car 1 has rear doors 1l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear O no O no openings 11 Car 2 has rear doors 1l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear 0 no 0 no openings 12 Car 3 has rear doors 1l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear O no O no openings 13 Car 4 has rear doors 1l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear 0 no 0 no openings 14 Car 5 has rear doors 1l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear O no O no openings 15 Car 6 has rear doors 1 yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear 0 no 0 no openings 16 Car 1 number of floors 2 32 2 floor Enter the number of floors ser viced by this car 17 Car 2 number of floors 2 32 2 floor Enter the number of floors ser viced by this car 18 Car 3 number of floors 2 32 2 floor Enter the number
352. t the drive parameters calculated for your installation HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open Loop The following procedures describe adjusting the HPV 600 drive with optional open loop soft ware This software allows the drive to operate without an encoder If the drive you are working on has an encoder please refer to the closed loop instructions for this drive Please refer to HPV 600 AC Drive Start Up Closed Loop on page 3 22 Before attempting to run the drive confirm that parameters are correctly set Verify that the parameters in the drive match those on the Test sheets For detailed information on using the drive programming unit please refer to the Magnetek HPV 600 manual Using the HPV600 Drive Programmer The HPV 600 programmer is used to pro gram the drive and to display drive data The programmer has three menu levels Menu level Sub menu level Entry level There are five keys on the front of the programmer These keys perform different functions depending on which menu level is active At the Main Menu level the left and right arrows move the programmer between Main Menu selections The up and down keys move the programmer into the various Sub Menus at each Main Menu selection Pressing the Enter key will move the programmer into the Sub Menu cur rently displayed At the Sub Menu level the up and down arrows display various parameters in the Sub Menu Pressing the Escape key will move the programmer back to the M
353. t will help you understand and safely maintain MCE equipment We strongly recommend you review this preface and read this manual before installing adjusting or maintaining Motion Control Engineering equipment This preface dis cusses Safety and Other Symbol Meanings e Safety Precautions Environmental Considerations In This Guide Safety and Other Symbol Meanings A Danger This manual symbol is used to alert you to procedures instructions or situations which if not done properly might result in personal injury or substantial equipment damage A Caution This manual symbol is used to alert you to procedures instructions or situations which if not done properly might result in equipment damage This manual symbol is used to alert you to instructions or other immediately helpful information Safety Precautions A Danger This equipment is designed to comply with ASME A17 1 National Electrical Code CE and CAN CSA B44 1 ASME A17 5 and must be installed by a qualified contractor It is the responsibility of the contractor to make sure that the final installation complies with all local codes and is installed in a safe manner This equipment is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10 000 rms sym metrical amperes 600 volts maximum The three phase AC power supply to the Drive Isolation Transformer used with this equipment must originate from a fused disconnect switch or circuit breake
354. tart DnSldn Start down slowdown 5 13 Tricon Configuration MeE Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 282 and HHU Version 6 262 03 07 5 14 Manual 42 02 2T00 22 Up slowdown Up slowdown Drive in up slowdown 23 Down slowdown Down slowdown Drive in down slowdown 24 Up run fast Run up fast Car is running up at high speed 25 Up run fast 2 Run up f2 Running up at fast speed waiting for the adjustable time delay to start the slowdown 26 Dn run fast Run down fast Car is running down at high speed 27 Dn run fast 2 Run dn f2 Running down at fast speed waiting for the adjustable time delay to start the slowdown 28 Up run 2 Run up2 Running up waiting for slowdown delay to start the slowdown 29 Down run 2 Run dn2 Running down waiting for slowdown delay to start the slowdown 30 Up run start Fast up start 31 Dn run start Fast dn start 14 Pump MG 0 Init Contr 1 Stopped Stopped Stopped 2 Start Start Start for wye delta sequence 3 Running Running Run state for wye delta sequence 4 State 4 State 4 5 Run hold Hold Prevents rapid start and stop of wye delta sequence 6 State 6 State 6 7 State 7 State 7 15 Positioning 0 I nit Initialization 1 Leveled Leveled The car is leveled at the floor 2 Above level Above level The car is in the leveling zone above the leveled position 3 Above Above The car is above the position not yet at
355. taying away from the terminal floors observe the one floor and multi floor runs to be sure that the car rides well under all load conditions Keep adding weight until the car has full load less the weight of anyone riding the car The drive is now successfully set up Hoistway Learn for Normal Operation You must now perform a normal operating speed learn operation using controls on the Limit Board Please refer to the instructions for your Limit Board in Section 4 of this guide Please refer to Limit Board Standard on page 4 3 Please refer to 2K Limit Gripper Board on page 4 9 _Contents Index _MCE Web 3 21 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Nes HPV 600 AC Drive Start Up Closed Loop The Magnetek HPV 600 drive can be configured as a closed loop AC vector drive with the optional Incremental Encoder card In order to obtain optimal ride quality and performance the drive must be tuned to the motor The tuning process requires that you be familiar with the drive and AC motors If you have never worked on this drive or any other AC Vector drive please contact MCE for assistance Refer to the Magnetek HPV 600 Elevator Drive Technical Manual for detailed explanation The HPV 600 drive is fully digital with configurable inputs outputs and modes of operation This procedure describes configuring the HPV 600 to operate with the Tricon control Due to the complexity of drive systems it is not possible to cover all potential
356. te At lower value motor will become sluggish 9 Nominal AC Volt Nominal AC voltage applied to SCR drive V 150 525 230 age Note 1 measured at drive terminals L1 L2 amp L3 fe 10 Encoder Pulses Encoder pulses per revolution from encoder PPR 600 4096 Rev Note 4 nameplate 19 999 11 Motor RPM Motor nameplate RPM Usually motor name RPM 50 2000 1150 T plate value but may require higher or lower value to run at correct speed For direct cou pled encoder on geared application also sets J encoder shaft RPM 12 Overspeed 96 UP DN overspeed trip point Drive will trip on 96 0 150 3110 110 fault if motor speed exceeds this value This is a percentage of Motor Speed RPM entered in parameter 11 14 V Sense 96 Minimum armature voltage above which tach 96 0 100 25 25 loss and reverse tach loss are operative Per centage of rated armature voltage param 7 15 Tach Sense 96 Sets percentage of per unit tach feedback 96 0 100 5 5 below which a tach loss will be declared 16 Gearless Ratio Encoder wheel to motor sheave ratio for 1 19 1 1 Note 4 gearless jobs Geared applications set to 1 because encoder is mounted on motor shaft J 17 Rated Ft Min Rated car speed in feet per minute FPM 5 2000 400 21 Accel Rate Maximum acceleration rate in ft sec2 Ft sec2 2 10 4 2 4 2 32 Field Sense Percentage of full motor field required to per 30 90 45 45 mit SCR drive to relea
357. ter an input is detected the same connection becomes an output to drive the indicator bulb for that input L Type Terminal boards are used for Car and Hall Call connections Figure 2 9 L Type Terminal Board Connections L TYPE TERMINAL BOARD To positive voltage on Relay Board RB Board Contents Index _MCE Web 2 23 Installation A eE SET 9000 Landing System The SET 9000 landing system uses solid state sensors to detect the presence of magnetic strips placed on a length of 2 inch steel tape that runs the length of the elevator hoistway Magnetic strips are placed along the tape in three distinct rows The center row is used for leveling magnets The left hand rowis used for up direction slowdown magnets The right hand rowis used for down direction slowdown magnets The sensor head containing the solid state sensors is mounted on the elevator car so that it rides the steel tape as the car moves detecting and using the magnets to control floor approach and leveling Installing the SET 9000 system includes Hoistway tape installation Interconnect box installation Sensor head installation Magnetic strip placement Landing system cabling Figure 2 10 SET 9000 Landing System Components E Guide rail Interconnect box Jape guide STU o 3 LU DZ 2 Nc Soner assembly
358. the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary 9 Ignoring whether the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running up was greater than the value running down the car is too heavy Remove 100 pounds of weight from the car and repeat steps 8 through 10 until the recorded values are equal but of opposite polarity 10 Ignoring whether the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running down was greater than the value running up the car is too light Add 100 pounds of weight to the car and repeat steps 7 and 8 until the recorded values are equal but of opposite polarity When the values are equal but of opposite polarity the car is balanced Check how much weight is in the car It should be between 40 and 50 of the rated capacity If not the counterweighting needs to be adjusted If the car is too heavy weight needs to be added to the counterweight to get the car balanced between 40 and 5096 of the rated capacity If the car is too light weight needs to be removed from the counterweight to get it balanced between 40 and 50 of the rated capacity Do not proceed with the adjustment process until the car is properly bal anced oO RO Contents Index _MCE Web 3 57 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Nes Motor Parameter Adjustmen
359. the hoistway Stop the car so the crosshead on the counterweight is exactly adjacent to the crosshead on the car Place a chalk mark on the cables in the machine room and mark the hoist motor so that when the car is run from the machine room you will be able to tell when the car passes through the center of the hoistway Move the car to a convenient floor Place 4096 of the cars rated capacity in the car On inspection run the car so it is about 10 feet above the center of the hoistway Place an Amprobe on one of the leads to the hoist motor While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car down on inspection operation through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary Place the car about 10 feet below the center of the hoistway While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car up through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary Ignoring whether the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running up was greater than the value running down the car is too heavy Remove 100 pounds of weight from the car and repeat previous steps until the recorded values are equal but of opposite polarity Ignoring whether the reco
360. the motor moves in the down direction stop the car Change the motor rotation setting on the drive or temporarily disconnect power and swap two of the input phases to the motor 4 Again run the motor Confirm that the motor turns in the correct direction to move the car up or down 5 Check the speed reference on the drive Run the car in the down direction The speed reference displayed on the drive should be negative Using the inspection up button run the car in the up direction The speed reference should be positive 6 While using the inspection up down buttons to run the car use a hand tach to check car speed It should be moving at approximately the same speed as that displayed by the drive This should be very close to 45 FPM Adjust drive inspection speed setting if required Brake Basics 1 Ensure that the brake is picking cleanly 2 Ensure that when set the brake is capable of holding 125 of rated car capacity 3 Check that brake and motor coordination are such that the brake is dropping just when motor rotation stops 4 Check that the brake pick delay allows the motor to build sufficient flux to prevent roll back when the car is starting 2 18 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Completing I nstallation Completing lI nstallation Ifthe car has been operated in Construction mode temporary jumpers may have been used to bypass some safety string or other connections As you are completing field
361. the two should cross at a ninety degree angle Terminal boards mounted on I O 24 boards are used for low voltage connections The func tion of the particular I O 24 board Terminal board set is determined by the software installed on that I O 24 board Each I O 24 board is labeled according to its function or location For example the I O 24 board used in the car station is labeled CSTA while the I O 24 used for hall call connections in the controller cabinet is labeled HALL Figure 2 6 I O 24 Board Layout CSTA Software installed in this chip determines function of board and terminal boards Terminal board locations I O 24 Board 8 inputs 8 inputs 8 inputs a Em E ED 8 outputs 8 outputs 8 outputs A2 1 A2 8 B2 1 B2 8 C2 1 C2 8 8 outputs 8 outputs 8 outputs A3 1 A3 8 B3 1 B3 8 C3 1 C3 8 Connector labeling on I O 24 Board In the wiring prints inputs and output labeling will tell you where the terminal board to be used is located using the I O24 board label i e CSTA the Terminal board position i e A the Terminal board type i e F and the connector pin number For example CSTA AF 28 means pin 28 on the F Type terminal board in the A position on the CSTA I O24 board 2 20 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Completing I nstallation Three Terminal boards are most commonly used for low voltage signal wiring F Type Terminal Board O Type Ter
362. tion 4 for more information PI board I O 24 board with position indicator software and up to three O type Terminal boards Provides expandable position indicator control Gateway board When a car is part of a group a Gateway board is provided in the control ler cabinet to communicate with the group dispatcher CCL board I O 24 board with terminal boards as required to accommodate hard wired car call lockout switch inputs Please refer to Car Lockout Setup on page 5 68 Contents Index _MCE Web 1 5 Tricon General I nformation Cm Figure 1 3 O 24 Board with Terminal Boards at A B and C Positions You can identify the board by the label on the programmed chip in this location Win Mg Q Plug in for the Hand Held Unit HHU I EXTIICAN BF Indicates location A and terminal board type F Terminal board locations are A B and C from left to right 1 6 Manual 42 02 2T00 Car Controller RB board Provides power bus fuses and heavy duty relays for drive brake and motor con trol Also provides mode Inspection Normal and motion control switches for operating the elevator from the controller cabinet One of three different RB boards is used depend ing upon job requirements The 2K Relay board is described here The others will have subsets of 2K controls and indicators N a s seio ee Seeceseces Relay Board switches Stop Run Enables or disables motor movement b
363. to B2 2 Hall call acknowledge light 2 HCA2 BL 3 B3 3 to B3 4 Hall call acknowledge light 3 HCA3 BL 4 B2 3 to B2 4 Hall call acknowledge light 4 HCA4 BL 5 B3 5 to B3 6 Hall call acknowledge light 5 HCA5 BL 6 B2 5 to B2 6 Hall call acknowledge light 6 HCA6 BL 7 B3 7 to B3 8 Hall call acknowledge light 7 HCA7 BL 8 B2 7 to B2 8 Hall call acknowledge light 8 HCA8 CL 1 C3 1 to C3 2 Hall call acknowledge light 9 HCA9 CL 2 C2 1 to C2 2 Hall call acknowledge light 10 HCA10 CL 3 C3 3 to C3 4 Hall call acknowledge light 11 HCA11 CL 4 C2 3 to C2 4 Hall call acknowledge light 12 HCA12 CL 5 C3 5 to C3 6 Hall call acknowledge light 13 HCA13 CL 6 C2 5 to C2 6 Hall call acknowledge light 14 HCA14 CL 7 C3 7 to C3 8 Hall call acknowledge light 15 HCA15 CL 8 C2 7 to C2 8 Hall call acknowledge light 16 HCA16 Contents Index _MCE Web 5 31 Tricon Configuration Dispatcher Hall Board MeE Table 5 12 Dispatcher Hall Board DHALL N v6 2 Input Examples DHALL Board Inputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AO 1 A1 1 Fire recall switch FIRE AO 2 A1 2 Fire smoke detectors bypass switch FBYP AO 3 A1 3 Smoke detectors SMOK AO 4 A1 4 Lobby smoke detector s LSMK AO 5 A1 5 Machine room smoke detectors FMRS AO 6 A1 6 Low hoistway smoke detectors FLHS AO 7 A1 7 Remote fire switch ON position FRON AO 8 A1 8 Remote fire switch OFF position FROF BL 1 B1 1 Hall Call 1 HC1
364. to avoid water accumula tion in the unit I n This Manual This manual is the installation adjustment and troubleshooting guide for the Tricon car con trol When viewed online as a pdf file hyperlinks buttons or blue text link to related topics and informational websites The manual includes Contents Table of Contents When viewed online as a pdf file hyperlinks in the Contents link to the associated topic in the body of the manual Section 1 Tricon General Information System description operating modes Section 2 Installation Section 3 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Section 4 Release to Normal Operation Limit board adjustment and Final test descrip tions Section 5 Tricon Configuration Howto use the Hand Held Unit to program and trouble shoot the controller Complete with parameter definitions where appropriate Index Alphabetical index to help you find information in the manual When viewed online as a pdf file index entry page references are hyperlinks to the associated informa tion in the body of the manual MeE Contents Section 1 Tricon General I nformation TUNDU aues or ronde RR ORG RACE REACACRLC ACRCACALRCR CC CRCUOAC LUCAN EDR Re RHR 11 Lour Controller osees a A ERROR EEG OR ACER A REC ACA RR RC CR 1 2 et Cr BONUS Liu ad esa 4a ER ECRPPSEEETLSXweRIICd Xa Rx 44 Rd dee T5 Carton Station 5 cdo es dk uo CESS he HRS AGO KO AER RERO HS ES REN ERA ER ra RC 1 9 Lumen aL DUI esi TER EL dca re eee ED
365. to drive If fault recurs go to Utility menu and select Restore Defaults If fault per sists replace Control board Note Restore Defaults will require all drive parameters be set to their correct values Dir Conflict Commanded direction from analog input does not match polarity of Up Dwn input Not used Drv Overload The drive has exceeded the overload curve Check motor connections main contactor contacts and motor windings Make sure brake is lifting Verify encoder is properly connected and feedback matches motor speed Encoder Fault The drive is in a run con dition and encoder is not operating Check encoder connections If drive has been running replace encoder If fault occurs on initial start up of drive swap A and A connections to drive May also be caused by high starting current Check for binds in machine or brake and proper balanc ing of car Extrn Fault 1 External Fault 1 input is Not used activated Extrn Fault 2 External Fault 2 input is Not used activated Extrn Fault 3 External Fault 3 input is Not used activated Extrn Fault 4 External Fault 4 input is Not used activated Fan Alarm The heatsink cooling fan Check fan and connections clean heatsink is not operating Fuse Fault Drive DC Bus fuse open Check fuse If OK check motor connections Check motor for continuity from windings to ground If OK replace drive Ground Fault Sum of
366. tor field regulator response RAD 1 10 5 5 55 Motor Field VAC Motor field input AC voltage at AC1 and AC2 V 50 525 0 TB4 Must be set to a measured value if 0 external boosted voltage is applied to termi nals AC1 and AC2 If set to 0 drive selects Joo fii value of parameter 9 voltage at L1 L2 L3 56 Field Strength Speed as percentage of parameter 11 96 10 200 130 90 Speed Motor Speed at which speed regulator begins to strengthen motor field during deceleration 57 Field Weaken Speed as percentage of parameter 11 96 10 200 130 70 Speed Motor Speed at which speed regulator begins to weaken motor field during acceler ation 58 Field Strengthen Rate at which motor field reaches rated field SEC 01 10 2 2 Rate 59 Field Weaken Sets rate at which motor field reaches SEC 01 10 2 2 Rate weaken value 63 UP DN Bit Pick Sets threshold at which drive will turn ona 01 1 01 01 bit for detection of motor rotation 80 Overspeed Test Used to activate an overspeed multiplier ON OFF OFF OFF parameter 81 81 Overspeed Multi Speed reference multiplied by this value when 1 1 5 1 0 1 0 plier parameter 80 Overspeed Test activated 82 Reference Mult Multiplies speed command 0 9 2 0 1 0 1 0 83 Motor O L Time Shapes motor overload time out curve Sec 0 500 90 90 Out 84 Motor Overload Sets motor overload trip level 0 2 1 1 Level 85 Current Decay Sets decay time of armature current at a Sec 001 2 5 0 2
367. transitioning from acceleration to con tract speed Set to 3 0 ft s 9 DECEL J ERK IN 0 Desired jerk rate when transitioning from contract speed to decel eration Set to 4 0 ft s3 10 DECEL J ERK OUT 0 Desired jerk rate when transitioning from deceleration to level ing speed Set to 4 0 ft s Remaining S Curves A2 menu parameters are not used ONO A 11 Access the Multistep Ref A3 sub menu 12 SPEED COMMAND 1 Leveling speed of the car Set to 3 5 ft min 13 SPEED COMMAND 2 Approach speed of the car Set to 12 ft min 14 SPEED COMMAND 3 Inspection speed of the car Set to 45 ft min 15 SPEED COMMAND 4 Contract speed of the car Set to the cars rated speed Remaining Multistep Ref A3 sub menu parameters are not used 16 Access the Power Convert A4 sub menu 17 INPUT L L VOLTS parameter Tells the drive what the input line voltage is This value is used by the drive to declare a low line voltage fault Set to the nominal AC voltage at the input to the drive 18 Go to the Adjust AO sub menu Motor A5 MOTOR ID To obtain this value determine the motor speed at the rated excitation frequency without any slip using the formula _120 Rated Frequency No Slip Motor RPM If you cannot determine the motor speed with zero slip take the motor nameplate RPM and use it in the formula Round the number up to the nearest even whole number to determine motor poles If the motor that the drive is connected to has a syn
368. ts Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive Parameter Settings The following parameters must be checked to confirm that they are set correctly for your appli cation Note that many parameters are not listed because their default values will not need to be modified or they are not used in this application Adjust AO Menu 1 Go to the sub menu Drive AL 2 CONTRACT CAR SPD Rated contract speed of the car Set to the speed in feet per 9 10 minute for which the car is rated CONTRACT SPD Set to the motor RPM that will make the car run at contract speed This is not the data from the motor nameplate This parameter sets the speed at which the drive will run the motor when the car is commanded to run at contract speed Skip down to ENCODER PULSES Set to the number of pulses per revolution from the encoder nameplate Go to the S Curves A2 sub menu The first parameter is ACCEL RATE 0 Desired acceleration rate of speed curve function Set to 2 5 ft s2 DECEL RATE 0 Desired deceleration rate of speed curve function Set to 4 0 ft s ACCEL J ERK IN 0 Desired initial jerk rate of speed curve function Set to 3 0 ft s ACCEL J ERK OUT 0 Desired jerk rate when transitioning from acceleration to con tract speed Set to 3 0 ft s DECEL J ERK IN 0 Desired jerk rate when transitioning from contract speed to decel eration Set to 4 0 ft s DECEL J ERK OUT 0 Desired jerk rate when transitioning from dece
369. ts In order to perform correctly the drive needs to be programmed for the correct motor values and the correct volts hertz ratio so the motor will not stall with a load or at slow speed The fol lowing procedure establishes the volts hertz ratio 1 Place a full load into the car 2 Runthe car up and down on inspection speed 3 Usinga hand tach monitor the speed of the car If the car is moving at less than the inspection speed programmed at SPEED COMMAND 3 A3 increase the value of CONTRACT MTR SPD AD If the car is moving faster than the inspection speed programmed at SPEED COMMAND 3 A3 decrease the value of CONTRACT MTR SPD A 4 Repeatsteps 2 and 3 until the caris moving at exactly the speed programmed at SPEED COMMAND 3 A3 Speed Curve Setting and Adjustment The Magnetek HPV 900 drive has an internal speed curve algorithm that controls the accelera tion deceleration and various jerk rates of the drive There are four independently selectable speed curves This system uses only the first speed curve The preliminary setting of the speed curve parameters was done in the drive programming sec tion The values that were entered are designed to be somewhat aggressive to ensure that the car does not overshoot the floors but rather comes in slow This will prevent the car from run ning into the pit or the overhead until the final values for the speed curve are entered 1 Placea balanced load in the car 2 Disable the d
370. ts 8 outputs A3 1 A3 8 B3 1 B3 8 C3 1 C3 8 Connector labeling on I O 24 Board Tricon Configuration Controller Board has inputs and outputs related to equipment found in the machine room MeE The controller board is always located in the controller cabinet and Table 5 4 Car Controller Board CTRL N v6 2 Input Examples A17 1 2000 Car Controller Board I nputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AF 1 Al 1 Controller inspection switch COINS AF 2 A1 2 Controller inspection up button CUIB AF 3 A1 3 Controller inspection down button CIDB AF 4 A1 4 Doors disable switch DD AF 5 A1 5 Relay sequence RSEQ AF 6 A1 6 Drive fault DRF AF 7 A1 7 Overloads OVL AF 8 A1 8 Primary locks swing door PRL BF 1 B1 1 Safety line SAF BF 2 B1 2 Gate GATE BF 3 B1 3 Locks LOCKS BF 4 B1 4 Gate amp Locks GL BF 5 B1 5 Up normal terminal UNT BF 6 B1 6 Up slowdown limit USL BF 7 B1 7 Down normal terminal DNT BF 8 B1 8 Down slowdown limit DSL CF 1 C1 1 Brake drop switch BDS CF 2 C1 2 Up high speed limit HUSL CF 3 C1 3 Controller inspection switch 2 COINS2 CF 4 C1 4 CF 5 C1 5 CF 6 C1 6 Down high speed limit HDSL CF 7 C1 7 CF 8 C1 8 5 24 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Main Menus Table 5 5 Car Controller Board CTRL N v6 2 Output Examples A17 1 2000
371. ttenuation 0 100 0 0 MSPD Delay 1 4 Recognition time delay for defined sec 0 00 10 0 0 00 0 00 multistep speed command A2 S Curves Accel Rate 0 Acceleration rate 0 fts 0 7 99 3 00 3 50 Decel Rate 0 Deceleration rate 0 fts 0 7 99 3 00 4 00 Accel Jerk in 0 Rate of increase of acceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 ACCEL Rate when increasing eleva tor speed Accel Jerk out O Rate of decrease of acceleration to ftis 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 zero when approaching contract ele vator speed Decel Jerk in 0 Rate of increase of deceleration upto ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 Decel Rate when decreasing elevator speed Decel Jerk out O0 Rate of decrease of deceleration to ftis 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 zero when slowing the elevator to lev eling speed Accel Rate 1 Acceleration rate 1 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Decel Rate 1 Deceleration rate 1 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Accel Jerk in 1 Rate of increase of acceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 ACCEL Rate when increasing eleva tor speed Accel Jerk out 1 Rate of decrease of acceleration to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when approaching contract ele vator speed Decel Jerk in 1 Rate of increase of deceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 Decel Rate when decreasing elevator speed Decel Jerk out 1 Rate of decrease of deceleration to fis 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when slowing the elevator to lev eling speed Accel Rate 2 Acceleration rate 2 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Decel Rate 2 Deceleration rate 2 ft
372. ttom again After this LED DS25 will light steadily the learn trip is com plete and the board will revert to normal operation When anormal learn is performed it also determines if the slowdowns are properly placed The slowdown should open within 200 milliseconds of the HS or MS relay going off If it does not a learn fault will be displayed on diagnostic LEDs DS17 DS23 Please refer to Fault Operation on page 4 18 A Caution If any car speed or slowdown adjustments are made after the limits are learned the learn trip must be repeated Contents Index _MCE Web 4 15 Release to Normal Operation A eE Operating Examples Operating examples include Limit Functionality Rope Gripper Functionality Normal Operation Fault Operation Limit Functionality The limit rope gripper board will open the safety circuit output stopping the car if any of the following conditions are detected The car runs at 150 of the learned inspection speed inspection learn must have been completed Used for inspection operation before the limit board speed feedback has been scaled at high speed Please refer to Inspection Learn on page 4 14 The car runs at a speed above the limit overspeed parameter value The car exceeds 75 of the learned inspection speed or 62 FPM in the opposite of the intended direction of travel Normal learn must have been completed Direction slowdown inputs operate without any tachometer enc
373. tual 96 99 9 99 9 10 00 0 00 analog output 2 Ana Out 1 Gain Scaling factor for analog output 1 0 10 0 1 0 1 0 Ana Out 2 Gain Scaling factor for analog output 2 0 10 0 1 0 1 0 Fit Reset Delay Time Before a fault is automatically reset sec 0 120 5 5 Fit Reset Hour Number of faults that is allowed to be faults 0 10 3 3 automatically reset per hour Up to SPD Level The logic output function is true when the 0 110 00 80 00 080 00 motor speed is above the user specified speed defined by this parameter Mains DIP Speed When enabled by Main DIP Speed A1 96 5 99 9 25 00 25 00 parameter speed reduced by this percent when UV alarm low voltage declared Run Delay Timer Delays drive recognition of RUN signal sec 0 00 0 99 10 00 0 00 AB Zero Spd Lev Auto Brake Function N A to Tricon 0 00 2 00 10 00 0 00 AB Off Delay N A to MCE products sec 0 00 9 99 0 00 0 00 Contactor DO Dly N A to MCE products sec 0 00 5 00 10 00 0 00 TRQ Lim Msg Dly Determines amount of time drive is in sec 0 50 10 00 10 50 0 5 torque limit before Hit Torque Limit mes sage displayed SER2 INSP SPD Defines serial mode 2 Inspection ft min 0 100 30 30 only serial mode 2 SER2 RS CRP SPD Defines creep speed that will be used in ft min 0 100 10 10 rescue mode SER2 RS CPR Time Defines maximum time drive will continue ft min 0 100 180 180 to run at rescue creep speed only serial mode 2 SER2 FLT TOL Defines maximum time that may elapse
374. type Terminal board to drive a light duty CE fix ture board that in turn controls the indicators Each system is factory configured according to particular job requirements before shipment Typically you will not need to program position indicator outputs but will only need to connect them as shown in the prints for the particular job Figure 5 8 Terminal Board Locations on CTOP CSTA or HALL Boards Cartop Board Car Station Board Hall Board Please refer to PI Driven Directly from O type Terminals on page 5 58 if you are driving PI indicators directly from O type Terminal boards Please refer to Light Duty CE Fixture Drivers on page 5 60 if you are driving a light duty CE driver board from an O type Terminal board Contents Index _MCE Web 5 57 Tricon Configuration Nem PI Driven Directly from O type Terminals The O type Terminal boards may be used to drive PI displays directly Each O type Terminal board has eight outputs When used to BENE ea each output is typically used to light a position in a strip or multi The illustration below shows a typical output progression for up to 24 indicators Figure 5 9 PI Driven Directly from O Terminal Boards CTOP HALL and CSTA Cartop Board Hall Board Car Station Board O Terminal O Terminal O Terminal ololelelelolelo lataelalal r Joe 242324 To program O type Terminal boards to directly drive indicators From the Position I
375. u cannot determine the motor speed with zero slip take the motor nameplate RPM and use it in the formula Round the number up to the nearest even whole number to determine motor poles If the motor that the drive is connected to has a synchronous no slip speed of 900 or 1200 RPM set this parameter to 6 POLE DFLT If the motor has a synchronous speed of 1800 RPM set this parameter to 4 POLE DFLT 4 RATED MTR PWR Tells the drive rated motor horsepower or kilowatts Set to the value on the motor nameplate 5 RATED MTR VOLTS Tells the drive rated motor volts Set to the value from the nameplate on the motor 6 RATED EXCIT FREQ Tells the drive the frequency at which the motor is excited to obtain motor nameplate rated RPM Typically this is 60 Hz Set to the value from the motor nameplate or the manufacturer data sheet 7 MOTOR POLES parameter Tells the drive how many poles the motor has To obtain this value refer to step 20 above If the synchronous speed of the motor is 900 RPM set this parameter to 8 poles If the synchronous speed of the motor is 1200 RPM set this parameter to 6 poles If the synchronous speed of the motor is 1800 RPM set this parameter to 4 poles This value must be an even number or a Setup Fault will occur 8 RATED MTR SPEED Tells the drive what speed the motor should be turning when it is excited at its rated frequency and producing rated power Set to the value from the motor nameplate or the manufacturer d
376. ull load Run the car in both directions and monitor peak current using the FR PU04 parameter unit 1 Pressthe help key twice from the main menu until monitor appears then press reat d 3 2 Scroll down using the arrow button to PEAK I and press read The peak current will be displayed from the last run the car made As long as the peak current does not exceed twice the motor nameplate current when the car is run up and down drive setup is good If it exceeds twice the motor nameplate current try auto tuning again If this fails take the drive out of MFVC mode Parameter 80 and 81 set to 9999 and manually adjust the torque boost Normal Speed Learn Operation You must now perform a normal speed learn operation using controls on the Limit Board Please refer to the learn operation information for your particular Limit Board in Section 4 of this guide Please refer to Limit Board Standard on page 4 3 Please refer to 2K Limit Gripper Board on page 4 9 3 84 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Mitsubishi A500 Variable Frequency Drive Mitsubishi A500 Closed Loop Speed Control Closed loop speed control requires an encoder feedback board and a encoder mounted on the motor The encoder is typically 5 volt 1024 count per revolution Closed loop operation has three performance modes selected through the value set in parameter 370 You must start with mode 0 verifying the operation before moving to mode 1
377. ully stop from maxi at top speed under ANY condition power mum speed loss emergency safety line etc Prevents the car from re starting before it is fully stopped 67 Time to abort releveling 0 255 15 sec If the car does not achieve stable leveled if trying up down for too condition within this time leveled for at long least leveled validation time abort releveling altogether 68 Releveling stall timeout 5 255 15 sec If the car is releveling continuously in one time direction for this time relevel is aborted 69 A car level for this time 0 25 5 3 sec If this car is continuously leveled for this is considered level time it is considered leveled OK and the relevel timeout timer is reset 70 Field Motor field weak yes no yes yes no When set the motor field goes into weaken ens timed when flag is ing after the field weaken time has elapsed set 71 Drive Restart in yes no yes yes no If the car stops away from a floor it will re approach speed start in approach speed instead of medium speed 72 Drive Monitor LU LD yes no no yes no When set to Yes operation of LU LD and and DZ DZ is monitored for stuck sensors 73 Drive Consecutive drive 0 255 5 each If the drive accumulates this number of faults and or run timeouts it will set to DRIVE FAULT and will refuse to move Can only be reset by setting the car to inspection or cycling power 5 42 Manual 42 02 2T00 Table 5 18 Car Setup
378. up OP VsuuaquaAaxdautdd aues Xu det he 33A RE Na EERENS ENEAS 3 65 i ks AN ee eee eer eS ee ee ee ECE rere Te ree errr rT rere eee 3 66 Inspection Startup V f mode Open Loop Closed Loop eee eee eee 3 67 Startup for Flux Vector Mode Closed Loop lelseeeeeeeeeeeee 3 76 Scaling tip rir dU PEPERIT TET TOT TT TETTE TT T 3 76 Drive Fals dee sence cn ran dense AAE ET ERE AENA ARET REN NARR 3 77 Motor Tuning Flux Vector Closed Loop Only ns nunnu nunne m n 3 77 Normal Speed Learn Operator iiissiesaxaxsdereRE AREA S REX YEA X RREPERR RR REX 3 77 Mitsubishi A500 Variable Frequency Drive eese 3 78 ASDD Start p and DSA iud kk chek ebb Eee eS ON ow ed HERVA CHER TA D ERE 3 78 Open Loop VON Hertz Leeusbkes ctn ERA RAERRESSAKmEAKE S EIER a eniti ERAS ES 3 78 Mitsubishi A500 Magnetic Flux Vector Control 00sec cece eee eee 3 81 Normal Speed Learn Operation usse vaaeakekk Aaa FAR WAGE Ax ERE E daxXx Vds 3 84 Mitsubishi A500 Closed Loop Speed Control 0 cee unsere reenn 3 85 Normal Speed Learn Operation 0 ccc cee ccc cece eee ee enn 3 87 Magnetek DSD 412 DC Drive 0 cece cece ccc cee trn nnn 3 88 lxi cn UR MM EE 3 88 Drive Prog iusaacddahrroE4RRS RR 4E RARE RFEdwERERA RARE RESEAARES Ada RR 3 88 E U POSAT EAE OTT Tr 3 90 Inspection Start UP iuuuuetoza daba edd Gu daat r4 Ed V ERE R4 REF Id ade ces 3 91 Prio E od bee erence eeee areas ee HERPES TUD
379. us 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive Table 3 5 HPV 900 Drive Parameters Accel Jerk in 2 Rate of increase of acceleration up to fg s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 ACCEL Rate when increasing eleva tor speed Accel Jerk out 2 Rate of decrease of acceleration to ftis 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when approaching contract ele vator speed Decel Jerk in 2 Rate of increase of deceleration upto ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 Decel Rate when decreasing elevator speed Decel Jerk out 2 Rate of decrease of deceleration to ftis 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when slowing the elevator to lev eling speed Accel Rate 3 Acceleration rate 3 fts 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Decel Rate 3 Deceleration rate 3 fs 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Accel Jerk in 3 Rate of increase of acceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 ACCEL Rate when increasing eleva tor speed Accel Jerk out 3 Rate of decrease of acceleration to ftis 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when approaching contract ele vator speed Decel Jerk in 3 Rate of increase of deceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 Decel Rate when decreasing elevator speed Decel Jerk out 3 Rate of decrease of deceleration to ftis 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when slowing the elevator to lev eling speed A3 Multistep Ref Speed command 1 Multi Step Speed command 1 ft m 0 4 Speed command 2 Multi Step Speed command 2 ft m 0 12 Speed Command 3 Multi Step Speed command
380. us and error information You plug the Hand Held Unit into a common telephone jack style connector on one of the circuit boards associated with the microprocessor you want to view or edit Car Network To view or edit the car network CPU plug the Hand Held Unit into any car network controller or cartop station board with a phone jack I O 24 CE or PI boards Car network I O 24 boards can be identified by the sticker on the square IC in the upper left corner of the board which will be labeled Hall or CTRV Dispatcher To viewor edit the dispatching group control network plugthe Hand Held Unit into any dispatcher I O 24 board Typically the dispatcher is housed in a separate cabinet from the controller cabinets of the cars it controls If you have a dispatcher housed in the same cabinet with acar controller you can identify the dispatcher I O 24 board by the dHall sticker on the square IC in the upper left corner of the board Figure 1 6 1 O 24 Controller Board for Car Network IC with identifying HHU connector software sticker TLATISTEEENMEMM IL OO OD Re 1 12 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Control Parameters HHU Dispatcher Board Connection Optional Some installations require that the networks of all cars in a group be accessible from the group dispatcher cabinet In these installations an optional Dispatcher board is mounted in the group dispatcher cabinet
381. uses smoke detectors to reset or be switch resets ALL smoke reset and bypassed when lobby switch is detector set to bypass position Bypass reset A17 1 1996 Reset A17 1 2000 If there is no bypass or reset switch in the lobby NYC set to No 118 Fire Allow fire phase2 yes no no yes no When set to Yes car recalled by machine when recalled by MR room or hoistway smoke detector will be smoke detector allowed to initiate Fire Phase 2 operation 119 Fire Allow Phase 2 yes no no yes no When set to Yes car can leave Fire Phase 2 change without open or change in and out of Fire Hold without the doors doors having to be fully open 120 Fire Operation flags 0 255 JO each 0 A17 1 1996 or NYC RS18 1 ANSI 2000 fire code Car fire bypass input operation becomes fire reset operation as defined in this code 2 Complete recall before reverting to nor mal service 4 Lobby smoke detector overrides other smoke detectors 8 Ignore gate and locks jumped 16 Once the car is returned to the desig nated level from the alternate level using the Phase 1 switch es the designated level will remain the recall level thereafter even after the Phase 1 switch is returned to the OFF position A17 1a 2005 B44 04U1 32 Car goes on door nudging without a call demand B44 for buildings without fire sen sors under NBCC 64 Ignore gate and locks jumped on fire Phase 2 only To set multiple flags determine and set their combined va
382. ut is entered ONLY that output will be active If any other value from 1 to 255 is entered outputs that together add up to that value will be active For example an entry of 27 would enable outputs 16 8 2 and 1 Ifa hall lantern gong is indicated at a location an output is assigned to it by software Next available output not used by position indicator or directional arrow Thethree 3 groups of eight 8 outputs of the position indicators can be programmed to 5 any output combination at any floor f you are enabling only a single position indicator output in each group output per lamp floor and you have more than eight floors you may program a second group to drive position indicators for the next eight floors If this is the case set one position indica tor group for floors 1to 8 and the other position indicator group for floors 9 to 16 To select the desired floor 20rup arrow key to move up one floor 8 or down arrow key to move down one floor To edit a floor Press the key when you are on the desired floor You will see a blinking cursor Keep pressing the key until you reach the desired field Enterthe value using the numbers on the keypad or the Yes No keys Press the key to accept You will move to the next field If you are on the last field you will move back to the Floor Setup screen Pressthe key to abort change You will be back to the Floor Setup screen To return to the PI
383. ut off will allow the car to slow down and level to the next available floor When the car switch is moved to the down direction the bottom floor car call input will be acti vated This will start the car in motion Moving the handle to the center position bottom floor car call input off will allow the car to slow down and level to the next available floor A one floor run requires the call input to be off within two seconds of the start of the car When running the car on door disconnect from the hand held the car switch handle will latch the calls Remove the car from door disconnect operation before running the car with the switch Contents Index _MCE Web 1 15 Tricon General I nformation Nes Car Door Operation If a door operator is used the software must be standard VVD software Set up is as described above To close the door the door close input to the CTOP board must be turned on As is the case for car switch operation car direction and starting are controlled through the top and bot tom floor car calls The car door will not close without a call above or below the car Hall Call Operation Hall calls may be used and will cause the attendant buzzer to sound when a hall call is registered and the car door is not in motion If you are providing an annunciation light panel in the car wire the hall call wires to the lights The buzzer will sound for 5 seconds then switch off for 10 seconds This will continue until y
384. ve is shown to the right J obs may use different cabinet sizes depend ing upon the number and type of boards required drive size the presence or absence of group dispatcher components and envi ronmental requirements 1 2 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents index _MCE Web Figure 1 1 System Block Diagram Landing System Floating sensor head on 2 inch steel tape 3 rows of 6 inch magnetic strips Middle row Floor level Right Slow down down Rear door zone ri Left Slow down up Front door zone Cartop Station Inspection Operation Landing System I F Board Door I F may alternately be in Controller Car call I O Serial link Controller Operating mode selection Hall calls Simplex or Swing Machine room inspection controls Safety string AC DC M G capable Serial link E PW5 hub for serial communication between controller boards O Gateway board required for group communication May be in controller or in dispatcher Hand Held Unit HHU Used to program Cartop Controller and Dispatcher Plugs into network using phone jack style connection Car Controller Group Dispatcher Separate or in controller cabinet Multiple car dispatching Traffic mode control lobby peak etc Hall calls 1 3 P Fr Tricon General I nformation fd uem Figure 1 2 Typical Controller Layout I O 24 base boards use plug in modules like the one indicated to perform a variet
385. w key to move forward one 1 floor To edit a floor Press the key When you are on the desired floor you will see a blinking cursor Keep pressing the key until you reach the desired field Enterthe value using the numbers on the keypad or the Yes No keys Press the key to accept You will move to the next field If you are on the last field you will move back to a view screen Pressthe key to abort change You will be back to a view screen To return to the Dispatcher Setup menu use the key Contents Index _MCE Web 5 81 Tricon Configuration Mek Dispatcher Input amp Outputs Figure 5 19 Dispatcher Inputs and Outputs Screen The Input amp Output menu consists of three 3 sub menus I O boards DHALL card DHALL2 card DHALL3 card To move between the sub menus use 4orleft arrow key to move left 6orright arrow key to move right To move into the desired Input amp Output sub menu I O boards view screens use Bor key To return to the previous menu use key This screen allows real time observation of all I O 24 board inputs and outputs If the screen below the desired I O board is blank the board is not available or is not communicating If the board is operating properly all 24 inputs and 24 outputs will be displayed at once inputs on the left side and outputs on the right When an input is turned ON voltage at the pin it will show asa 1 An output turned ON
386. when a UV Disabled alarm low voltage is declared DB Protection Dynamic braking protection fault or Fault Fault Fault alarm selection Alarm Encoder Fault Temporarily disables Encoder Fault Enabled Enabled Enable Disabled Contents inde _MCE Web 3 51 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 5 HPV 900 Drive Parameters MeE Stopping Mode Determines stopping mode when Immediate Immedi Immediate Spd Command Src multi step Ramp to stop late Motor Ovrld Sel Motor Overload Selection Alarm Alarm FLT Imme Flt Immediate diate Fault at Stop Auto Stop Auto Stop Function enable Disable Disable Disable Enable Serial Mode Serial Protocol selection None Mode 1 None Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 2 test SER2 FLT Mode Defines reaction to a serial communi Immediate Immediate I mmediate cation fault while in Serial Mode 2 Run remove serial mode 2 rescue DRV Fast Disable Addresses how fast drive responds to Disable Disable Disable removal of Drive Enable logic input Enable MLT SPD to DLY1 Assigns multi step speed command to None None None recognition delay timer 1 mspd1 mspd15 MLT SPD to DLY2 Assigns multi step speed command to None None None recognition delay timer 2 mspd1 mspd15 MLT SPD to DLY3 Assigns multi step speed command to None None None recognition delay timer 3 mspd1 mspd15 MLT SPD to DLY4 Assigns multi step speed com
387. wiring for the car be certain to remove any temporary jumpers The drawings package for your specific job contains all the information to complete remaining hoistway car and field wiring Hoistway limit switches and floor leveling and slowdown mag net placement specific to your job are also in the drawings package The remainder of this topic contains A description of the I O 24 boards and terminal boards used for low voltage field inputs and outputs Basic brake checks nspection Learn for Limit Board A description of the landing system and hoistway tape magnets used by Tricon systems A description of the limit and slowdown switches used by Tricon systems A description of Seismic detection equipment Read these to familiarize yourself with the equipment but follow the specific instructions con tained in your drawings package for installation purposes Contents Index _MCE Web 2 19 Installation A eE Low Voltage Signal Wiring Low voltage signal wiring includes all the 24 volt inputs These include car calls door limits electric eyes etc The inputs on the I O boards only need to see 12 volts or more to turn on If the signal wires are run along side the 240 VDC door operator wiring a 12 volt spike is very likely to occur Keep low level signal wiring at least 4 inches from high power wiring to avoid false signal firing If this is not possible and the low level wiring must cross the high power wir ing
388. witch first two conditions by on adding 1 2 3 and 8 Allow fire phase 1 reduced speed run entering the value 3 when counterweight displacement switch on but fire recall floor is above the counter weight position 169 Parameter 169 0 255 JO each 170 Parameter 170 0 255 JO each 171 Parameter 171 0 255 0 each 5 49 Tricon Configuration Neo Floor Table The floor table setup screen describes the building to the car controller As delivered it can han dle 32 front and 32 rear floors front and or rear doors etc The floor table describes to the soft ware how the buildingis distributed Figure 5 4 Floor Table Screen When the screen is selected from the menu the first floor is displayed However the first car floor may not be the cars bottom floor since in a group not all cars may go to the bottom floor Table 5 19 Parameter Examples Floor Table Editable Fields Explanation Value Floor Number Floor Number See note above 1 32 Floor Designation Use keypad to enter a name up to five characters The characters can be letters digits or punctuation marks Imaginary stop The car will count this floor but it has no opening here Yes No Used mainly for blind hatches and to synchronize position indicators Front CC jFront CarCalls For local amp group Yes No Front U Front Up Hall Call Local hall calls per floor simplex independent riser Yes No Front D Front
389. with nudging speed during fire recall Default value No f set to Yes the nudging control will be operated every time the doors close during recall The purpose of this operation is to avoid injuring passengers with closing doors since the electronic eye is being ignored 5 86 Manual 42 02 2T00 _Contents Index _MCE Web Fireman Operation Setup Car parameter 116 Dispatcher parameter 47 Has remote fire recall switch Default value No When set enables operation of the remote fire switch This switch requires an on and off position When enabled Phase 1 operation is changed as required when a remote switch is used This parameter will enable the remote on and off light outputs on the EXT1 board Car parameter 117 Dispatcher parameter 46 Lobby bypass resets ALL smoke detectors Default value Yes n some operation modes smoke detectors are reset or reset and bypassed by the lobby switch being turned to the Bypass position Bypass reset is A17 1 1996 and reset is A17 1 2000 For either of these operations this parameter should be set to yes Where there is no bypass or reset switch in the lobby switch NYC this parameter should be set to no 118 Allow fire Phase 2 when recalled by machine room smoke detector Default value No When a car is recalled due to activation of the machine room smoke detector it is nor mally not allowed to operate on Phase 2 Setting this parameter to Yes overri
390. wn switch in the hoistway it will immediately start to slow down and will level and stop at the terminal floor Reset Floor Table After testing both the top and bottom floors change the Floor Table back to the correct number of floors Please refer to Floor Table on page 5 50 Contents Index _MCE Web 4 23 Release to Normal Operation Nes Emergency Terminal This procedure will test the operation of the Emergency Terminal Stopping ETS system This system is present only on cars that have rated speeds of 150 feet per minute or greater It is designed to remove power from the hoist motor and brake before the car strikes the buffer if it has failed to slow down at a terminal floor as intended Magnetek HPV 600 Drive 1 Refer to the job prints wiring diagrams Locate the sheet that shows the speed refer ence signal to the drive 2 Fordrives using one floor run logic typically 200 feet per minute or greater place a jumper from terminal TB1 14 to terminal TB1 22 on the drive 3 Fordrives not using one floor run logic typically under 200 feet per minute place a jumper from terminal TB1 14 to terminal TB1 21 on the drive The drive jumper will create a failure of the speed control system that will cause the drive not to initiate a slowdown at any floor Magnetek HPV 900 Drive 1 Refer to the job prints wiring diagrams Locate the sheet that shows the speed refer ence signal to the drive 2 Fordrives using
391. x _MCE Web Final Test Bottom Floor Test Procedure A Danger If the car has a counterweight safety ensure that the safety will not apply by tying down the safety actuating arm prior to performing this test Failure to prevent the safety from apply ing may result in the safety applying while the buffer is compressed 1 Access the Parking Floor parameter 141 in the Setup Parameters menu 2 Change this parameter to the bottom floor Step 2 commands the car to run to the bottom floor When the car reaches the bottom terminal floor it will not slow down The ETS system will trip stopping the car 3 After completing the test remove the drive jumper and any tiedown that may have been placed on a safety Contents __Indox _MCE Web 425 Release to Normal Operation 4 26 Manual 42 02 2100 MeE T T Quick Topics In this Section Overview Car Diagnostics Car Setup Dispatcher Setup Network Fireman Operation Iu e Tricon Configuration I n this Section To configure or diagnose the Tricon control or the dispatcher you use the Hand Held Unit HHU This section explains how to connect and use the HHU to view system status or errors to examine the state of Tricon inputs and outputs and to configure the Tricon control and dis patcher to suit your building HHU Basics Car Diagnostics Car Setup Dispatcher Setup Network Fireman Operation 5 1 Tricon Configuration Ae
392. y of input and output needs hall car calls position indica tors etc 5V Power Supply Microprocessor board PW5 communications hub board Limit board may be A17 1 2000 compliant or non compliant version Relay board MR Inspection controls in area indicated 1 4 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents index _MCE Web Car Controller Controller Circuit Boards The following board types may be used depending on the specific job 5V 6A Power Supply Provides 5 volt DC power distributed through the PW5 board CPU The Central Processing Unit performs control processing The same board fitted with different software is used in group dispatcher applications e PW5 Major system components communicate through a high speed serial link The PW5 board provides a point of connection for eight communicating components One of the connection points is always used by the system CPU the other seven are available for other connections These connections also distribute 5V power I O 24 Board Depending upon the software installed I O 24 boards may be used as Car Controller boards Hall I O boards Position Indicator Expansion Car Call Lockout or Dispatch boards In all cases functionality can be expanded by plugging in from one to three expansion boards Left to right viewed from the front the three expansion board locations are A B and C When used as a Car Controller the I O 24 board may have an Ac
393. y opening closing the safety string Inspection Auto Mode select for inspection or automatic normal running Door Disable Normal Disable Enable door operation Gate Bypass Select Bypass to jumper out the gate contacts from the safety string A17 1 2000 compliant boards only Buzzer will sound when in Bypass position Door Bypass Select Bypass to jumper out the door contacts from the safety string A17 1 2000 compliant boards only Buzzer will sound when in Bypass position Buzzer volume The volume of the buzzer for the Gate and Door Bypass switches is set using one of three SEL BUZ jumpers J P1 high volume J P2 medium volume J P3 low volume The bypass switches may be enabled or disabled by setting car Parameter 125 Insp Up With the Inspection Auto switch in the Inspection position runs the car up the hoistway when held down Car will automatically stop when it reaches the Normal Limit switch Insp Down With the Inspection Auto switch in the Inspection position runs the car down the hoistway when held down Car will automatically when it reaches the Normal Limit switch Contents Index _MCE Web ij Tricon General I nformation Nes Relay Board LEDs LUNT Up Normal Terminal lights yellow when this switch is open LDNT Down Normal Terminal lights yellow when this switch is open LLCK Lights green when door lock contacts are all closed LSAF Lights green when the safety string

3 - Motion Control Engineering, Inc.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents